EM730UserManual (V100)

User Manual of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter
Preface
Thank you for choosing SINEE’s EM730/EM730E series inverter.
Document No.: 31010183

Release time: June 2020
Version: 100
The EM730/EM730E series inverter is a high-reliable and small-sized universal inverter

launched by SINEE. EM730 supports three-phase AC asynchronous motors, while EM730E
supports permanent magnet synchronous motors. They support a variety of drive control
technologies, such as the vector VF (VVF) control and speed sensorless vector control (SVC);
speed output and torque output; and Wi-Fi access and background software debugging.
Features of the EM730/EM730E series inverter:

 Support debugging by the mobile phone APP or monitoring of the inverter status;
 Support Wi-Fi module or serial port access;
 Rich and convenient PC background software functions;
 No need for derating at the ambient temperature of 50 ℃;
 Support “one-key shuttle” for fast and accurate speed adjustment;
 Perfect protections: Protections against the short circuit, overcurrent, overvoltage,
overload, overheating, etc.
Before using the EM730/EM730E series inverter, please read this manual carefully
and keep it properly.
While connecting the inverter to motor for the first time, please select the motor type
(asynchronous or synchronous) correctly and set the motor nameplate parameters: rated
power, rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, motor connection, rated
power factor, etc.
Since we are committed to continuously improving our products and product data, the data
provided by us may be modified without prior notice.
For the latest changes and contents, please visit www.sinee.cn.
1
Safety precautions
Safety definition: Safety precautions are divided into the following two categories in this
manual:
Danger: The dangers caused by nonconforming operations may include serious injuries
and even deaths.
Warning: The danger caused by nonconforming operations, including moderate or
minor injuries and equipment damage.

During the installation, commissioning and maintenance, please read this chapter carefully, and
follow the safety precautions herein. Our company will not be liable for any injury or loss
arising from nonconforming operations.
Precautions
Before installation:
Danger
1. Do not install the product in the case of water in the package or missing or damaged
components found in unpacking!
2. Do not install the product in the case of inconsistency between the actual product
name and identification on the outer package.
Warning
1. Handle the controller with care; otherwise, it may be damaged!

2. Never use the inverter damaged or with some parts missing; otherwise, injuries may be
caused!
3. Do not touch the components of the control system with your hands; otherwise, there
is a danger of static damage!
During installation:
Danger
1. Please install the inverter on a metal retardant object (e.g. metal) and keep it away
2
from combustibles; otherwise, a fire may be caused!
2. Do not loosen the fixing bolts of components, especially those with red marks!
Warning
1. Never make wire connectors or screws fall into the inverter; otherwise, the inverter
may be damaged!
2. Install the inverter in a place with little vibration and exposure to direct sunlight.
3. When the inverter is installed a relatively closed cabinet or space, pay attention to the
installation gap to ensure the effects of heat dissipation.
During wiring:
Danger
1. Follow the instructions in this manual, and appoint professional and electrical
engineering personnel to complete wiring; otherwise, unexpected dangers may be
caused!
2. The inverter and power supply must be separated by a circuit breaker
(recommendation: greater than or equal to and closest to twice the rated current);
otherwise, a fire may be caused!
3. Before wiring, make sure that the power supply is in the zero energy status; otherwise,
electric shock may be caused!
4. Never connect the input power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter.
Pay attention to the marks of wiring terminals, and connect wires correctly! Otherwise,
the inverter may be damaged!
5. Make the inverter grounded correctly and reliably according to the standards;
otherwise, electric shock and fire may be caused!
Warning
1. Make sure that the lines meet the EMC requirements and local safety standards. For
wire diameters, refer to the recommendations. Otherwise, an accident may occur!
2. Never connect the braking resistor directly between the DC bus and terminal.
Otherwise, a fire may be caused!
3. Tighten the terminals with a screwdriver of specified torque; otherwise, there is a risk
of fire.
4. Never connect the phase-shifting capacitor and LC/RC noise filter to the output circuit.
5. Do not connect the electromagnetic switch and electromagnetic contactor to the output
circuit. Otherwise, the overcurrent protection circuit of the inverter will be enabled. In
severe cases, the inverter may be subject to internal damage.
6. Do not dismantle the connecting cable inside the inverter; otherwise, internal damage
may be caused to the inverter.
3
Before power-on:
Danger
1. Make sure that the voltage level of the input power supply is consistent with the rated
voltage of the inverter; and the input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V,
W) of the power supply are connected correctly. Check whether there is short circuit in
the peripheral circuits connected to the inverter and whether all connecting lines are
tightened; otherwise, the inverter may be damaged!
2. The withstand voltage test has been performed to all parts of the inverter, so it is not
necessary to carry it out again. Otherwise, an accident may be caused!
Warning
1. The inverter must not be powered on until it is properly covered; otherwise, electric
shock may be caused!
2. The wiring of all peripheral accessories must be in line with the instructions in this
manual. All wires should be connected correctly according to the circuit connections in
this manual. Otherwise, an accident may occur!
After power-on:
Danger
1. Never touch the inverter and surrounding circuits with wet hands; otherwise,
electric shock may occur!
2. If the indicator is not ON and the keyboard has no response after power-on,
immediately turn off the power supply. Never touch the inverter terminals (R,
S, T) and the terminals on the terminal block with your hands or screwdriver;
otherwise, electric shock may be caused. Upon turning off the power supply,
contact our customer service personnel.
3. At the beginning of power-on, the inverter automatically performs a safety test
to external strong current circuits. Do not touch the inverter terminals (U, V,
W) or motor terminals; otherwise, electric shock may be caused!
4. Do not disassemble any parts of the inverter while it is powered on.
Warning
1. When parameter identification is required, please pay attention to the danger of injury
during motor rotation; otherwise, an accident may occur!
2. Do not change the parameters set by the inverter manufacturer without permission;
otherwise, the inverter may be damaged!
4
During operation:
Danger
1. Do not touch the cooling fan, radiator and discharge resistor to feel the temperature;
otherwise, burns may be caused!
2. Non-professional technicians must not test signals when the controller is in operation;
otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage may be caused!
Warning
1. Prevent any object from falling into the inverter in operation; otherwise, the inverter
may be damaged!
2. Do not start or stop the inverter by turning on or off the contactor; otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged!
During maintenance:
Danger
1. Never carry out repair and maintenance in the live state; otherwise, electric shock may
be caused!
2. Maintenance of the inverter must be carried out 10 min after the main circuit is
powered off and the display interface of the keyboard is disabled; otherwise, the
residual charge in the capacitor will do harm to the human body!
3. Personnel without professional training are not allowed to repair and maintain the
inverter; otherwise, personal injury or inverter damage may be caused!
4. The parameters must be set after the inverter is replaced. Plugs in all interfaces must
be operated in the power-off status!
5. The synchronous motor generates electricity while rotating. Inverter maintenance and
repair must be performed 10 min after the power supply is turned off and the motor
stops running; otherwise, electric shock may be caused!
Precautions
Motor insulation inspection
When the motor is used for the first time or after long-term storage or subject to regular
inspection, its insulation should be checked to prevent the inverter from damage caused by
failure of the motor winding insulation. During the insulation inspection, the motor must be
disconnected from the inverter. It is recommended to use a 500V megohmmeter. The measured
insulation resistance must not be less than 5 MΩ.
Thermal protection of motor

If the motor used does not match the rated capacity of the inverter, especially when the rated
power of the inverter is greater than that of the motor, the motor must be protected by adjusting
the motor protection parameters of the inverter or installing a thermal relay in front of the motor.
5
Operation above power frequency
This inverter can provide the output frequency of 0.00Hz to 600.00Hz/0.0Hz to 3000.0Hz.
When the motor needs to operate above the rated frequency, please consider the capacity of the
mechanical device.
About motor heat and noise

Since the inverter outputs PWM waves, containing some harmonics, the temperature rise, noise
and vibration of the motor will be slightly more than those in operation at the power frequency.
Presence of voltage-dependent device or capacitor increasing the power factor on output

side
The inverter outputs PWM waves. If there is a capacitor increasing the power factor or
voltage-dependent resistor for lightning protection on the output side, the inverter may be
subjected to instantaneous overcurrent and even damage. Do not use these devices.
Use beyond rated voltage

The EM730/EM730E series open-loop vector inverter should not be used beyond the allowable
working voltage range specified in this manual; otherwise, the components inside the inverter
are prone to damage. If necessary, use the appropriate step-up or step-down device for voltage
transformation.
Lightning impulse protection

The inverter of this series is equipped with a lightning overcurrent protector, which has certain
capabilities in self-protection against induced lightning. Where lightning strikes occur frequently,
a protective device should be added in front of the inverter.
Altitude and derating

In areas with an altitude of more than 1,000 m, where heat dissipation of the inverter is poor due
to thin air, derating is required (derating by 1% per 100 m altitude increase to maximum 3,000
m; for ambient temperature above 50℃, derating by 1.5% per 1 ℃ temperature rise to
maximum 60℃). Contact us for technical advice.
Precautions for scrapping of inverter

Burning of the electrolytic capacitors of the main circuit and printed circuit board may result in
explosion, and burning of plastic parts may generate toxic gases. Please dispose of the controller
as a kind of industrial waste.
6
Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................. 1
Safety precautions ........................................................................................... 2
Precautions...................................................................................................................... 2
Precautions...................................................................................................................... 5
Chapter 1 Overview ...................................................................................... 10

1.1 Model and Specification of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter .................................. 10
1.2 Detailed Introduction to Running Status of EM730/EM730E series Inverter ........... 13
Chapter 2 Installation ................................................................................... 19

2.1 Product check ........................................................................................................... 19
2.2 Outline dimensions and installation dimensions....................................................... 20
2.3 Installation Site Requirements and Management ..................................................... 24
2.4 Installation Direction and Space ............................................................................... 25
Chapter 3 Wiring ........................................................................................... 26

3.1 Connection of Peripheral Device .............................................................................. 26
3.2 Wiring of Main Circuit Terminal .............................................................................. 27
3.3 Wiring of Control Circuit Terminal .......................................................................... 39
3.4 Extension wiring of keyboard................................................................................... 47
3.5 Connection test ......................................................................................................... 47
Chapter 4 KEYBOARD OPERATIONS ..................................................... 48

4.1 Keyboard Functions ................................................................................................. 48
4.2 Operation Mode of Keyboard with Digital Tube Display ......................................... 49
4.3 Protection Monitoring .............................................................................................. 54
4.4 Operation Monitoring ............................................................................................... 54
4.5 Run/Stop ................................................................................................................... 55
4.6 Other Warning Prompts ............................................................................................ 56
Chapter 5 Trial run ....................................................................................... 57

7
5.1 Inverter Commissioning Process .............................................................................. 57

5.2 Confirmation before Power-on ................................................................................. 58
5.3 Inverter Status Confirmation after Power-on ............................................................ 58
5.4 Precautions for Application Macro Setting ............................................................... 58
5.5 Start and Stop Control .............................................................................................. 59
5.6 Common Process Parameters of Inverter.................................................................. 62
5.7 Motor Parameter Identification ................................................................................ 63
Chapter 6 Function Code Table ................................................................... 64

6.1 Description of Function Code Table ......................................................................... 64
6.2 Table of functional parameters ................................................................................. 66
Chapter 7 Function Code Details ............................................................... 129

7.1 Basic Function Parameter Group of F00 Group ..................................................... 129
7.2 Motor 1 parameter group of F01 group .................................................................. 147
7.3 Function Parameter Group of Input Terminal of F02 Group .................................. 152
7.4 Function Parameter Group of Output Terminal of F03 Group ................................ 166
7.5 Start/Stop Control Parameter Group of F04 Group ................................................ 177
7.6 VF Control Parameter Group of F05 Group ........................................................... 185
7.7 Vector Control Parameter Group of F06 Group ...................................................... 191
7.8 F07 protection parameter group ............................................................................. 199
7.9 Multi-segment Speed and Simple PLC Parameter Group of F08 Group ................ 207
7.10 PID Function Parameter Group of F09 Group ...................................................... 217
7.11 Communication Function Parameter Group of F10 Group ................................... 231
7.12 User-selected Parameter Group of F11 Group ...................................................... 236
7.13 Keyboard and Display Function Parameter Group of F12 Group ........................ 238
7.14 Torque Control Parameter Group of F13 Group ................................................... 245
7.15 Parameter Group of Motor 2 of F14 group ........................................................... 250
7.16 Auxiliary Function Parameter Group of F15 Group ............................................. 253
7.17 F16 customized function parameter group ........................................................... 265
7.18 Virtual I/O Function Parameter Group of F17 Group ........................................... 272
7.19 Monitoring Parameter Group of F18 Group ......................................................... 276
8
7.20 F19 protection record parameter group ................................................................ 279

7.21 F27 winding and unwinding application macro parameter group......................... 282
Chapter 8 Motor Parameter Self-identification ........................................ 298

8.1 Motor Parameter Self-identification ....................................................................... 298
8.2 Precautions before Self-identification .................................................................... 299
8.3 Self-identification Steps ......................................................................................... 300
Chapter 9 Protection/Warning Solutions .................................................. 301

9.1 Protection content ................................................................................................... 301
9.2 Protection analysis .................................................................................................. 306
9.3 Daily Maintenance of Inverter ................................................................................ 310
9.4 Instructions for Inverter Warranty .......................................................................... 311
Chapter 10 Select accessories ..................................................................... 313

10.1 Braking Resistor ................................................................................................... 313
10.2 Braking unit .......................................................................................................... 314
10.3 Wi-Fi module........................................................................................................ 316
Chapter 11 MODBUS Communication Protocol ...................................... 317

11.1 Applicable scope................................................................................................... 317
11.2 Interface mode ...................................................................................................... 317
11.3 Protocol Format .................................................................................................... 317
11.4 Protocol Description ............................................................................................. 339
11.5 Examples .............................................................................................................. 342
9
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Model and Specification of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter

 Rated voltage of power supply:
Three-phase AC 340-460V, three-phase/single-phase AC 200V-240V;
 Applicable motor: Three-phase AC asynchronous motor (EM730) and permanent magnet
synchronous motor (EM730E).
The model and rated output current of EM730/EM730E series inverter are as shown in
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 EM730/EM730E Series Inverter
Applicable Heavy-duty Light-duty
Rated voltage of Model motor power rated output rated output
power supply (kW) current (A) current (A)
EM730/EM730E-0R4-2B 0.4 2.8 3.2
Single-phase/three-p
EM730/EM730E-0R7-2B 0.75 4.8 5.0
hase AC
EM730/EM730E-1R5-2B 1.5 8 8.5
200V～240V
EM730/EM730E-2R2-2B 2.2 10 11.5
EM730/EM730E-0R7-3B 0.75 2.5 3
EM730/EM730E-1R5-3B 1.5 4.2 4.6
EM730/EM730E-2R2-3B 2.2 5.6 6.5
EM730/EM730E-4R0-3B 4.0 9.4 10.5
EM730/EM730E-5R5-3B 5.5 13 15.7
EM730/EM730E-7R5-3B 7.5 17 20.5
EM730/EM730E-011-3B 11 25 28
EM730/EM730E-015-3B 15 32 36
Three-phase AC EM730/EM730E-018-3B 18.5 38 41.5
340～460V EM730/EM730E-022-3B 22 45 49
EM730/EM730E-030-3/3B 30 60 70
EM730/EM730E-037-3/3B 37 75 85
EM730/EM730E-045-3 45 90 105
EM730/EM730E-055-3 55 110 134
EM730/EM730E-075-3 75 150 168
EM730/EM730E-090-3 90 176 200
EM730/EM730E-110-3 110 210 235
EM730/EM730E-132-3 132 253 290
10
EM730/EM730E-160-3 160 304 340
★ Correct selection of the inverter: The rated output current of the inverter is greater than or
equal to the rated current of the motor, taking into account the overload capacity.
★ The difference between the rated power of the inverter and that of the motor is usually
recommended not to exceed two power segments.
★ When a high-power inverter is provided with a low-power motor, the motor parameters
must be entered accurately to prevent the motor from damage as a result of overload.
The technical specifications of the EM730/EM730Eseries inverter are shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Technical Specifications of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter
Item Specification
Three-phase 340V-10% to 460V+10%,
Power Rated voltage of
Single-phase/three-phase 200V-10% to 240V+10%;
supply power supply
50-60Hz ±5%; voltage unbalance rate: <3%
Maximum output The maximum output voltage is the same as the input power
voltage voltage.
Rated output current Continuous output of 100% rated current
Output 150% heavy-duty rated current: 60s; 180% heavy-duty rated
Maximum overload current: 10s; 200% heavy-duty rated current: 2s
current 120% light-duty rated current: 60s; 150% light-duty rated
current: 10s; 180% light-duty rated current: 2s
Drive mode V/F control (VVF); speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
Input mode Frequency (speed) input, torque input
Start and stop control Keyboard, control terminal (two-line control and three-line
mode control), communication
Basic
Frequency control
control 0.00~600.00Hz/0.0~3000.0HZ
range
functions
Input frequency Digital input: 0.01Hz/0.1Hz
resolution Analog input: 0.1% of maximum frequency
Speed control range 1:50 (VVF), 1:200 (SVC)
Speed control Rated synchronous speed ±0.2%
11
accuracy
Acceleration and
0.01 s to 600.00 s / 0.1 s to 6,000.0 s / 1 s to 60,000 s
deceleration time
Voltage/frequency Rated output voltage: 20% to 100%, adjustable
characteristics Reference frequency: 1Hz to 600Hz/3,000Hz
Fixed torque boost curve
Torque boost
Any V/F curve is acceptable.
150%/1Hz (VVF)
Starting torque
150%/0.25Hz (SVC)
Torque control
±5% rated torque (SVC)
accuracy
Self-adjustment of When the input voltage changes, the output voltage will
output voltage basically remain unchanged.
Automatic current Output current is automatically limited to avoid frequent
limit overcurrent trips.
Braking frequency: 0.01 to maximum frequency Braking
DC braking time: 0～30S
Braking current: 0% to 150% rated current
Signal input source Communication, multi-speed, analog, etc.
Reference power
10V/20mA
supply
Terminal control
24V/100mA
power
Input and 5-channel digital multi-function input: X1~X5
output Digital input terminal X5 can be used as the high-speed pulse input (max.
function 100kHZ).
2-channel analog inputs:
Analog input One (AI1) voltage source: -10 to 10V input;
terminal One channel (AI2): 0 to 10V input voltage or 0 to 20mA
input current optional;
12
Multi-function output of one open collector and one relay

Digital output Maximum output current of the collector: 50 mA;
terminal Relay contact capacity: 250VAC/3A or 30VDC/1A,
EA-EC: normally open; EB-EC: normally closed
Analog output One multi-function analog terminal output
terminal M1: 0-10V/0-20mA multi-function analog output terminal
The LED digital tube displays relevant information about the
Keyboard LED display
inverter.
Short circuit, overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, phase
Protection Protective Function
loss, overload, overheat, load loss, external protection, etc.
Indoor, at an altitude of less than 1 km, free of dust,
corrosive gases and direct sunlight. When the altitude is
Location
higher than 1km, it is derated by 1% per 100m. The
maximum allowable altitude is 3km.
-10℃ to +50℃, 5% to 95%RH (no condensation). When
Use
Applicable the ambient temperature exceeds 50°C, it needs to be derated
conditions
environment by 3% per 1°C temperature rise. The maximum allowable
ambient temperature is 60°C.
Vibration Less than 0.5g
Storage environment -40℃～+70℃
Installation method Wall-mounted or installed in the cabinet
Levels of protection IP20/IP21 (with plastic baffle)
Cooling method Forced air cooling
1.2 Detailed Introduction to Running Status of EM730/EM730E series

Inverter
1.2.1 Working status of inverter
The working status of EM730/EM730E series inverter is divided into: parameter setting
status, normal running status, jog running status, self-learning running status, stop status, jog
stop status and protection status.
 Parameter setting status: After being powered on and initialized, the inverter will be in
the standby status with no trip protection or start command, and have no output.
13
 Normal running status: Upon receiving a valid start command (from the keyboard,
control terminal and communication), the inverter will have the output based on the set
input requirements, driving the motor to rotate.
 Jog running status: This is enabled by the keyboard, external terminal or communication,
driving the motor to rotate at the jog input speed.
 Self-learning running status: This is enabled by the keyboard, detecting relevant
parameters of the motor in the stationary or rotating status.
 Stop status: It is a process for the output frequency to decrease to zero according to the
set deceleration time in the case of invalid operating commands.
 Jog stop status: It is a process for the output frequency to decrease to zero according to
the jog deceleration time in the case of invalid jog operating commands.
 Protection status: Refer to the inverter status in the case of any protection.
1.2.2 Running mode of inverter
The running mode of the inverter refers to the control law of the inverter to drive the motor
to rotate at the required speed and torque. The running mode includes:
 General open-loop space vector control-VVF control: suitable for applications where the
speed is not changing fast and there are not high requirements for the accuracy of
rotating speed, and most AC motor drives.
 Speed sensorless vector control-SVC control: advanced speed estimation algorithm,
involving open-loop vector control and high control accuracy but no encoder.
1.2.3 Set mode of inverter
The set mode of the inverter refers to the physical quantity that is taken as the controlled
target when the inverter drives a motor.
 Speed setting mode with the motor speed as controlled target
Digital setting, analog input setting, high-speed pulse input setting, communication setting,
digital potentiometer setting, process PID setting, simple PLC setting or multi-segment speed
setting can be performed separately or in a mixed manner. Fig. 1-1to Fig. 1-4 detail various
input modes of the EM730/EM730E series inverter by speed setting.
14
Setting of main
frequency source A
Setting of auxiliary 0: synthetic frequency of main

frequency source B and auxiliary channels
0
1 Setting of main and

auxiliary operations 0
2
Options of Synthetic 1: AI1 * synthetic frequency of main
frequency source Setting of main frequency and auxiliary channels Frequency
F00.06 frequency source A gain of 1 setting limit:
Analog adjustment
3
Frequency source
switching DI:26 Y
N main and
auxiliary options F00.13 F00.16;
direction: Fig.
Setting of auxiliary channels F00.21 etc.
4 frequency source B F00.12 2
Setting of main
5 frequency source A 2: AI2 * synthetic frequency of main
N and auxiliary channels
Frequency source
switching DI:26 Y Setting of main and
auxiliary operations
Setting of auxiliary
frequency source B
Frequency source N
switching DI:26 Y Setting of main and
auxiliary operations
1-1Schematic Diagram of Speed Input Mode

As shown in Fig. 1-1, speed setting of EM730/EM730E series inverter is mainly divided into
the setting of main frequency source A setting (referred to as “main A”), setting of auxiliary
frequency source B (referred to as “auxiliary B”), and setting of main and auxiliary operations.
The final settings are made by simply adjustment and limitation (e.g. upper frequency limit,
maximum frequency limit, direction limit, frequency hopping limit). See Figs. 1-2 to 1-4 for
setting details.
nth segment: F08.00- 1: digital frequency setting F00.07 UP/DOWN setting

F08.14
1：AI1*F00.16
n=1,2,…,15
0
1 2：AI2*F00.16
2 +
+
Multi-segment speed Main frequency Main frequency source A: 5 5：HDI*F00.16 Gain of main
0 None
terminal DI:14~11 switching DI:51~56 F00.04 frequency
6 source F00.10
+
+
7 6：SCI*F00.16
Valid
F00.07 8
AI1 7：SCI
AI2
Communication
8: digital potentiometer
Fig. 1-2 Schematic diagram of Setting of Main Frequency Source A

As shown in Fig. 1-2, it is necessary to comprehensively consider the digital terminal setting
and its status during the setting of the main frequency source A. Depending on the terminal
settings, multi-segment speed operation can be performed or digital, analog, pulse or
communication settings can be applied directly.
15
If the terminals are unavailable, the current setting channel is determined by the function
code F00.04, and final settings are obtained through UP/DOWN setting calculation.
0: digital frequency setting F00.07
1：AI1*F00.16
2：AI2*F00.16
0
1
5: HDI*F00.16
2
5 Gain of
Auxiliary frequency source 6: SCI*F00.16 auxiliary
6
B: F00.05 frequency
7 source F00.11
7：SCI
8
10
11
10: process PID
11: simple PLC
Fig. 1-3 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Auxiliary Frequency Source B

As shown in Fig. 1-3, the current setting channel is determined directly by the function code
F00.05 during the setting of the auxiliary frequency source B, and the process PID and simple
PLC can be involved in the setting.
0: main A + auxiliary B
0
1: main A - auxiliary B
Gain of main
Options of main and 1
and auxiliary
auxiliary operation
frequency
F00.08 2 source F00.12
3 2: max (main A, auxiliary B)
3: min (main A, auxiliary B)
Fig. 1-4 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Main and Auxiliary Operations

As shown in Fig. 1-4, main and auxiliary operations are divided into four types, in which
main and auxiliary settings are valid.
 Torque setting mode with the motor current as controlled target
16
The digital setting, analog input setting, high-speed pulse input setting, communication
setting, digital potentiometer setting or multi-segment torque setting can be applied. Fig. 1-5
details the input modes of EM730/EM730E series inverters with the set torque.
Torque of the n th segment

F13.03~F13.05 Compensation for
0: digital torque setting F13.02 dynamic and static
friction
n=1,2,3
1：AI1*F13.02
0
1 +
2：AI2*F13.02 +
Multi-segment torque Options of torque 2 Limit of the set
0
terminal DI:18~17 setting source F13.01 torque: Size and
4
direction
5：HDI*F13.02 +
6 +
8
6：SCI*F13.02
Fig. 1-5 Schematic Diagram of Torque Input Mode
★：The jog speed setting mode is superior to other setting modes. That is, when the control
terminals FJOG and RJOG are enabled, the inverter will automatically change to the jog speed
setting mode, regardless of the current setting mode.
1.2.4 Operation method of inverter
The operation method of the inverter refers to the operating conditions for the inverter to
enable the running status. It includes: keyboard operation, terminal operation and
communication operation. Terminal operation is divided into two-line control (RUN, F/R) and
three-line control (RUN, F/R, Xi (i=1-5)) (change the definition of Xi to three-line operation
stop control). The control logic of this operation method is shown inFig. 1-6 (take the NPN
input mode as an example).
17
Running Running
K1 K2 K1 K1 K2 K1 RU
command RUN command
N
0 0 Reverse 0 0 Stop
Xi Xi
0 1 Forward 0 1 Forward
1 0 Stop K2 1 0 Reverse K2
F/R F/R
1 1 Stop 1 1 Stop CO
COM
M
0: closed 1: disconneted 0: closed 1: disconneted
(a) Two-line running mode 0 (F00.03=0) (b) Two-line running mode 1 (F00.03=1)
RUN RUN Run button
Forward Xi Stop button

RUN
button
Xi Xi
Reverse F/R
F/R button
Xi Stop button 1 Forward

F/R F/R
COM 0 Reverse CO
M
0: closed 1: disconneted
(c) Three-line running mode 0 (F00.03=2) (d) Three-line running mode 1 (F00.03=3)
Fig. 1-6 Control Logic Diagram of Terminal Operation
18
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Product check
Danger
 Never install the inverter damaged or with some parts missing.

Otherwise, injuries may be caused.
When you get the product, please check it according to Table 2-1.
Table2-1 Check Items
Item to be confirmed Confirming methods
Check whether the product is consistent Check the nameplate on the side face of the
with the order. inverter.
Check whether any part is damaged. Check the overall appearance for damage caused
in transportation.
Check whether the fastened parts (e.g. If necessary, check the product with a
screws) are loose. screwdriver.
In the case of any defect, contact the agent or our Marketing Department.
 Nameplate
 Description of inverter model
19
EM730-4R0-3B
Product series:
M730:EM730 inverter B: Built-in braking unit
EM730E:EM730E inverter
Power (kW) of the supporting motor
of inverter Input power voltage level:
Example: 4R0: 4.0kW 2: Single/three-phase 220V
0.37:37kW 3: Three-phase 380V
2.2 Outline dimensions and installation dimensions

EM730/EM730E series inverters involve 25 specifications, two types of appearance and
ten installation sizes, as shown in Fig. 2-1 and Table 2-2.
D1
D2
D
(a) Appearance of EM730/EM730E-0R7-3B to EM730/EM730E-022-3B inverters

20
D2
D1
W D
W1 d
H2
H1
H
(b) Appearance of EM730/EM730E-030-3B to EM730/EM730E-075-3 inverters
21
D2
D1
W D
W1
(c)
H1
H2
Appearance of EM730/EM730E-090-3 to EM730/EM730E-160-3 inverters
72
6.8
20
18
70.6
57
49
75
(d) EM730 keyboard appearance

Fig.2-1 Outline Dimensions of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter and Keyboard
22
Table 2-2 Outline and Installation Dimensions of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter

Specifications W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 D2 d
EM730/EM730E-0R4-2B
75 65 142 132 146 67 152 4.5
EM730/EM730E-0R7-2B
EM730/EM730E-1R5-2B
93 82 172 163 136 85 141 4.7
EM730/EM730E-2R2-2B
EM730/EM730E-0R7-3B
75 65 142 132 146 67 152 4.5
EM730/EM730E-1R5-3B
EM730/EM730E-2R2-3B
93 82 172 163 136 85 141 4.7
EM730/EM730E-4R0-3B
EM730/EM730E-5R5-3B
109 98 207 196 154 103 160 5.5
EM730/EM730E-7R5-3B
EM730/EM730E-011-3B
136 125 250 240 169 115 174 5.5
EM730/EM730E-015-3B
EM730/EM730E-018-3B
190 175 293 280 184 145 189 6.5
EM730/EM730E-022-3B
EM730/EM730E-030-3
EM730/EM730E-030-3B
245 200 454 440 420 205 156 212 7.5
EM730/EM730E-037-3
EM730/EM730E-037-3B
EM730/EM730E-045-3
300 266 524 508 480 229 174 236 9
EM730/EM730E-055-3
EM730/EM730E-075-3 335 286 580 563 536 228 177 235 9
EM730/EM730E-090-3
335 286 630 608 570 310 247 317 11
EM730/EM730E-110-3
EM730/EM730E-132-3
430 330 770 747 710 311 248 319 13
EM730/EM730E-160-3
23
2.3 Installation Site Requirements and Management
Attention
1、 When carrying the inverter, hold its bottom.

If you hold the panel only, the body main fall to hit your feet.
2、 Install the inverter on non-flammable boards (e.g. metal).
If the inverter is installed on a flammable object, a fire may occur.
3、 When two or more inverters are installed in one control cabinet, please install a
cooling fan and keep the air temperature below 50 ℃ at the air inlet.
Overheating may cause fire and other accidents.
2.3.1 Installation site
The installation site should meet the following conditions:
1. The room is well ventilated.
2. The ambient temperature should be -10C to 50C. When the plastic case is used at
the ambient temperature above 40℃, remove the top baffle.
3. The controller should be free from high temperature and humidity (less than 90%
RH) or rainwater and other liquid droplets.
4. Please install the inverter on a fire-retardant object (e.g. metal). Never install it on
flammable objects (e.g. wood).
5. No direct sunlight.
6. There should be no flammable or corrosive gas and liquid.
7. There should be no dust, oily dust, floating fibers or metal particles.
8. The installation foundation should be secured and vibration-free.
9. Avoid electromagnetic interference and keep the controller away from interference
sources.
2.3.2 Environment temperature
In order to improve the operational reliability, please install the inverter in a well-ventilated
place. When it is used in a closed cabinet, a cooling fan or cooling air conditioner should be
installed to keep the ambient temperature below 50 C.
24
2.3.3 Preventive measures
Take protective measures to the inverter during installation to prevent metal fragments or
dust generated in drilling and other processes from falling into the inverter. Remove the
protection after installation.
2.4 Installation Direction and Space

The EM730/EM730E-1R5-3B inverters and above are equipped with the cooling fan for
forced air cooling. To ensure good cyclic cooling effects, the inverter must be installed in a
vertical direction, and sufficient spaces must be reserved between the inverter and adjacent
objects or baffles (walls). Refer to Fig. 2-2.
Fig.2-2 Inverter Installation Direction and Space
25
Chapter 3 Wiring
3.1 Connection of Peripheral Device

The standard connection between the EM730/EM730E series inverter and peripheral
devices is shown in Fig.3-1.
Power supply
Circuit breaker or leakage

protection switch
Contactor
AC input reactor
BR100Braking unit
Input-side noise filter Braking resistor
EM730/EM73
0E inverter
Braking resistor
Output-side noise filter
AC output reactor Grounding
Three phase motor
Fig.3-1 Connection of Inverter and Peripheral Devices
26
3.2 Wiring of Main Circuit Terminal

3.2.1 Composition of main circuit terminal
The main circuit terminal of the EM730/EM730E series inverter consists of the following
parts:
 Three-phase AC power input terminals: R, S, T
 Earth terminal:
 DC bus terminals: 、
 Terminals of dynamic braking resistor: PB,
 Motor terminals: U, V, W
The layout of main circuit terminals is shown in Fig. 3-2.
a) Schematic Diagram of Terminals (380V, 0.75kW-1.5kW)
27
b) Schematic Diagram of Terminals (380V, 2.2kW-4.0kW)
c) Schematic Diagram of Terminals (380V, 5.5kW-22kW) (with slight difference in the

grounding position)
28
d) Schematic Diagram of Terminals (380V, 30kW-37kW)
e) Schematic Diagram of Terminals (380V, 45kW-110kW)
29
f) Schematic Diagram of Terminals (380V, 132kW-160kW)

Fig.3-2 Schematic Diagram of Main Circuit Terminal Layout
3.2.2 Functions of main circuit terminals
The functions of the main circuit terminals of the EM730/EM730E series inverter are
shown in the following table. Please connect wires correctly according to the corresponding
functions.
Functions of main circuit terminals
Terminal label Function description
AC power input terminal, connected to three-phase AC power supply (the
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 single-phase power input terminal can be connected with any two terminals)
U, V, W AC output terminal of the inverter, connected to three-phase AC motor

Positive and negative terminals of the internal DC bus, connected to external
braking unit
Braking resistor terminal, with one end of the braking resistor connected to and
, PB
the other end to PB
DC reactor terminal, for the external DC reactor of EM730/EM730E-090-3 and
P,
above
Grounding terminal, connected to earth
30
3.2.3 Standard wiring diagram of main circuit

The standard wiring diagram of the main circuit of the EM730/EM730E series inverter is
shown in Fig. 3-3.
 Wiring of built-in brake unit  Wiring of external brake unit

B r a k i n g r e s i (o
s t po tri o n)a l
Braking resistor
(optional) B r a k i n g u (o
n ipt t i o n)a l
PB
R U R U
S V M S V M
T W T W
Fig.3-3 Standard Wiring of Main Circuit

3.2.4 Input side wiring of main circuit
Installation of circuit breaker
Install the air circuit breaker (MCCB) corresponding to the inverter between the power
supply and input terminal.
 The MCCB capacity should be 1.5-2 times the rated current of the inverter.
 The time characteristics of the MCCB must meet the requirements for overheat
protection (150% rated current/1 minute) of the inverter.
 When the MCCB is used with multiple inverters or other devices, connect the protection
output relay contact of the inverter in series to the power contactor coil, as shown in
Fig.3-4, to disconnect the power supply according to the protection signal.
31
MCCB
R
Inverter
S
T
MC
EB Fault relay
OFF ON contact
EC
MC
Fig.3-4 Connection of Input Circuit Breaker
Installation of leakage circuit breaker

Since the inverter outputs high-frequency PWM signals, a high-frequency leakage current
will be generated. Please use the dedicated leakage circuit breaker with the current sensitivity
above 30 mA. If an ordinary leakage circuit breaker is used, use a leakage circuit breaker with
the current sensitivity above 200 mA and action time of more than 0.1 s.
Installation of electromagnetic contactor

Connect the electromagnetic contactor that matches the power of the inverter, as shown in
Fig. 3-4.
 Do not control the operation and stop of the inverter via the electromagnetic
contactor on the incoming line side. Frequent use of this method is an important
cause of damage to the inverter. The frequency of operation and stop of the
electromagnetic contactor on the incoming line side must not exceed once every 30
min.
 After the power supply is restored, the inverter will not run automatically.
Connection with terminal block

The phase sequence of the input power supply is unrelated to that (R, S, T) of the terminal
block, so that the terminals of the input power supply can be connected arbitrarily.
Installation of AC reactor
When a large-capacity (above 600KVA) power transformer is connected, or the input
power supply is connected to a capacitive load, a high inrush current will be generated, which
32
will cause damage to the rectifier part of the inverter. In this case, please connect a three-phase
AC reactor (optional) to the input side of the inverter. This will not only suppress the peak
current and voltage, but also improve the power factor of the system.
Installation of surge suppressor

When an inductive load (electromagnetic contactor, solenoid valve, solenoid coil,
electromagnetic circuit breaker, etc.) is connected near the inverter, please install a surge
suppressor.
Installation of noise filter on power supply side

The noise filter is used to suppress the noise that invades the inverter from the power cable,
and the impact of inverter noise on the power grid.
 Use a dedicated noise filter for the inverter. Ordinary noise filters do not have
good effects, so they are not used usually.
 The correct and incorrect installations of the noise filter are shown in Fig. 3-5 and Fig. 3-6.
MCCB
Dedicated
Inverter IM
noise filter
EMC
Other
control
devices
Fig.3-5 Correct Installation of Noise Filter
33
MCCB
Ordinary noise
Inverter IM
filter
Other control
devices
(a)
MCCB
Inverter IM
Ordinary noise Other control

filter devices
(b)
Fig. 3-6 Incorrect Installation of Noise Filter
3.2.5 Output side wiring of main circuit
Wiring of inverter and motor
Connect the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter to those (U, V, W) of the motor.
During operation, check whether the motor rotates forward when a forward rotation
command is sent. If the motor rotates reversely, exchange any two wires of the output terminals
(U, V, W) of the inverter.
Prohibition of connection of the power cable to output terminal
Never connect the power cable to output terminal. When the voltage is applied on the
output terminal, the internal components of the inverter may be damaged.
34
Prohibition of short circuit or grounding of output terminal
Do not directly touch the output terminals, or short-circuit the output cable and inverter
housing; otherwise, electric shock and short circuit may be caused. In addition, never
short-circuit the output cable.
Prohibition of use of phase-shifting capacitor
Do not connect a phase-shifting advanced electrolytic capacitor or LC/RC filter to the
output circuit; otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
Prohibition of use of electromagnetic switch
Do not connect the electromagnetic switch or electromagnetic contactor to output circuit.
Otherwise, such devices will enable overcurrent and overvoltage protection and even damage
the internal components of the inverter in severe cases.
When an electromagnetic contactor is used to switch the PF power supply, make sure that
switching is not performed until the inverter and motor are shut down.
Installation of noise filter on output side
Connect a noise filter on the output side of the inverter to reduce inductive interference and
radio interference.
 Inductive interference: Electromagnetic induction will lead to noise of the signal
line and malfunction of controls.
 Radio interference: The high-frequency electromagnetic waves emitted by the
inverter itself and cables will cause interference to nearby radio devices and noise in
signal reception.
 The noise filter installation on the output side is shown in Fig. 3-7.
MCCB
Inverter Noise filter IM
Transmission interference
Signal lines
Control Radio device
device
Fig.3-7 Noise Filter Installation on Output Side

35
Solution to inductive interference
To suppress the inductive interference on the output side, all output cables can be laid in the
grounded metal tubes, in addition to the aforesaid installation of the noise filter. When the
distance between the output cable and signal line is greater than 30 cm, the impact of inductive
interference will decrease significantly, as shown in Fig. 3-8.
MCCB Metal tube
Inverter IM
30cm above
Signal lines
Control device
Fig.3-8 Solution to Inductive Interference
Solution to RF interference
The input cable, output cable and inverter itself generates RF interference, which can be
reduced by installing noise filters on the input and output sides and shielding the inverter body
with an iron box, as shown in Fig. 3-9.
Iron box
MCCB Metal tube
Noise filter Inverter Noise filter IM
Fig.3-9 Solution to RF Interference
Wiring distance between inverter and motor

The longer the wiring distance between the inverter and motor, the higher the carrier
frequency and the higher harmonic leakage current in the cable. This will adversely affect the
inverter and nearby devices. Refer to Table 3-2 to adjust the carrier frequency and reduce the
high-frequency leakage current.
36
 When the motor wiring distance exceeds 50 m, connect the output terminals (U, V, W) of the
inverter with the dedicated AC reactor (phase capacity: the same as that of the inverter) for
inverter output.
Table3-2 Wiring Distance and Carrier Frequency between Inverter and Motor
Wiring distance between inverter and <50m <100m >100m
motor
Carrier frequency Below 10kHz Below 8kHz Below 5kHz
Function code F00.23 10.0 8.0 5.0
3.2.6 Cable and screw dimensions of main circuit
The cable and screw dimensions of the main circuit are shown in Table 3-3.
Table3-3 Cable Dimensions and Terminal Screw Specifications
Tightening Wire Wire Type
Frequency converter Terminal
Terminal Symbol Torque diameter
model Screw
(N.m) (mm²)
EM730/EM730E-0R4-2B
EM730/EM730E-0R7-2B
EM730/EM730E-0R7-3B M3 0.5～0.7
EM730/EM730E-1R5-3B 1.5
EM730/EM730E-1R5-2B
EM730/EM730E-2R2-2B 4
PB, +, -, R, S, T, U, V,
EM730/EM730E-2R2-3B
W M4 1.5～2.0
EM730/EM730E-4R0-3B
EM730/EM730E-5R5-3B 6
EM730/EM730E-7R5-3B
EM730/EM730E-011-3B
EM730/EM730E-015-3B 10 750V
M5 3.0～4.0
EM730/EM730E-018-3B wire
16
EM730/EM730E-022-3B
EM730/EM730E-030-3B
EM730/EM730E-037-3B R, S, T, PB, +, -, U, V,
W, M6 4.0～5.0 25
EM730/EM730E-030-3
EM730/EM730E-037-3
EM730/EM730E-045-3 35
R, S, T, +, -, U, V, W, M8 9.0～10.0
EM730/EM730E-055-3 35
EM730/EM730E-075-3 60
37
EM730/EM730E-090-3 60
M10 17.0～22.0
EM730/EM730E-110-3 90
EM730/EM730E-132-3 90
R, S, T, P, +, -, U, V, W
EM730/EM730E-160-3 120
Table 3-1 Cable Dimensions and Terminal Screw Specifications Note: 1: The specifications of
the wire are dependent on its voltage drop. Under normal circumstances, the voltage drop
calculated by the following formula should be less than 5V.
Voltage drop = 3 * wire resistivity (Ω/KM) * wire length (m) * rated current (A) * 10-3
2: If the wire is in a plastic slot, it should be enlarged by one level.
3: The wire should be crimped to the round terminal suitable for the wire and terminal
screw.
4: The specification of the ground wire should be the same as that of the power cable
smaller than 16mm2. When the power cable is 16mm2 or larger, the ground wire should not
be smaller than 1/2 of the power cable.
3.2.7 Ground wire

 The ground terminal must be grounded.
 Pay special attention to the third type of grounding (grounding resistance: less than
10Ω).
 The ground wire must not be shared by the welding machine and power devices.
 Select the ground wire according to the technical specifications for electrical
equipment, and minimize the length of the ground wire connected to the grounding
point.
 Where two or more inverters are used, the ground wires must not form a loop. The
correct and incorrect grounding methods are shown in Table 3-10.
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter
Fig.3-10 Connection of Ground Wire

38
3.2.8 Installation and wiring of braking resistor and braking unit
Refer toChapter 10 for the selection and wiring of the braking resistor and braking unit.
For the inverter with a built-in braking unit, connect the braking resistor between the
inverter terminal (+) and PB terminal. For the inverter with no built-in braking unit, connect the
terminals (+ and -) of the braking unit to those (+ and -) of the DC bus of the inverter, and the
braking resistor to the PB+ and PB- terminals of the braking unit. Refer to the user manual of
the BR100 braking unit for more information.
3.3 Wiring of Control Circuit Terminal

3.3.1 Composition of control circuit terminal
J10 J7 M1 J8 AI2
NPN 485
V V
PNP I S1 ON
I OFF
1
KeyBoard
RJ45
8
Y1 +10V AI1 AI2 M1 GND A+ A- EA EB EC
COM YCM 24V X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
Fig.3-11 Layout of Control Circuit Terminals 1

3.3.2 Functions and wiring of control circuit terminals
Table 3-3 Functions of Control Circuit Terminals
Terminal
Category Terminal name Function description
label
External power Supply 24V power to external devices, with
24V
supply the maximum output current of 100mA.
Power supply Power grounding terminal of the external
Power grounding
COM power supply, and common side of the digital
terminal
input terminal
Supply 10V power to external devices.
Analog terminal Maximum output current: 10.5±0.5V/20mA,
10V
Analog input power supply usually as the power supply of the external
potentiometer
GND Analog power Grounding terminal of analog input and
39
grounding terminal output

Analog voltage -10V to 10V, 50kΩ input impedance, bipolar
AI1
input analog voltage input
Analog
Current or voltage type
AI2 current/voltage
Input range: 0/4-20mA or 0-10V
input
Analog
Analog output M1 voltage/current 0-10V/0-20mA; output accuracy: ±2%
output
X1 Program the corresponding terminals by
X2 setting function codes, to realize the input
X3 control of the set functions.
X4 The input terminal supports PNP and NPN
Digital input Multi-function
input modes, and the default mode is the NPN
port input terminal
input mode.
X5 X5 can also be used as the high-frequency
pulse input, with the input frequency up to
100kHz.
Open collector It can be programmed as the multi-function
Y1
output terminal output terminal.
Multi-function
The common side YCM of Y terminal and the
digital output Common side of Y
YCM common side COM of the digital input
terminal
terminal are independent of each other.
A+ RS485 positive terminal of RS485 differential signal
Communication communication negative terminal of RS485 differential
A-
terminal signal
EA
Relay output EA-EC: Normally open
Relay output EB
terminal EB-EC: Normally closed
EC
External RJ45 External keyboard For the external operation panel
40
keyboard port terminal The upper computer can also be connected

through this port for background software
debugging.
3.3.3 Wiring of analog input terminal

Wiring of AI1 and AI2 terminals with analog voltage signal:
When the AI2 terminal is in the mode of analog voltage signal input, the switch J8 on the
control panel is set to the voltage mode, as shown in Fig. 3-12
When the analog voltage input signal is powered by an external power supply, the wiring of
terminals AI1 and AI2 is shown inFig. 3-12-a.
When the analog voltage input signal is sent by a potentiometer, the terminals AI1 and AI2
are connected as shown inFig. 3-12-b.
In addition, F02.62 (AI1 input type) and F02.63 (AI2 input type) should be set according to
actual needs (0: 0-10V; 1: 4-20mA; 2: 0-20mA; 4: 0-5V).
EM730
AI1/AI2
-10VDC~10VDC/0~10VDC
GND
Near-end grounding PE
of shielded cable
(a)
(b)
Fig.3-12 AI1/AI2 Terminal Wiring Diagram
Wiring of the input analog current signal of AI2 terminal:

When the AI2 terminal is in the mode of analog current signal input, the switch J8 on the
41
terminal block is set to the current mode.
Fig.3-13 Wiring Diagram of External Current Source and AI2 Terminal

3.3.4 Wiring of multi-function input terminal
The multi-function input terminals of EM730/EM730E series inverters support the access
in the NPN or PNP mode. The terminals X1-X5 can be flexibly connected with external devices.
The NPN or PNP mode (NPN by default) can be selected via the jumper cap J10 on the control
panel. The wiring of the multi-function input terminal in different modes is shown below:
J10
J10
24V 24V
NPN NPN
PNP PNP
Xi Xi
COM COM
a: Use of internal power supply in NPN mode b: Use of internal power supply in PNP mode
J10 J10
24V 24V
NPN NPN
PNP PNP
+ +
- DC Xi - DC Xi
COM COM
c: Use of external power supply in NPN mode d: Use of external power supply in PNP mode
Fig. 3-14 Wiring Diagram of Multi-function Input Terminals
42
3.3.5 Wiring of multi-function output terminals
The multi-function output terminal Y1 is powered on by the internal 24V power supply of
the inverter or an external power supply, as shown in Fig. 3-15:
+24V +24V
24V 24V
Y1 Y1
Relay
Relay +
- DC
YCM YCM
COM COM
a: Use of internal power supply NPN b: Use of external power supply NPN
+24V 24V +24V 24V
YCM YCM
+
Y1 Y1 DC
-
Relay Relay
COM COM
a: Use of internal power supply PNP b: Use of external power supply PNP
Fig.3-15 Wiring of Multi-function Output Terminals
Note: (1) An anti-parallel diode must be included in the relay wire package. The absorption
circuit components should be installed at both ends of the coil of the relay or contactor.
3.3.6 Wiring of analog output terminals

The external analog meter connected to the analog output terminal M1 indicates a variety of
physical quantities. Choose the output current (0-20mA) or (0-10V) via the jumper cap, M1
corresponding to J7. Set F03.34 as needed (0: 0-10V; 1: 4-20mA; 2: 0-20mA). The jumper cap
and terminal wiring is as follows:
43
M1 is for analog voltage

M1
V output
Inverter I
J7
GND M1 is for analog current
output
3.3.7 Wiring of 485 communication terminals

The communication terminals A+ and A- are the RS485 communication interfaces of the
inverter. The online control of the host (PC or PLC controller) and inverter is performed through
the connection and communication with the host. The connection of the RS485 and
RS485/RS232 adapters to EM730/EM730E series inverter is shown in Fig. 3-16, Fig. 3-17 and
Fig. 3-18.
 Direct connection of the RS485 terminal of a single inverter to the host for
communication:
Inverter A+ + terminal
RS485
communicati
A-
on interface
- terminal
ON of host
GND GND
S1
Fig.3-16 Communication Terminal Wiring of Single Inverter
 Connection of the RS485 terminals of multiple inverters to host for communication:
44
RS485
communication
interface of host
+ terminal - terminal GND
A+ A- GND A+ A- GND A+ A- GND A+ A- GND

ON
OFF OFF OFF
Inverter S1 Inverter S1 Inverter S1 Inverter S1
Fig. 3-17 Wiring of Communication Terminals of Multiple Inverters

 Connection to the host via RS485/RS232 adapter for communication:
Inverter A+ RS232
RS485/RS232 communicatio
A- adapter
n interface of
ON GND
host
S1
Fig. 3-18 Communication Terminal Wiring

3.3.8 Wire and screw dimensions of control circuit
 In order to reduce the interference and attenuation of the control signal, the control
signal connection cable should be less than 50 m long, and the distance between the
control signal connection cable and power line should be greater than 30 cm. Use the
twisted-pair shielded cable when analog signals are externally inputted.
 It is recommended to use the wire with a diameter of 0.5-1 mm2 in the control circuit.
 The terminal block of the EM730/EM730E series inverter is composed of
through-type control circuit terminals. Install it with the PH0 Phillips screwdriver. The
tightening torque should be 0.5N.m.
3.3.9 Precautions for control circuit wiring
 Connect the control circuit connection wires and other wires separately.
 Connect the control circuit terminals EA, EB, EC, and Y1 separately from other
control circuit terminals.
 In order to avoid malfunction caused by interference, use the twisted shielded cables
45
in the control circuit. The wiring distance should be less than 50 m.
 Prevent the shield screen from contact with other signal lines and enclosures. The
exposed shield screen can be wrapped with insulating tapes.
 It is prohibited to touch the ports and components of the control panel without static
electricity protection measures.
3.3.10 Standard Wiring Diagram of Control Circuit
Braking resistor
MCCB MC PB U
Power
R/L1 V M
supply S/L2 W
Inverter Grounding
T/L3
When the single-phase 220V power supply is Grounding
used, connect any two of the terminals L1, L2
and L3.
24V-COM
24V output, 100mA
Operation
EA
X1 Relay output contact
Forward/Reverse
EB DC30V, 10mA to 1A
X2 R1
Multi-segment EC AC250V, 10mA to 3A
Multi-function
speed terminal 1
input terminal
X3
Multi-segment
speed terminal 2
X4
Multi-segment
speed terminal 3
X5 Y1
100kHZ high-speed pulse input
Open collector output 24V/50mA
YCM
COM
1
+10V/20mA
1kΩ-5kΩ 10V
frequency 3 -10～10V M1 V/I
setting AI1 Multi-function analog
2
potentiometer 0～10V/0～20mA AI2 GND
output
1
GND
485 AI2 M1
ON NPN V V
A+ OFF PNP I I
S1 J10 J8 J7
Communication port
A-
Grounding
Fig. 3-19 Standard Wiring Diagram of Control Circuit

 It is recommended to use the wires with a diameter of 0.5-1mm2 in the control circuit.
 Install the control circuit terminals with the PH0 Phillips screwdriver. The tightening torque
46
should be 0.5N.m.
3.4 Extension wiring of keyboard

1) The external keyboard needs to be ordered separately.
2) The external keyboard is connected to the RJ45 port via an ordinary network cable (plug:
meeting the EIA/TIA568B standards) prepared by the customer.
3) Connect the RJ45 port of the keyboard to that of the control panel via a network cable. The
keyboard extension cable should be no longer than 3m. Then extension cable may be
10m long in the presence of Cat5E wires and good electromagnetic environments.
3.5 Connection test

After wiring, check the following items.
 Check whether wiring is incorrect.
 Check whether there are screws, terminals and wire scraps inside the inverter.
 Check whether the screws are loose.
 Check whether the exposed wire at the stripped end of the terminal is in contact with
other terminals.
47
Chapter 4 KEYBOARD OPERATIONS
4.1 Keyboard Functions

4.1.1 Structure of LED keyboard
The control panel of EM730/EM730E series inverter is a pluggable LED keyboard The
LED keyboard has one five-digit LED digital display, four operation buttons, one digital
potentiometer, and six status and unit indicators. Users can perform parameter setting, status
monitoring and start/stop of the inverter via the keyboard.
Fig. 4-1 LED Keyboard

4.1.2 Functions of keys and indicators on LED keyboard
The functions of the keys and indicators on the LED keyboard are as shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Functions of Keys and Indicators on LED Keyboard
Key/Indicator Name Function

Select the group number and function number of the
Right currently modified function code.
Change the monitoring parameters.
Go back to the previous menu.
Cancel the current parameter modification when the
Back
menu mode selection level is enabled from the
monitoring level.
When the keyboard control is enabled, press this key
Run
to start the inverter.
When the keyboard control is enabled, press this key
Stop/Reset to stop the inverter.
Reset the protection in use.
Turn it clockwise to select the function code and menu
Potentiometer/Con group or increase the parameter value.
firm key Increase the currently valid reference digital input
data.
48
Turn it counterclockwise to select the function code
and menu group or decrease the parameter value.
Decrease the currently valid reference digital input
data.
Click it to enter the lower-level menu.
Confirm and save the parameter modification, and
enable the function code following the current
function code.
It is ON when the frequency, current, and voltage are
Unit indicator
displayed.
This indicator is ON during reverse running. It is OFF
Running direction during forward running.
indicator It is ON when a certain frequency is being monitored
or displayed.
It is ON when the inverter is running, flickering when
(Green) Running indicator the inverter is being stopped, and OFF after the
inverter is stopped.
Protection When the inverter is in the protection status, this

(Red)
indicator indicator will be ON in red.
( and below means that the potentiometer rotates clockwise and
counterclockwise.)
4.2 Operation Mode of Keyboard with Digital Tube Display

The LED keyboard menu is divided into the monitoring level (Level 0), menu mode
selection level (Level 1), function code selection level (Level 2) and parameter level (Level 3)
from low to high. The menu levels mentioned below are represent by numbers.
There are five parameter display modes: menu mode (--A--), used to display all function
codes; user-defined mode (--U--), used to display only function codes selected by the user
based on the F11 group; non-default mode (--C--), used to display only the function codes that
differ from the default settings;
Protection information display mode (--E--): display the current protection information;
version information mode (--P--): display software and product serial numbers.
When the keyboard is powered on, the first monitoring parameter of Level 0 is displayed
by default. Press the ESC key to open the Level 1 menu. Users can turn the
potentiometer indicator in the keyboard to select different menu modes. The process of
menu mode selection is shown in Fig. 4-2.
49
Fig. 4-2 Flowchart of Menu Mode Selection

4.2.1 Full menu mode (--A--)
In the full menu mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2 menu and select any
function code. Then press the ENTER key to enter the Level 3 menu and view or modify the
function code. Except for a few special ones, the function codes needed by general users can be
modified.
The entire process from the initial status of power-on to change of the value of the function
code F03.28 to 5.28 in the full menu mode is shown in Fig. 4-3.
50
Flicker Flicker
bit bit
Flicker bit
Flicker bit
Flicker bit Flicker bit
Flicker bit
Flicker bit
Flicker bit
Fig. 4-3 Flowchart from Power-on to F03.28=5.28 Setting

In all menu modes, the user needs to press the ENTER key to save parameter
modifications. Differences after parameter saving are as follows: In the full menu mode, enter
the function code following the function code that has been successfully modified. In the
user-defined mode, enter the user-defined function code (according to the sequence defined in
F11.00-F11.31) following the function code that has been successfully modified. In the
non-default mode, enter the non-default function code following the non-default function code
that has been successfully modified. In the protection information display mode, enter the
protection information function code following the protection information function code that has
been successfully modified. In the version information display mode, enter the serial number
function code following the serial number function code has been successfully modified.
51
In the Level 3 menu, press the ESC key to abandon parameter modifications.
4.2.2 User-defined mode (--U--)
Enter the F11 group of function codes from the full menu mode. Then the user can
arbitrarily set the shortcut for the parameter to be accessed frequently. When F11.00 is enabled
for the first time, U00.00 will be displayed by default, meaning that the function code defined by
default for F11.00 is F00.00. The lowest cursor bit will flicker. The user can set any function
code, similar to the function code selection in the Level 2 menu. After setting, press the ENTER
key to save it and enter the user-defined menu mode to display the set function code.
For example, F11.00 is set to U00.07 and F11.01 to U00.09. F11.00 and F11.01 will be
defined as F00.07 and F00.09, respectively. They are distinguished by U and F. U indicates that
this function code is user-defined, as shown in Fig. 4-4.
Flicker Flicker bit

bit
Fig. 4-4 Example of User-defined Mode Setting

In the user-defined mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2 menu. The Level
2 menu only display 32 user-defined parameters in the F11 group. The user can enter the F11
group from the full menu mode to set these function codes.
After the function codes are defined in the F11 group, enter the user-defined mode. Then
we can see F00.07 defined by the first function code F11.00, F00.09 defined by the first function
52
code F11.01, and so on to F11.31, 32 in total. Function code modification in the Level 3 menu is
equivalent to that in the full menu mode, and the modification method is also the same.
In the Level 2 menu of the user-defined mode, turn the potentiometer key on the
keyboard, to change the function code defined by F11.00 to that defined by F11.31.
When the right shift key is pressed in the Level 2 menu, the cursor will not shift.
Press the ENTER key to enter the Level 3 menu. If the displayed function code is
modifiable currently, the lowest bit indicated by the cursor will flicker. Parameter modification
is the same as that in the Level 3 menu under the full menu mode. After modification, press the
ENTER key ENTER to confirm and save the parameters and enable next user-defined parameter.
Function code modifications in the Level 3 menus under different menu modes have equivalent
effects.
4.2.3 Non-default mode (--C--)
In the non-default mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2 menu. The first
parameter different from the default settings of the inverter will be displayed, starting from
F00.00. When the right shift key is pressed in the Level 2 menu, the cursor will not shift.
If the increment or decrement key on the keyboard is pressed, the function group and function
code will not be modified, and the non-default function code following and in front of the
current function code will be displayed respectively. If the displayed function code is modifiable
currently in the Level 3 menu, the lowest bit indicated by the cursor will flicker. In this case,
parameters can be modified in the Level 3 menu under the full menu mode. After modification,
press the ENTER key to confirm and save the parameters and enable next non-default
parameter.
For example, change F00.03 to 1 and F00.07 to 40.00 in the full menu mode, which are not
default values. Then enable the non-default mode. F00.03 will be displayed first. When the
potentiometer key on the keyboard is turned clockwise, F00.07 will be displayed; and
when the potentiometer key on the keyboard is turned counterclockwise, F00.03 will be
returned, as shown below:
53
Fig. 4-5 Function Code Modification in Non-default Mode

4.2.4 Protection information display mode (--E--)
In the protection information display mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2
menu. The Level 2 menu will only display the fault record group under the F19 group, which is
conducive to direct viewing of protection record information.
Turn the potentiometer key on the keyboard in the Level 2 menu under this mode to
increase or decrease the function code of the protection group, and the shift key will be
unavailable. In case of protection, you can press the shift key on the keyboard in the
Level 3 menu to switch the display of the protection code, protection output frequency,
protection output current, protection bus voltage, and protection operation status.
4.3 Protection Monitoring

When the inverter is in the protection status, you can directly press the right shift key
to switch the current protection type and the output frequency, output current, output
voltage, running status and working time during the protection.
4.4 Operation Monitoring

4.4.1 Normal monitoring
In the monitoring status mode 1 of EM730/EM730E, you can set any function code to be
viewed between F12.33 and F12.37. When F12.32=1, the monitoring mode 1 will be enabled. If
the Level 0 monitoring menu appears, you can press the right shift key to switch the
monitoring parameters according to the order set for each function code between F12.33 and
F12.37. When the inverter changes from the stop status to running status, the monitoring
54
parameter will automatically change from the current value to that indicated by F12.33. When
the inverter changes from the running status to stop status, the monitoring parameter will
automatically change from the current value to that indicated by F12.34.
4.4.2 Editing Mode
Quick change in the monitoring mode:
When F00.04 is set to “0: digital frequency setting F00.07”, turn the potentiometer key
to directly change the offset;
When F00.04 is set to “8: digital potentiometer”, turn the potentiometer key to change
the set frequency of F12.42 digital potentiometer. In this case, turn the potentiometer key to
enter the editing mode. The value will change from the second digit of the digital tube by default.
The digital tube corresponding to the changed digit will flash. Press the right shift key
to move to next digit on the right. Press the ESC key to cancel change and return to the
original value. Or, press the ENTER key to confirm the change and exit the editing mode.
The indicator will not be flicker. Press the right shift key to enable the normal
monitoring mode: switch to next monitoring parameter. Fig. 4-6 shows the editing status in the
monitoring mode.
Flicker bit
Flicker bit
Flicker
bit
Flicker bit
Fig. 4-6 Editing Status in the Monitoring Mode
4.5 Run/Stop
After setting the parameters, press the RUN key to enable the normal operation of
55
the inverter, and the STOP/RESET key to stop the inverter.
4.6 Other Warning Prompts

4.6.1 P.-ON prompt
The P.-ON prompt will be displayed after power-on initialization.
4.6.2 P.-OFF prompt
When the voltage drops to 250V (with the soft start disconnected), P-OFF will be displayed, and
the keyboard can be operated freely to exit the P.-OFF display and display normal information.
In case of no keyboard operation within 5s, P-OFF will be displayed again. After the voltage is
restored and the soft start is engaged, P.-ON will be displayed again.
4.6.3 SOFT.E warning
If the soft start is not engaged and the inverter is started, the SOFT.E warning will appear. After
the voltage is restore and the soft start is engaged, normal operation will be enabled.
56
Chapter 5 Trial run
5.1 Inverter Commissioning Process
Fig. 5-1 Inverter Commissioning Flowchart
57
5.2 Confirmation before Power-on

Please confirm the following items before turning on the power supply:
Item to be confirmed Confirmation content
Check whether the input power voltage is consistent with
the voltage of the inverter.
Confirm that the circuit breaker has been connected to the
Power wiring
power supply circuit, and the power cables are correctly
confirmation
connected to the input terminals (R, S, T) of the inverter.
Make sure that the inverter and motor are properly
grounded.
Confirm that the motor is correctly connected to the output
Motor wiring
terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter, and the motor wiring is
confirmation
secured.
Confirmation of Make sure that the braking resistor and braking unit are
braking unit and connected as shown in Fig. 3-3 (use the dynamic braking
braking resistor resistor if necessary during operation).
Control terminal Check whether the control terminals of the inverter are
wiring confirmation correctly and reliably connected to other controls.
Control terminal Make sure that the control terminal circuit of the inverter is
status confirmation disconnected to prevent operation upon powering on.
Mechanical load Confirm that the machinery is in the no-load state and free
confirmation of danger in operation.
5.3 Inverter Status Confirmation after Power-on

After the power supply is turned on, the control panel (keyboard) of the inverter displays
the following information in the normal status.
Status Display Note
During The digital setting 0Hz is displayed by
normal 0
operation default
Protection code in The protection code is displayed in the
Protection character or Exx protection status. See the protection
format measures in Chapter 6.
5.4 Precautions for Application Macro Setting

F16.00 is an industry application macro option. Select the application macro according to
the specific application, and press the Enter key to automatically restore default settings. See
Chapter 10 for details on application macros.
58
5.5 Start and Stop Control

Functio Function code Default
Parameter description Attribute
n code name setting
Options of 0: keyboard control
F00.02 command 1: Terminal control 0 〇
source 2: Communication control
F00.02=0: keyboard control
The start and stop of the inverter are controlled by the RUN key, STOP key on the keyboard.
In the case of no trip protection, press the RUN key to enter the running status. If the green LED
indicator above the RUN key is normally ON, it indicates that the inverter is running. If this
indicator is flickering, it indicates that the inverter is in the status of deceleration to stop.
F00.02=1: terminal control
The inverter start and stop are controlled by the start and stop control terminals defined by
the function code F02.00 to F02.04. Terminal control is dependent on F00.03.
F00.02=2: communication control
The inverter start and stop are controlled by the host through the RS485 communication
port.
Function Function code Default
code name setting
0: direct start
F04.00 Start-up method 0 〇
1: start of speed tracking
F04.00=0: direct start

The inverter is started at the starting frequency, following the DC braking (not suitable
when F04.04=0) and pre-excitation (not suitable when F04.07=0). The starting frequency will
change to the set frequency after the holding time.
F04.00=1: start with speed tracking
The inverter is smoothly started at the current rotating frequency of the motor, following
the speed tracking.
code name setting
0: Slow down to stop
F04.19 Stop mode 0 〇
1: Free stop
F04.19=0: deceleration to stop
The motor decelerates to stop according to the set deceleration time [default setting: based
on F00.15 (deceleration time 1)].
F04.19=1: free stop
When there is a valid stop command, the inverter will stop output immediately, and the
motor will freely coast to stop. The stop time depends on the inertia of the motor and load.
59
5.5.1 Terminal control of start and stop
Functio Function code Parameter description Default Attribute
n code name setting
0: terminal RUN (running) and F/R
(forward/reverse)
Options of 1: terminal RUN (forward) and F/R
F00.03 terminal control (reverse) 0 〇
mode 2: terminal RUN (forward), Xi (stop)
and F/R (reverse)
3: terminal RUN (running), Xi (stop)
and F/R (forward/reverse)
Terminal RUN: Xi terminal is set to “1: terminal RUN”
Terminal F/R: Xi terminal is set to “2: running direction F/R”
Terminal control can be divided into two types: two-line control and three-line
control.
Two-line control:
F00.03=0: the terminal RUN is enabled and the terminal F/R controls forward/reverse
running.
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the start and stop of the inverter, and the
terminal F/R to control the forward/reverse running. If F00.21 is set to 1 and reverse running is
disabled, the F/R terminal will not be available. When the mode of deceleration to stop is
selected, the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 5-2 (b).
F00.03=1: the terminal RUN controls forward running, and the terminal F/R is in the
reverse mode.
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the forward running and stop of the inverter, and
the terminal F/R to control the reverse running and stop. When the terminals RUN and F/R are
enabled simultaneously, the inverter will be stopped. If reverse running is disabled, the terminal
F/R will not be available. When the mode of deceleration to stop is selected, the logic of
forward/reverse running is as shown in Fig. 5-2 (d);
(a) Wiring diagram of two-line control (F00.03=0) (b) F04.19=0, F00.03=0, run the
forward/reverse logic
60
(c) F00.03=1 two-line control wiring (d) F04.19=0, F00.03=1: forward/reverse

running logic
Fig. 5-2 Two-line Control
When the start/stop value of F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, even if the terminal RUN is
available, the inverter can be stopped by pressing the STOP key or sending an
external stop command to the terminal. In this case, the inverter will not be in the
running status until the terminal RUN is disabled and then enabled.
Three-line control:
F00.03=2: the terminal RUN controls forward running, the terminal Xi is for stop,
and the terminal F/R is in the reverse status.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for forward running, and the terminal F/R is normally
ON for reverse running, with valid pulse edges. The terminal Xi is normally closed for stop,
with the valid level. When the inverter is in the running status, press Xi to stop it. In the case of
deceleration to stop (F04.19=0), the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 5-3Fig. 7-7(b). The
terminal Xi is for “three-line running and stop control” as defined by F02.00 to F02.04.
F00.03=3: the terminal RUN is for running, Xi for stop and F/R for forward/reverse
control.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for running, with the valid pulse edge, F/R for
forward/reverse switching (forward in the OFF status and reverse in the ON status), and Xi is
normally OFF for stop, with the valid level. In the case of deceleration to stop (F04.19=0), the
logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 5-3(d).
(a) Wiring diagram of three-line control (F00.03=2) (b) Forward/reverse control logic
(F04.19=0, F00.03=2)
61
(c) Wiring diagram of three-line control (F00.03=3) (d) Forward/reverse running logic
(F04.19=0, F00.03=3)
Fig. 5-3 Three-line Control
The three-line control logic of the EM730/EM730E series inverter is consistent with the
conventional electrical control. The keys and knob switches should be used correctly as
shown in the schematic diagram. Otherwise, operation errors may be caused.
5.6 Common Process Parameters of Inverter

Function Function code name Parameter description Unit Default Attribute
code setting
0: V/F control (VVF)
F00.01 Drive control mode of motor 1 1: Speed sensorless vector 0 〇
control (SVC)
0: digital frequency setting
F00.07
1：AI1
2：AI2
5: high frequency pulse input
Options of main frequency (X5)
F00.04 source A 6: Percentage setting of main 0 〇
frequency communication
7: Direct setting of main
setting
0.00 to maximum frequency
F00.07 Digital frequency setting F00.16 Hz 0.00 ●
F00.14 Acceleration time 1 0.00～650.00（F15.13=0） s 15.00 ●
F00.15 Deceleration time 1 0.00～650.00（F15.13=0） s 15.00 ●
F00.16 Maximum frequency 1.00～600.00 Hz 50.00 〇
Lower frequency limit F00.19
F00.18 Upper frequency limit to maximum frequency Hz 50.00 ●
F00.16
0.00 to upper frequency limit
F00.19 Lower frequency limit F00.18 Hz 0.00 ●
0: Allow forward/reverse
F00.21 Reverse control running 1: Prohibit 0 〇
reversing
Note: Common process parameters may also include the input and output terminal function
62
settings. Refer to the F02 and F03 groups in the function table.
5.7 Motor Parameter Identification

For the better control performance, motor parameters must be identified.
Identification Method Application Identification Effect
F01.34=01
Static self-learning of
asynchronous motor It is applied where the motor and load
cannot be separated easily and rotary General
F01.34=11 self-learning is not allowed.
Static self-learning of
synchronous motor
F01.34=02
Rotary self-learning of It is applied when the motor and load can
asynchronous motor be separated easily. Before operation, the
motor shaft should be separated from the Optimal
F01.34=12 load. The motor under load must not be
Rotary self-learning of put into rotary self-learning.
synchronous motor
 Prior to self-identification, make sure that the motor is stopped; otherwise,
self-identification cannot be performed properly.
5.7.1 Parameter identification steps
 Where the motor and load can be separated, the mechanical load and motor should
be completely separated in the power-off status.
 After the power-on, set the command source of the inverter to keyboard control
(F00.02=0).
 Enter the nameplate parameters of the motor accurately.
Motor Corresponding Parameter
F01.00 Motor type F01.01 Rated power of electric motor
F01.02 Rated voltage of motor F01.03 Rated current of motor
Motor 1 F01.04 Rated frequency of motor F01.05 Rated speed
F01.06: Motor winding connection
F14.00 Motor type F14.01 Rated power of electric motor
Motor 2 F14.02 Rated voltage of motor F14.03 Rated current of motor
F14.04 Rated frequency of motor F14.05 Rated speed
F14.06: Motor winding connection
 For the asynchronous motor:

Set F01.34=1 for confirmation and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the static
self-identification of the motor.
Or, set F01.34=2 and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the rotary
 For the synchronous motor:
Set F01.34=11 and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the static self-identification
of the motor.
63
Or, set F01.34=12 and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the rotary
 It takes about two minutes to complete the self-identification of the motor. Then the
system will return to the initial power-on status from the “tune” interface.
 If multiple motors are used in parallel, the rated power and rated current input of the
motors should be the sum of power and current of these motors.
If two motors are used alternately, the parameters of the motor 2 in the F14 group need to be set
separately, and identified based on F14.34.
Chapter 6 Function Code Table
6.1 Description of Function Code Table

The function codes of the EM730/EM730E series inverter (hereinafter referred to as the
“function codes”) are divided into 24 groups in Table 6-2, and each group contains several
function codes. Among them, the F18 group is a monitoring parameter group used to view the
inverter status; the F19 group is a protection record group used to view the details of the last
three protections; and other groups are parameter setting groups to meet different functional
requirements.
Table 6-2 Introduction to Function Code Groups
F00 Basic function P66;P129 F01 Parameter group of motor 1 P69;P147

parameter group
F02 Input terminal P70;P152 F03 Output terminal function P74;P166
function group group
F04 Start/stop control P77;P177 F05 V/F control parameter P79;P185
parameter group group
F06 Vector control P81;P191 F07 Protection function setting P87;P199
parameter group group
F08 Multi-segment speed P89;P207 F09 PID function group P94;P217
and simple PLC
F10 Communication P98;P231 F11 User-selected parameter P99;P236
F12 Keyboard and display P101;P238 F13 Torque control parameter P104;P243
64
F14 Parameter group of P106;P250 F15 Auxiliary function group P113;P253
motor 2
F16 Customization P116;P265 F17 Virtual I/O function group P117;P272
function group
F18 Monitoring parameter P120;P276 F19 Protection record group P123;P279
group
F27 Winding/unwinding
application macro
parameter group
★ Some parameters of the current series are reserved, and their readings are 0. Some options
of parameters are reserved and settable, but this may result in abnormal operation of the
inverter. Please avoid misuse of such parameters.
The table below provides the details of the function code table.
Function F00.00 to F99.99: function code number
code
Function Full name of the function code. “Reserved” means that the corresponding
code name function code is temporarily reserved and has no practical meaning.
Brief description of the function code. It is mainly divided into the following
three types:
The value of the integral function code represents the current
Integral
parameter selection or meaning.
Parameter
The ones, tens, hundreds, thousands and tens of thousands
description
Quantifier represent one option or the current meaning of the function
code.
Each binary bit represents one option or the current meaning
Binary
of the function code.
Metric units of the function code. The units and abbreviations are as follows:
Hz Hertz kW kilowatt us Microsecond
kHz Kilohertz kWh Kilowatt-hour ms Millisecond
★
★
% Percent MWh Megawatt hour s Second
Unit
V Volt mΩ Milliohm min min
A Amp mH Millihenry h h
rpm rpm ℃ °C m m
★: %: The benchmarks are different for physical quantities; kWh: Kilowatt
hour, commonly known as the degree.
65
Function code settings before delivery, or values after parameter restoration
(F12.14=1). This is mainly described by the following three categories.
Number (e.g. Refer to each power segment. The function code is set to
Default 50.00) the current value by default.
setting Depending on The default setting of this function code varies based on
the motor type the power segments.
The default setting of this function code varies based on
XXX
the power segments and batches.
Change attribute of the function code (permission and condition of change),
as described below:
Changeable in running: The current function code can be
●
changed in any status.
Attribute
Non-changeable in running: The current function code can be
〇
changed except in the running status.
Read-only: The current function code cannot be changed in
×
any status.
6.2 Table of functional parameters

Function Default
Function code name Parameter description Unit Attribute
code setting
F00 Basic function parameter group
F00.00 Reserved
F00.01 Drive control mode of motor 1 0 〇
1: Speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
0: keyboard control (LOC/REM indicator: ON)
1: terminal control (LOC/REM indicator: OFF)
F00.02 Options of command source 0 〇
2: communication control (LOC/REM indicator:
flicker)
0: terminal RUN (running) and F/R (forward/reverse)
1: terminal RUN (forward) and F/R (reverse)
2: terminal RUN (forward), Xi (stop) and F/R
F00.03 Options of terminal control mode 0 〇
(reverse)
3: terminal RUN (running), Xi (stop) and F/R
(forward/reverse)
1：AI1
2：AI2
Options of main frequency source
F00.04 3: retention 8 〇
A
4: retention
5: high frequency pulse input (X5)
6: main frequency communication setting
66
(percentage)
7: main frequency communication setting (direct
frequency)
8: digital potentiometer setting
1：AI1
2：AI2
3: retention
4: retention
Options of auxiliary frequency 6: auxiliary frequency communication setting
F00.05 0 〇
source B (percentage)
7: auxiliary frequency communication setting (direct
frequency)
9: retention
10: process PID
11: simple PLC
0: main frequency source A
1: auxiliary frequency source B
2: main and auxiliary operation results
3: switching between main frequency source A and
auxiliary frequency source B
F00.06 Options of frequency source 4: switching between main frequency source A and 0 〇
main and auxiliary operation results
5: switching between auxiliary frequency source B
and main and auxiliary operation results
6: Auxiliary frequency source B + feedforward
calculation (winding application)
F00.07 Digital frequency setting 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 50.00 ●
0: main frequency source A + auxiliary frequency
source B
1: main frequency source A - auxiliary frequency
Options of main and auxiliary source B
F00.08 0 〇
operation 2: larger value of main and auxiliary frequency
sources
3: smaller value of main and auxiliary frequency
sources
Reference options of auxiliary
0: relative to he maximum frequency
F00.09 frequency source B in main and 0 〇
1: Relative to main frequency source A
auxiliary operation
F00.10 Gain of main frequency source 0.0～300.0 % 100.0 ●
F00.11 Gain of auxiliary frequency source 0.0～300.0 % 100.0 ●
67
Synthetic gain of main and
F00.12 0.0～300.0 % 100.0 ●
auxiliary frequency sources
0: synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
1: AI1 * synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary
channels
2: AI2 * synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary
Analog adjustment of synthetic
F00.13 channels 0 〇
frequency
3: retention
4: retention
5: High frequency pulse (PULSE) * synthetic
frequency of main and auxiliary channels
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
F00.14 Acceleration time 1 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 15.00 ●
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
F00.15 Deceleration time 1 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 15.00 ●
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
F00.16 Maximum frequency 1.00~600.00/1.0~3000.0 Hz 50.00 〇
0: set by F00.18
1：AI1
2：AI2
Options of upper frequency limit 3: retention
F00.17 0 〇
control 4: retention
6: Communication setting (percentage)
7: Communication setting (direct frequency)
Lower frequency limit F00.19 to maximum frequency
F00.18 Upper frequency limit Hz 50.00 ●
F00.16
F00.19 Lower frequency limit 0.00 to upper frequency limit F00.18 Hz 0.00 ●
0: consistent direction
F00.20 Running direction 0 ●
1: opposite direction
0: Allow forward/reverse running
F00.21 Reverse control 0 〇
1: Prohibit reversing
Duration of forward and reverse
F00.22 0.00～650.00 s 0.00 ●
dead zone
1.0-16.0 (rated power of the inverter: 0.75-4.00kW)
4.0 (0.75
1.0-10.0 (rated power of the inverter: 5.50-7.50kW)
and
F00.23 Carrier frequency 1.0 - 8.0 (rated power of inverter 11.00 - 45.00kW) kHz ●
below)
1.0 - 4.0 (rated power of inverter 55.00 - 90.00kW)
/2.0
1.0-3.0 (rated power of inverter: 110.00 and above)
0: Invalid
Automatic adjustment of carrier
F00.24 1: valid 1 1 〇
frequency
2: Valid 2
68
Noise suppression of carrier 0: Invalid
F00.25 0 〇
frequency 1: valid
F00.26 Noise suppression tone 20～200 Hz 40 ●
F00.27 Noise suppression intensity 10～150 Hz 100 ●
0: parameter group of motor 1
F00.28 Options of motor parameter group 0 〇
1: parameter group of motor 2
F00.29 User password 0 - 65535 0 〇
0：0.01Hz
F00.31 Frequency resolution 0 〇
1: 0.1Hz (speed unit: 10rpm)
0: 380V
F00.35 Power supply voltage selection 0 〇
1: 440V
F01 Parameter group of motor 1
0: ordinary asynchronous motor
F01.00 Motor type 1: variable-frequency asynchronous motor 0 〇
2: permanent magnet synchronous motor
Depending
F01.01 Rated power of electric motor 0.10～650.00 kW on the 〇
motor type
Depending
F01.02 Rated voltage of motor 50～2000 V on the 〇
motor type
Depending
0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F01.03 Rated current of motor A on the 〇
0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW)
motor type
Depending
F01.04 Rated frequency of motor 0.01～600.00 Hz on the 〇
motor type
Depending
F01.05 Rated speed 1～60000 rpm on the 〇
motor type
Depending
0:Y
F01.06 Motor winding connection on the 〇
1:Δ
motor type
Depending
F01.07 Rated power factor of motor 0.600～1.000 on the 〇
motor type
Depending
F01.08 Motor efficiency 30.0～100.0 % on the 〇
motor type
Depending
Stator resistance of asynchronous 1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F01.09 mΩ on the 〇
motor 0.1-6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75kW)
motor type
F01.10 Rotor resistance of asynchronous 1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) mΩ Depending 〇
69
motor 0.1-6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75kW) on the
motor type
Depending
Leakage inductance of 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F01.11 mH on the 〇
asynchronous motor 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW)
motor type
Depending
Mutual inductance of 0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
motor type
Depending
No-load excitation current of 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F01.13 A on the 〇
motor type
Flux weakening coefficient 1 of
F01.14 10.00 - 100.00 % 87.00 〇
asynchronous motor
Flux weakening coefficient 2 of
F01.15 10.00 - 100.00 % 80.00 〇
asynchronous motor
Flux weakening coefficient 3 f
F01.16 10.00 - 100.00 % 75.00 〇
asynchronous motor
F01.17 10.00 - 100.00 % 72.00 〇
asynchronous motor
F01.18 10.00 - 100.00 % 70.00 〇
asynchronous motor
Depending
Stator resistance of synchronous 1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤75kW)
F01.19 mΩ on the 〇
motor 0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW)
motor type
Depending
d-axis inductance of synchronous 0.01 to 600.00 rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
motor 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW)
motor type
Depending
q-axis inductance of synchronous 0.01~600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
motor 0.001~60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75kW)
motor type
Depending
Counter electromotive force of
F01.22 10.0-2000.0 (counter electromotive force of rated speed) V on the 〇
synchronous motor
motor type
Initial electrical angle of
F01.23 0.0-359.9 (valid for synchronous motor) 〇
synchronous motor
00: No operation
01: static self-learning of asynchronous motor
02: rotation self-learning of asynchronous motor
F01.34 Motor parameter self-learning 03: inertia self-learning of asynchronous motor 00 〇
11: static self-learning of synchronous motor
12: rotary self-learning of synchronous motor
13: encoder self-learning of synchronous motor
F02 Input terminal function group
70
Options of X1 digital input 0: no function
F02.00 1 〇
function 1: terminal running (RUN)
Options of X2 digital input 2: running direction (F/R)
F02.01 2 〇
function 3: stop control in three-line operation
Options of X3 digital input 4: forward jog (FJOG)
F02.02 11 〇
function 5: reverse jog (RJOG)
Options of X4 digital input 6: terminal UP
F02.03 12 〇
function 7: terminal DOWN
Options of X5 digital input 8: clear UP/DOWN offset

F02.04 13 〇
function 9: free stop
Options of AI1 digital input 10: Reset protection

F02.07 11: multi-segment speed terminal 1 0 〇
function
12: multi-segment speed terminal 2
15: multi-segment PID terminal 1
16: multi-segment PID terminal 2
17: multi-segment torque terminal 1
18: multi-segment torque terminal 2
19: acceleration and deceleration time terminal 1
20: acceleration and deceleration time terminal 2
21: Acceleration and deceleration prohibition
22: operation pause
23: External protection input
24: Switching of RUN command to keyboard
25: switching of RUN command to communication
26: Frequency source switching
Options of AI2 digital input 27: clearing of regular running time
F02.08 0 〇
function 28: speed control/torque control switching
29: torque control prohibition
30: motor 1/motor 2 switching
31: resetting of simple PLC status (running from the first
segment, with the running time cleared)
32: simple PLC time pause (keep running at current
segment)
33: retention
34: counter input (≤250Hz)
35: high-speed count input (≤100kHz, only valid for X5)
36: count clearing
37: length counter input (≤250Hz)
38: High-speed length counting input (≤100kHz, only
valid for X5)
39: Reset length (clear by meter)
40: Pulse input (≤100kHz, only valid for X5)
71
41: process PID pause
42: process PID integral pause
43: PID parameter switching
44: PID positive/negative switching
45: stop and DC braking
46: DC braking at stop
47: immediate DC braking
48: fastest deceleration to stop
49: retention
50: external stop
51: switching of main frequency source to digital
frequency setting
52: switching of main frequency source to AI1
53: Switching of main frequency source to AI2
54: retention
55: Switching of main frequency source to
high-frequency pulse input
56: switching of main frequency source to
communication setting
57: inverter enabling
68: Disable reversal
69: prohibit reversing
121: External material cutoff signal
122: Wiring detection signal
123: Brake reset terminal
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 00000 〇
* * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
Positive/negative logic 1 of digital 0: positive logic, valid in the closed state/invalid in the
F02.15
input terminal open state
1: Negative logic, invalid in the closed state/valid in the
open state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 00 〇
* * * * * * AI2 AI1
Positive/negative logic 2 of digital 0: positive logic, valid in the closed state/invalid in the
F02.16
input terminal open state
open state
Filtering times of digital input
F02.17 0-100, 0: no filtering; n: sampling every n ms 2 〇
terminal
F02.18 X1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F02.19 X1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
72

F02.26 Minimum input pulse frequency 0.00 to maximum input pulse frequency F02.28 kHz 0.00 ●
F02.27 Minimum input setting –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
F02.28 Maximum input pulse frequency 0.01~100.00 kHz 50.00 ●
F02.29 Maximum input setting –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
F02.30 Pulse input filtering time 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.10 ●
Ones place: AI1
0: analog input
1: digital input (0 below 1V, 1 above 3V, the same as last
F02.31 Options of analog input function time under 1-3V) 00B 〇
Tens place: AI2
0: analog input
1: digital input (the same as above)
Ones place: Options of AI1 curve
0: curve 1
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
3: curve 4
F02.32 Options of analog input curve 10D 〇
Tens place: AI2 curve selection
0: curve 1
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
3: curve 4
F02.33 Minimum input of curve 1 0.00 - F02.35 V 0.10 ●
F02.34 Minimum input setting of curve 1 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
F02.35 Maximum input of curve 1 F02.33~10.00V V 9.90 ●
F02.36 Maximum input setting of curve 1 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
F02.37 Minimum input of curve 2 -10.00V~F02.39 V 0.10 ●
F02.39 Maximum input of curve 2 F02.37~10.00V V 9.90 ●
73
F02.41 Minimum input of curve 3 0.00V - F02.43 V 0.10 ●
Input of inflection point 1 of curve
F02.43 F02.41 - F02.45 V 2.50 ●
3
Input setting of inflection point 1
F02.44 –100.0 - +100.0 % 25.0 ●
of curve 3
F02.45 F02.43 - F02.47 V 7.50 ●
3
F02.46 –100.0 - +100.0 % 75.0 ●
of curve 3
F02.47 Maximum input of curve 3 F02.45 - 10.00 V 9.90 ●
F02.49 Minimum input of curve 4 -10.00 - F02.51 V -9.90 ●
F02.50 Minimum input setting of curve 4 –100.0 - +100.0 % -100.0 ●
F02.51 F02.49 - F02.53 V -5.00 ●
4
F02.52 –100.0 - +100.0 % -50.0 ●
of curve 4
F02.53 F02.51 - F02.55 V 5.00 ●
4
F02.54 –100.0 - +100.0 % 50.0 ●
of curve 4
F02.57 AI1 filtering time 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.10 ●
F02.61 AD hysteresis code 2 - 50 2 ○
0: 0~10V
F02.62 Selection of analog input AI1 type 3: -10~10V 0 〇
4: 0~5V
0: 0~10V
1: 4~20mA
F02.63 Selection of analog input AI2 type 0
2: 0~20mA
4: 0~5V
Selection of AI2 current input 0: 500Ω
F02.66 0 〇
impedance 1: 250Ω
F03 Output terminal function group
F03.00 Options of Y1 output function 0: no output 1 ○
1: inverter running (RUN)
2: up to output frequency (FAR)
Options of R1 output function
F03.02 3: output frequency detection FDT1 7 ○
(EA-EB-EC)
4: output frequency detection FDT2
5: reverse running (REV)
74
6: jog
7: inverter protection
8: inverter ready to run (READY)
9: reach the upper frequency limit
10: reach the lower frequency limit
11: valid current limit
12: valid overvoltage stall
13: complete simple PLC cycle
14: reach the set count value
15: reach the specified count value
16: Length reached (in meters)
17: motor overload pre-alarm
18: inverter overheat pre-alarm
19: reach the upper limit of PID feedback
20: reach the lower limit of PID feedback
21: analog level detection ADT1
22: analog level detection ADT2
24: undervoltage state
26: up to the set time
27: zero-speed running
38: off-load
47: PLC output
67: Brake control
68: Material cutoff detection output
69: FDT1 lower limit (pulse)
70: FDT2 lower limit (pulse)
71: FDT1 lower limit (pulse, invalid in JOG)
72: FDT2 lower limit (pulse, invalid in JOG)
73: output overcurrent
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 〇
0*0
* * * * * R1 * Y1
F03.05 Options of output signal type
0: level
1: single pulse
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
0*0 〇
* * * * * R1 * Y1
Positive/negative logic of digital 0: positive logic, valid in the closed state/invalid in the
F03.06
output open state
open state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
F03.08 Output status control in jog FDT 00000 〇
* * * REV FDT2 FAR RUN
1
75
0: valid in jogging
1: invalid in jogging
F03.09 Y1 valid delay time 0.000～30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.10 Y1 invalid delay time 0.000～30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.13 R1 valid delay time 0.000～30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.14 R1 invalid delay time 0.000～30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.17 Single pulse time of Y1 output 0.001～30.000 s 0.250 ●
F03.19 Single pulse time of R1 output 0.001～30.000 s 0.250 ●
0: running frequency (absolute value)

1: set frequency (absolute value)
2: output torque (absolute value)
3: set torque (absolute value)
4: output current
5: Output voltage
6: bus voltage
7: output power
8：AI1
F03.21 Options of analog output M1 9：AI2 0 〇
12: High-frequency pulse input (with 100%
corresponding to 100.00kHz)
13: Communication setting 1
14: count value
15: length value
16: PID output
18: PID feedback
19: PID setting
30: Communication setting 2
F03.27 M1 output bias -100.0～100.0 % 0.0 ●
F03.28 M1 output gain -10.000～10.000 1.000 ●
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
0*0 〇
Control logic options of PLC * * * * * R1 * Y1
F03.31
output terminal 0: Output
1: no output
76
0: 0~10V
Selection of analog output M1
F03.34 1: 4~20mA 0 〇
type
2: 0~20mA
F04 Start/stop control parameter group

Start-up 0: direct start
F04.00 0 〇
method 1: start of speed tracking
Start
F04.01 0.00 - 10.00 Hz 0.00 〇
frequency
Start
F04.02 frequency 0.00-60.00, 0.00 is invalid s 0.00 〇
hold time
Starting
F04.03 current of 0.0～100.0 (100.0 = Rated current of motor) % 100.0 〇
DC braking
Starting time
F04.04 of DC 0.00～30.00 0.00: invalid s 0.00 〇
braking
Pre-excitatio
F04.06 50.0-500.0 (100.0 = no-load current) % 100.0 〇
n current
Pre-excitatio
F04.07 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.10 〇
n time
Ones place: Tracking start frequency
0: maximum frequency
1: stop frequency
Speed
2: power frequency
F04.08 tracking 0 〇
Tens place: Selection of search direction
mode
0: search only in command direction
1: Search in the opposite direction if the speed cannot be
found in the command direction
Deceleration
F04.10 time of speed 0.1 - 20.0 s 2.0 〇
tracking
Speed
F04.11 tracking 30.0-150.0 (100.0 = rated current of inverter) % 50.0 〇
current
Speed
tracking
F04.12 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 〇
compensatio
n gain
77
Acceleration
0: linear acceleration and deceleration
and
F04.14 1: acceleration and deceleration of continuous S curve 0 〇
deceleration
2: acceleration and deceleration of intermittent S curve
mode
Starting time 0.00~30.00(F15.13=0)
F04.15 of S curve in 0.0~300.0(F15.13=1) s 1.00 ●
acceleration 0~3000(F15.13=2)
Ending time 0.00~30.00(F15.13=0)
F04.16 of S curve in 0.0~300.0(F15.13=1) s 1.00 ●
acceleration 0~3000(F15.13=2)
Starting time 0.00~30.00(F15.13=0)
F04.17 of S curve in 0.0~300.0(F15.13=1) s 1.00 ●
deceleration 0~3000(F15.13=2)
Ending time 0.00~30.00(F15.13=0)
F04.18 of S curve in 0.0~300.0(F15.13=1) s 1.00 ●
deceleration 0~3000(F15.13=2)
0: slow down to stop
1: free stop
Starting
frequency of
F04.20 0.00Hz to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 0.00 〇
DC braking
in stop
DC braking
F04.21 current in 0.0～100.0 (100.0 = Rated current of motor) % 50.0% 〇
stop
DC braking
F04.22 0.00～30.00 0.00: invalid s 0.00 〇
time in stop
Demagnetiza
tion time for
F04.23 0.00 - 30.00 s 0.50 〇
DC braking
in stop
Flux braking
F04.24 100-150 (100: no flux braking) 100 〇
gain
Start mode
after 0: start according to F04.00 setting mode
F04.26 0 〇
protection/fre 1: start of speed tracking
e stop
Second 0: Not required for confirmation
F04.27 0 〇
confirmation 1: to be confirmed
78
of terminal
start
command
Zero speed
F04.29 check 0.00 - 5.00 Hz 0.25 ●
frequency
Initial
magnetic
pole search 0: Invalid
F04.30 0 ●
mode of 1: Mode 1
synchronous
motor
F05 V/F control parameter group
0: straight line V/F
1: multi-point broken line V/F
2: 1.3-power V/F
3: 1.7-power V/F
V/F curve
F05.00 4: square V/F 0 〇
setting
5: VF complete separation mode (Ud = 0, Uq = K * t =
voltage of separation voltage source)
6: VF semi-separation mode (Ud = 0, Uq = K * t = F/Fe *
2 * voltage of separation voltage source)
Frequency
point F1 of
F05.01 0.00 - F05.03 Hz 0.50 ●
multi-point
VF
Voltage point
V1 of
F05.02 0.0～100.0 (100.0 = Rated voltage) % 1.0 ●
multi-point
VF
Frequency
point F2 of
F05.03 F05.01～F05.05 Hz 2.00 ●
multi-point
VF
Voltage point
V2 of
F05.04 0.0-100.0 % 4.0 ●
multi-point
VF
Frequency
point F3 of
F05.05 F05.03 to rated frequency of motor (reference frequency) Hz 5.00 ●
multi-point
VF
79
Voltage point
V3 of
F05.06 0.0-100.0 % 10.0 ●
multi-point
VF
0: digital setting of VF separation voltage
1：AI1
Voltage
2：AI2
source of VF
F05.07 4: High-frequency pulse (X5) 0 〇
separation
5：PID
mode
6: Communication setting
Note: 100% is the rated voltage of the motor.
Digital
setting of VF
F05.08 0.0-100.0 (100.0 = rated voltage of motor) % 0.0 ●
separation
voltage
Rise time of
VF
F05.09 0.00 - 60.00 s 2.00 ●
separation
voltage
Compensatio
n gain of V/F
F05.10 0.00 - 200.00 % 100.00 ●
stator voltage
drop
V/F slip
F05.11 compensatio 0.00 - 200.00 % 100.00 ●
n gain
V/F slip
F05.12 0.00 - 10.00 s 1.00 ●
filtering time
Oscillation
F05.13 suppression 0 - 10000 100 ●
gain
Oscillation
suppression
F05.14 0.00-600.00 Hz 55.00 ●
cutoff
frequency
Droop
F05.15 control 0.00 - 10.00 Hz 0.00 ●
frequency
Energy
F05.16 0.00 - 50.00 % 0.00 ●
saving rate
Energy
F05.17 saving action 1.00 - 60.00 s 5.00 ●
time
80
Flux
compensatio
F05.18 n gain of 0.00~500.00 % 0.00 ●
synchronous
motor
Filtering time
constant of
flux
F05.19 compensatio 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.50 ●
n of
synchronous
motor
Change rate
of VF
F05.20 separate -500.0~+500.0 % 0.0 ●
power supply
setting
F06 Vector control parameter group
Speed
proportional
F06.00 0.00-100.00 12.00 ●
gain
ASR_P1
Speed
integral time 0.000-30.000
F06.01 s 0.200 ●
constant 0.000: no integral
ASR_T1
Speed
proportional
F06.02 0.00-100.00 8.00 ●
gain
ASR_P2
Speed
F06.03 s 0.300 ●
ASR_T2
Switching
F06.04 0.00 to switching frequency 2 Hz 5.00 ●
frequency 1
Switching
F06.05 Switching frequency 1 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 10.00 ●
frequency 2
No-load
F06.06 50.0~300.0 % 100.0 ●
current gain
Filtering time
F06.07 constant of 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 ●
speed loop
81
output
Vector
F06.08 control slip 50.00-200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
0: set by F06.10 and F06.11
1: AI1
Upper limit 2: AI2
source 3: retention
F06.09 selection of 4: retention 0 〇
speed control 5: Communication setting (percentage)
torque
6: the larger of AI1 and AI2
7: The smaller of AI1 and AI2

Upper limit
of speed
F06.10 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
control motor
torque
Upper limit
of speed
F06.11 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
control brake
torque
Excitation
current
F06.12 proportional 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
gain
ACR-P1
Excitation
current
0.00-600.00
F06.13 integral time ms 10.00 ●
0.00: no integral
constant
ACR-T1
Torque
current
F06.14 proportional 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
gain
ACR-P2
Torque
current
0.00-600.00
0.00: no integral
constant
ACR-T2
SVC 0: braking
F06.17 2 〇
zero-frequen 1: not processed
82
cy processing 2: seal the tube
SVC
zero-frequen
F06.18 50.0-400.0 (100.0 is the no-load current of the motor) % 100.0 〇
cy braking
current
Voltage
F06.20 feedforward 0 - 100 % 0 ●
gain
Flux 0: Invalid
weakening
F06.21 1: direct calculation 2 〇
control
options 2: automatic adjustment
Flux
F06.22 weakening 70.00-100.00 % 95.00 ●
voltage
Maximum
field
weakening
F06.23 0.0-150.0 (100.0 is the rated current of the motor) % 100.0 ●
current of
synchronous
motor
Proportional
gain of flux
F06.24 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
weakening
regulator
Integral time
of flux
F06.25 0.01 - 60.00 s 2.00 ●
weakening
regulator
MTPA
control
0: Invalid
F06.26 option of 1 〇
1: valid
synchronous
motor
Self-learning
F06.27 gain at initial 0 - 200 % 100 ●
position
Frequency of
low
frequency
F06.28 0.00-100.00 (100.00 is the rated frequency of the motor) % 10.00 ●
band of
injection
current
83
Injection
current of 20.0
F06.29 low 0.0-60.0 (100.0 is the rated current of the motor) % 40.0-(F16.0 ●
frequency 0=2)
band
Regulator
gain of low
frequency
F06.30 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
band of
injection
current
Regulator
integral time
of low
F06.31 frequency 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
band of
injection
current
Frequency of
high
frequency
band of
injection
current
Injection
current of
F06.33 high 0.0-30.0 (100.0 is the rated current of the motor) % 8.0 ●
frequency
band
Regulator
gain of high
frequency
F06.34 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
band of
injection
current
Regulator
integral time
of high
F06.35 frequency 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
band of
injection
current
F06.36 Magnetic 0.00~1.00 0.75 〇
84
saturation
coefficient of
synchronous
motor
Stiffness
F06.37 coefficient of 0~20 12 ●
speed loop
Gain
coefficient of
sliding mode
F06.38 1.00~3.70 3.50 〇
of
synchronous
motor
Error width
of sliding
F06.39 mode of 0.005~0.100 0.100 〇
synchronous
motor
Amplitude of
injected
reactive
F06.40 0.0~20.0 % 10.0 〇
current of
synchronous
motor
Open-loop
low-frequenc
0: VF
y processing
F06.41 1: IF 0 〇
of
2: IF in start and VF in stop
synchronous
motor
Open-loop
low-frequenc
y processing
F06.42 0.0 - 50.0 % 8.0 〇
range of
synchronous
motor
IF injection
F06.43 0.0 - 600.0 % 50.0 〇
current
Time
constant of
F06.44 pull-in 0.0 - 6000.0 ms 1.0 〇
current of
magnetic
85
pole
Initial lead
angle of
F06.45 0.0~359.9 ° 30.0 〇
magnetic
pole
Speed
tracking
proportional
F06.46 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 〇
gain of
synchronous
motor
Speed
tracking
integral gain
F06.47 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 〇
of
synchronous
motor
Filtering time
constant of
speed
F06.48 0.00 - 10.00 ms 0.40 〇
tracking of
synchronous
motor
Speed
tracking
control
F06.49 1.0 - 100.0 5.0 〇
intensity of
synchronous
motor
Speed
tracking
control
F06.50 0.00 - 10.00 0.20 〇
threshold of
synchronous
motor
Rise time of
injected
active current
F06.51 0.010 - 1.000 s 0.020 〇
of
synchronous
motor
Low-speed
F06.76 10.0~500.0 % 100.0 ●
correction
86
factor of
stator resistor
of
asynchronous
motor
Low speed
correction
factor of
F06.77 rotor resistor 10.0~500.0 % 100.0 ●
of
asynchronous
motor
Slip gain
switching
F06.78 frequency of 0.10~Fmax Hz 5.00 〇
asynchronous
motor
F07 Protection function setting group
E20 * E13 E06 * E04 E07 E08
Protection 0*0
F07.00 0: valid protection 〇
shield 0*000
1: shielded protection
Motor
overload
F07.01 0.20 - 10.00 1.00 ●
protection
gain
Motor
overload
F07.02 50 - 100 % 80 ●
pre-alarm
coefficient
Ones place: Instantaneous stop/no-stop function options
0: Invalid
Bus voltage 1: deceleration
F07.06 control 2: deceleration to stop 10 〇
options Tens place: Overvoltage stall function options
0: Invalid
1: valid
Voltage of
F07.07 overvoltage 110.0 - 150.0 (380V, 100.0=537V) % 131.0(703V) 〇
stall control
Instantaneous
stop/no-stop 60.0 to instantaneous stop/no-stop recovery voltage (100.0
F07.08 % 76.0 〇
operating = standard bus voltage)
voltage
87
Instantaneous
stop/no-stop
F07.09 Instantaneous stop/no-stop operating voltage to 100.0 % 86.0 ●
recovery
voltage
Check time
for
instantaneous
F07.10 0.00-100.00 s 0.50 ●
stop/no-stop
recovery
voltage
0: Invalid
Current limit
F07.11 1: limit mode 1 2 〇
control
2: limit mode 2
Current limit
F07.12 20.0-180.0(100.0 = the rated current of inverter) % 150.0 ●
level
Quick current 0: Invalid
F07.13 0 〇
limit options 1: valid
Protection
F07.14 0-20; 0: Disable protection retry 0 〇
retries
Options of
digital output
0: no action
F07.15 action in 0 〇
1: action
protection
retries
Interval of
F07.16 protection 0.01 - 30.00 s 0.50 ●
retries
Restoration
time of
F07.17 0.01 - 30.00 s 10.00 ●
protection
retries
Action E08 * E07 * E02 E06 E05 E04 0
F07.18 option of 0: allow protection retry *0 〇
protection 1: disable protection retry *0000
Action E21 E16 E15 E14 E13 * E08 E07
000
F07.19 option 1 of 0: free stop 〇
00*00
protection 1: stop according to stop mode
Action E28 E27 * E23
F07.20 option 2 of 0: free stop 00*0 〇
Options of 0: Invalid
F07.21 0 ●
load loss 1: valid
88
protection
Load loss
F07.22 detection 0.0-100.0 % 20.0 ●
level
Load loss
F07.23 detection 0.0 - 60.0 s 1.0 ●
time
Options of 0: trip protection, free stop
load loss
F07.24 1: trip protection, stop according to stop mode 1 〇
protection
action 2: Continue to run, with DO status output
Motor
overspeed
F07.25 0.0-50.0 (reference: maximum frequency F00.16) % 20.0 ●
detection
level
Motor
overspeed
F07.26 0.0-60.0, 0.0: disable motor overspeed protection s 1.0 ●
detection
time
0: Invalid
AVR
F07.27 1: valid 1 〇
function
2: automatic
Stall
protection
F07.28 0.0-6000.0(0.0: no stallprotection detection) s 0.0 〇
detection
time
Stall control
F07.29 0 - 100 % 20 〇
intensity
Instantaneous
stop/no-stop
F07.30 0.00 - 300.00 s 20.00 〇
deceleration
time
Action E10 E13 E15 E16 * E19 E20 *
000
F07.32 option 2 of 0: allow protection retry 〇
00000
protection 1: disable protection retry
Action * * * * * * E09 E17
F07.34 option 3 of 0: allow protection retry *****00 〇
protection 1: disable protection retry
F08 Multi-segment speed and simple PLC
Multi-segme
F08.00 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 0.00 ●
nt speed 1
Multi-segme
nt speed 2
89
Multi-segme
nt speed 3
Multi-segme
nt speed 4
Multi-segme
nt speed 5
Multi-segme
nt speed 6
Multi-segme
nt speed 7
Multi-segme
nt speed 8
Multi-segme
nt speed 9
Multi- speed
10
Multi-segme
nt speed 11
Multi-segme
nt speed 12
Multi-segme
nt speed 13
Multi-segme
nt speed 14
Multi-segme
nt speed 15
0: stop after a single run
Simple PLC
1: stop after a limited number of cycles
F08.15 running 0 ●
2: run at the last segment after a limited number of cycles
mode
3: continuous cycles
Limited
F08.16 number of 1 - 10000 1 ●
cycles
Ones place: Stop memory options
0: no memory (from the first segment)
Simple PLC
1: memory (from the moment of stop)
F08.17 memory 0 ●
Tens place: Power-down memory options
options
0: no memory (from the first segment)
1: Memory (from the power-down moment)
Simple PLC 0: s (second)
F08.18 0 ●
time unit 1: min (minute)
Setting of the Ones place: Running direction options
F08.19 0 ●
first segment 0: forward
90
1: reverse
Tens place: Acceleration and deceleration time options
0: acceleration and deceleration time 1
Running time
F08.20 of the first 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
Ones place: Running direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.21 second 0 ●
segment
Running time
F08.22 of the second 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the Tens place: Acceleration and deceleration time options
F08.23 0 ●
third segment 0: acceleration and deceleration time 1
Running time
F08.24 of the third 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.25 fourth 0 ●
segment
Running time
F08.26 of the fourth 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
F08.27 Setting of the Ones place: Running direction options 0 ●
91
fifth segment 0: forward
1: reverse
Running time
F08.28 of the fifth 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.29 sixth 0 ●
segment
Running time
F08.30 of the sixth 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.31 seventh 0 ●
segment
Running time
of the
F08.32 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
seventh
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.33 eighth 0 ●
segment
Running time
F08.34 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
of the eighth
92
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.35 nineth 0 ●
segment
Running time
F08.36 of the ninth 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.37 tenth 0 ●
segment
Running time
F08.38 of the tenth 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.39 eleventh 0 ●
segment
Running time
of the
F08.40 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
eleventh
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.41 twelve 0 ●
segment
93
Running time
F08.42 of the twelfth 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.43 thirteenth 0 ●
segment
Running time
of the
F08.44 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
thirteenth
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.45 fourteenth 0 ●
segment
Running time
of the
F08.46 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fourteenth
segment
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.47 fifteenth 0 ●
segment
Running time
of the
F08.48 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fifteenth
segment
F09 PID function group
0: digital PID setting
PID setting
F09.00 1: AI1 0 〇
source
2: AI2
94
3: Reserved
4: retention
5: PULSE, high-frequency pulse (X5)
Digital PID
F09.01 0.0 to PID setting feedback range F09.03 0.0 ●
setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
PID feedback 3: Reserved
F09.02 1 〇
source 4: retention
5: PULSE, high-frequency pulse (X5)
PID setting
F09.03 feedback 0.1 - 6000.0 100.0 ●
range
PID positive
and negative 0: positive
F09.04 0 〇
action 1: negative
selection
Proportional
F09.05 0.00-100.00 0.40 ●
gain 1
Integral time
F09.06 0.000 - 30.000, 0.000: no integral s 2.000 ●
1
Differential
F09.07 0.000-30.000 ms 0.000 ●
time 1
Proportional
F09.08 0.00-100.00 0.40 ●
gain 2
Integral time
F09.09 0.000 - 30.000, 0.000: no integral s 2.000 ●
2
Differential
F09.10 0.000-30.000 ms 0.000 ●
time 2
PID 0: no switching
parameter 1: switching via digital input terminal
F09.11 0 ●
switching 2: automatic switching according to deviation
conditions 3: Automatic switching by frequency
PID
parameter
F09.12 0.00 - F09.13 % 20.00 ●
switching
deviation 1
PID
parameter
F09.13 F09.12 - 100.00 % 80.00 ●
switching
deviation 2
95
Initial PID
F09.14 0.00-100.00 % 0.00 ●
value
PID initial
F09.15 value holding 0.00～650.00 s 0.00 ●
time
Upper limit
F09.16 F9.17~+100.0 % 100.0 ●
of PID output
Lower limit
F09.17 –100.0~F9.16 % 0.0 ●
of PID output
PID
F09.18 deviation 0.00-100.00 (0.00: invalid) % 0.00 ●
limit
PID
F09.19 differential 0.00-100.00 % 5.00 ●
limit
PID integral
F09.20 separation 0.00-100.00 (100.00% = invalid integral separation) % 100.00 ●
threshold
PID setting
F09.21 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
change time
PID feedback
F09.22 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
filtering time
PID output
F09.23 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
filtering time
Upper limit
detection
value of PID
F09.24 0.00-100.00; 100.00 = invalid feedback disconnection % 100.00 ●
feedback
disconnectio
n
Lower limit
detection
value of PID
F09.25 0.00-100.00; 0.00 = invalid feedback disconnection % 0.00 ●
feedback
disconnectio
n
Detection
time of PID
F09.26 feedback 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
disconnectio
n
PID sleep 0: Invalid
F09.27 0 ●
control 1: sleep at zero speed
96
options 2: sleep at lower frequency limit
3: sleep with tube sealed
Sleep action 0.00-100.00 (100.00 corresponds to the PID setting
F09.28 % 100.00 ●
point feedback range)
Sleep delay
F09.29 0.0 - 6500.0 s 0.0 ●
time
Wake-up 0.00-100.00 (100.00 corresponds to the PID setting
F09.30 % 0.00 ●
action point feedback range)
Wake-up
F09.31 0.0 - 6500.0 s 0.0 ●
delay time
Multi-segme
F09.32 nt PID 0.0 to PID setting feedback range F09.03 0.0 ●
setting 1
Multi-segme
setting 2
Multi-segme
setting 3
Upper limit
F09.35 of feedback Lower limit of feedback voltage to 10.00 V 10.00 ●
voltage
Lower limit
F09.36 of feedback 0.00 to upper limit of feedback voltage V 0.00 ●
voltage
Integral 0: Always calculate the integral term

action option 1: Calculate the integral term after the F09.21 set time is
within set 0
F09.37 reached ●
PID change Straight-2
time 2: Calculate the integral term when the error is less than
F09.38
Integral
within set
PID change
F09.38 0.00-100.00 % 0 ●
time
Input
deviation
0: target pressure F09.01* coefficient of wake-up action
Wake-up
F09.39 point 0 〇
option
1: Wake-up action point (F09.30)
Coefficient
F09.40 0.0-100.0 (100% corresponds to PID setting) % 90.0 ●
of wake-up
97
action point
Pipeline
network
F09.41 0.0 to pressure sensor range F09.03 % 90.0 ●
alarm
overpressure
Overpressure
F09.42 protection 0-3600 (0: invalid) bar 6 ●
time
PID reverse 0: no limit
F09.43 1 〇
limit 1: limit
F10 Communication function group
Local
Modbus
F10.00 1-247; 0: broadcast address 1 〇
communicati
on address
0:4800
Baud rate of 1:9600
Modbus 2:19200
F10.01 1 〇
communicati 3:38400
on 4:57600
5:115200
0: 1-8-N-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 stop bit)
1: 1-8-E-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 even parity check
bit + 1 stop bit)
2: 1-8-O-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 odd parity check bit
Modbus data + 1 stop bit)
F10.02 0 〇
format 3: 1-8-N-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 2 stop bits)
4: 1-8-E-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 even parity check
bit + 2 stop bits)
5: 1-8-O-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 odd parity check bit
+ 2 stop bits)
485
F10.03 communicati 0.0s-60.0s; 0.0: invalid (valid for the master-slave mode) s 0.0 ●
on timeout
Modbus
F10.04 response 1 - 20 ms 2 ●
delay
Options of
master-slave 0: Invalid
F10.05 0 〇
communicati 1: valid
on function
Master-slave
F10.06 0: slave 0 〇
options
98
1: host (Modbus protocol broadcast transmission)

0: output frequency
1: set frequency
Data sent by 2: output torque
F10.07 1 〇
host 3: set torque
4: PID setting
5: output current
Proportional
factor of
F10.08 0.00-10.00 (multiple) 1.00 ●
slave
reception
Host sending
F10.09 0.000-30.000 s 0.200 ●
interval
Communicati
F10.10 on protocol 0: Modbus-RTU protocol 0 ×
option
Options of
485 0-10: default operation (for commissioning)
F10.56 0 〇
EEPROM 11: writing not triggered (available after commissioning)
writing
Enabling of
SCI sending 0:invalid resetting
F10.57 1 ●
timeout 1: valid resetting
resetting
Delay time of
SCI sending
F10.58 110~10000 mS 150 ●
timeout
resetting
0: Reply to both read and write commands
SCI response
F10.59 1: Reply to write commands only 0 〇
option
2: No reply to both read and write commands
F11 User-selected parameter group
User-selected
F11.00 U00.00 ●
parameter 1
User-selected
F11.01 U00.01 ●
parameter 2
The displayed content is Uxx.xx, which means that the
User-selected
F11.02 Fxx.xx function code is selected When the function code U00.02 ●
parameter 3
F11.00 is enabled, the keyboard displays U00.00,
User-selected
F11.03 indicating that the first selected parameter is F00.00. U00.03 ●
parameter 4
User-selected
F11.04 U00.04 ●
parameter 5
F11.05 User-selected U00.07 ●
99
parameter 6
User-selected
F11.06 U00.14 ●
parameter 7
User-selected
F11.07 U00.15 ●
parameter 8
User-selected
F11.08 U00.16 ●
parameter 9
User-selected
F11.09 U00.18 ●
parameter 10
User-selected
F11.10 U00.19 ●
parameter 11
User-selected
F11.11 U00.29 ●
parameter 12
User-selected
F11.12 U02.00 ●
parameter 13
User-selected
F11.13 U02.01 ●
parameter 14
User-selected
F11.14 U02.02 ●
parameter 15
User-selected
F11.15 U03.00 ●
parameter 16
User-selected
F11.16 U03.02 ●
parameter 17
User-selected
F11.17 U03.21 ●
parameter 18
User-selected
F11.18 U04.00 ●
parameter 19
User-selected
F11.19 U04.20 ●
parameter 20
User-selected
F11.20 U05.00 ●
parameter 21
User-selected
F11.21 U05.03 ●
parameter 22
User-selected
F11.22 U05.04 ●
parameter 23
User-selected
F11.23 U08.00 ●
parameter 24
User-selected
F11.24 U19.00 ●
parameter 25
User-selected
F11.25 U19.01 ●
parameter 26
User-selected
F11.26 U19.02 ●
parameter 27
100
User-selected
F11.27 U19.03 ●
parameter 28
User-selected
F11.28 U19.04 ●
parameter 29
User-selected
F11.29 U19.05 ●
parameter 30
User-selected
F11.30 U19.06 ●
parameter 31
User-selected
F11.31 U19.12 ●
parameter 32
F12 Keyboard and display function group
0: no function
1: forward jog
M.K 2: reverse jog
F12.00 multi-functio 3: forward/reverse switching 1 〇
n key options 4: quick stop
5: free stop
6. Cursor left
Options of
0: valid only in keyboard control
F12.01 stop function 1 〇
1: with all command channels valid
of STOP key
0: do not lock
Parameter
F12.02 1: reference input not locked 0 ●
locking
2: all locked, except for this function code
0: No operation
Parameter
F12.03 1: parameter upload to keyboard 0 〇
copying
2: Download parameters to inverter
Load speed
F12.09 display 0.01～600.00 30.00 ●
coefficient
UP/DOWN
acceleration
0.00: automatic rate
F12.10 and 5.00Hz/s 〇
0.05~500.00Hz/s
deceleration
rate
Options of
0: Not clear (clear changes in main frequency setting)
UP/DOWN
F12.11 1: clear in non-running state 0 〇
offset
2: Clear by releasing the UP/DOWN button
clearing
Options of
UP/DOWN
0: do not save
F12.12 power-down 1 〇
1: save (valid after the offset is modified)
saving of
offset
Power meter 0: do not clear
F12.13 0 ●
resetting 1: clear
101
0: No operation
Restoration
1: restoration of factory defaults (excluding the motor
F12.14 of factory 0 〇
parameters, inverter parameters, manufacturer parameters,
defaults
running and power-on time record)
Cumulative
F12.15 power-on 0~65535 h XXX ×
time (h)
Cumulative
F12.16 power-on 0 - 59 min XXX ×
time (min)
Cumulative
F12.17 running time 0~65535 h XXX ×
(h)
Cumulative
F12.18 running time 0 - 59 min XXX ×
(min)
Depending
Rated power
F12.19 0.40 - 650.00 kW on the ×
of inverter
motor type
Depending
Rated voltage
F12.20 60 - 690 V on the ×
of inverter
motor type
Depending
Rated current
F12.21 0.1 - 1500.0 A on the ×
of inverter
motor type
Performance
F12.22 software S/N XXX.XX XXX.XX ×
1
Performance
F12.23 software XX.XXX XX.XXX ×
S/N2
Functional
F12.24 software S/N XXX.XX XXX.XX ×
1
Functional
F12.25 software S/N XX.XXX XX.XXX ×
2
Keyboard
software
F12.26 XXX.XX XXX.XX ×
serial number
1
Keyboard
software
F12.27 XX.XXX XX.XXX ×
serial number
2
102
XX.XXX
F12.28 Serial No. 1 XX.XXX
×
F12.29 Serial No. 2 XXXX.X XXXX.X ×

F12.30 Serial No. 3 XXXXX XXXXX ×
LCD 0: Chinese
F12.31 language 1: English 0 ●
options 2: retention
Running
status display
parameter 1
F12.33 of Mode 1 0.00 - 99.99 18.00 ●
(LED stop
status display
parameter 5)
Running
status display
parameter 2
F12.34 of Mode 1 0.00 - 99.99 18.01 ●
(LED stop
status display
parameter 1)
Running
status display
parameter 3
F12.35 of Mode 1 0.00 - 99.99 18.06 ●
(LED stop
status display
parameter 2)
Running
status display
parameter 4
F12.36 of Mode 1 0.00 - 99.99 18.08 ●
(LED stop
status display
parameter 3)
Running
F12.37 status display 0.00 - 99.99 18.09 ●
parameter 5
103
of Mode 1
(LED stop
status display
parameter 4)
LCD
large-line
F12.38 0.00 - 99.99 18.00 ●
display
parameter 1
LCD
large-line
F12.39 0.00 - 99.99 18.06 ●
display
parameter 2
LCD
large-line
F12.40 0.00 - 99.99 18.09 ●
display
parameter 3
Options of
0: Invalid
F12.41 UP/DOWN 0 〇
1: valid
zero crossing
Frequency
setting of
F12.42 digital 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 0.00 ×
potentiomete
r
Digital
potentiomete
F12.43 0.00-|Digital torque setting F13.02| % 0.0 ×
r torque
setting
High-
Analog Digital Multi-segment
Communication speed
UP/DOWN quantity frequency speed
pulse
function
F12.45 0 0 0 0 0 00000 〇
options of
keyboard 0: Invalid
1: valid
F13 Torque control parameter group
Speed/torque
0: Speed control
F13.00 control 0 〇
1: Torque control
options
F13.01 Options of 0: digital torque setting F13.02 0 〇
104
torque setting 1: AI1
source 2: AI2
3: retention
4: retention
7: retention
(Full range of the items 1-6, corresponding to F13.02 digital
torque setting)
Digital
F13.02 -200.0 - 200.0 % 100.0 ●
torque setting
Multi-segme
F13.03 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
nt torque 1
Multi-segme
F13.04 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
nt torque 2
Multi-segme
F13.05 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
nt torque 3
Torque
control
acceleration
F13.06 0.00 - 120.00 s 0.00 ●
and
deceleration
time
0: set by F13.09
1: AI1
Upper
2: AI2
frequency
3: retention
F13.08 limit options 0 〇
4: retention
of torque
control
7: Communication setting (direct frequency)
Positive
upper limit of
F13.09 torque 0.50to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 50.00 ●
control
frequency
Upper
F13.10 frequency 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 0.00 ●
limit offset
Static friction
F13.11 torque 0.0-100.0 % 0.0 ●
compensatio
105
n
Frequency
range of
F13.12 static friction 0.00 - 50.00 Hz 1.00 ●
compensatio
n
Dynamic
friction
F13.13 torque 0.0-100.0 % 0.0 ●
compensatio
n
Reverse
F13.18 speed limit 0 - 100 % 100 ●
options
Reverse
torque
F13.19 0-1 0 ●
control
options
F14 Parameter group of motor 2
F14.00 Motor type 1: variable-frequency asynchronous motor 0 〇
2: permanent magnet synchronous motor
Rated power
Depending on
F14.01 of electric 0.10～650.00 kW 〇
the motor type
motor
Rated voltage Depending on
F14.02 50～2000 V 〇
of motor the motor type
Rated current 0.01 to 600.00 rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.03 A 〇
of motor 0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW) the motor type
Rated
Depending on
F14.04 frequency of 0.01～600.00 Hz 〇
the motor type
motor
Depending on
F14.05 Rated speed 1～60000 rpm 〇
the motor type
Motor
0:Y Depending on
F14.06 winding 〇
1:Δ the motor type
connection
Rated power
Depending on
F14.07 factor of 0.600～1.000 〇
the motor type
motor
Motor Depending on
F14.08 30.0～100.0 % 〇
efficiency the motor type
Stator
1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.09 resistance of mΩ 〇
0.1-6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75kW) the motor type
asynchronous
106
motor
Rotor
resistance of 1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.10 mΩ 〇
asynchronous 0.1-6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75kW) the motor type
motor
Leakage
inductance of 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.11 mH 〇
asynchronous 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW) the motor type
motor
Mutual
inductance of 0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.12 mH 〇
asynchronous 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW) the motor type
motor
No-load
excitation
0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.13 current of A 〇
0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW) the motor type
asynchronous
motor
Flux
weakening
coefficient 1
F14.14 10.00 - 100.00 % 87.00 〇
of
asynchronous
motor
Flux
weakening
coefficient 2
F14.15 10.00 - 100.00 % 80.00 〇
of
asynchronous
motor
Flux
weakening
F14.16 coefficient 3 f 10.00 - 100.00 % 75.00 〇
asynchronous
motor
Flux
weakening
F14.17 coefficient 4 f 10.00 - 100.00 % 72.00 〇
asynchronous
motor
Flux
weakening
F14.18 coefficient 5 f 10.00 - 100.00 % 70.00 〇
asynchronous
motor
Stator
1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤75kW) Depending on
F14.19 resistance of mΩ 〇
0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW) the motor type
synchronous
107
motor
d-axis
inductance of 0.01~600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.20 mH 〇
synchronous 0.001~60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75kW) the motor type
motor
q-axis
inductance of 0.01~600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on
F14.21 mH 〇
synchronous 0.001~60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75kW) the motor type
motor
Counter
electromotive
Depending on
F14.22 force of 10.0-2000.0 (counter electromotive force of rated speed) V 〇
the motor type
synchronous
motor
Initial
electrical
F14.23 angle of 0.0-359.9 (valid for synchronous motor) 〇
synchronous
motor
00: No operation
01: static self-learning of asynchronous motor
Motor 02: rotation self-learning of asynchronous motor
F14.34 parameter 03: inertia self-learning of asynchronous motor 00 〇
self-learning 11: static self-learning of synchronous motor
12: rotary self-learning of synchronous motor
13: encoder self-learning of synchronous motor
Drive control
F14.35 mode of 0 〇
1: Speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
motor 2
Speed
proportional
F14.36 0.00-100.00 12.00 ●
gain
ASR_P1
Speed
F14.37 s 0.200 ●
ASR_T1
Speed
proportional
F14.38 0.00-100.00 8.00 ●
gain
ASR_P2
Speed
F14.39 s 0.300 ●
ASR_T2
Switching
F14.40 0.00 to switching frequency 2 Hz 5.00 ●
frequency 1
108
Switching
F14.41 Switching frequency 1 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 10.00 ●
frequency 2
No-load
F14.42 current gain 50.0~300.0 % 50.0 ●
of motor 2
Filtering time
constant of
F14.43 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 ●
speed loop
output
Vector
F14.44 control slip 50.00-200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
0: set by F06.10 and F06.11
1: AI1
Upper limit
2: AI2
source
3: retention
F14.45 selection of 0 〇
4: retention
speed control
torque
6: the larger of AI1 and AI2
7: The smaller of AI1 and AI2
Upper limit
of speed
F14.46 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
control motor
torque
Upper limit
of speed
F14.47 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
control brake
torque
Excitation
current
F14.48 proportional 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
gain
ACR-P1
Excitation
current
0.00-600.00
0.00: no integral
constant
ACR-T1
Torque
current
F14.50 proportional 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
gain
ACR-P2
Torque
current
0.00-600.00
0.00: no integral
constant
ACR-T2
109
Stiffness
coefficient of
F14.52 0~20 12 ●
speed loop of
motor 2
SVC 0: braking
F14.53 zero-frequenc 1: not processed 2 〇
y processing 2: seal the tube
SVC
zero-frequenc
F14.54 50.0-400.0 (100.0 is the no-load current of the motor) % 100.0 〇
y braking
current
Voltage
F14.56 feedforward 0 - 100 % 0 ●
gain
Flux
0: Invalid
weakening
control
2: automatic adjustment
options
Flux
F14.58 weakening 70.00-100.00 % 95.00 ●
voltage
Maximum
field
weakening
current of
synchronous
motor
Proportional
gain of flux
F14.60 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
weakening
regulator
Integral time
of flux
F14.61 0.01 - 60.00 s 2.00 ●
weakening
regulator
MTPA
control
0: Invalid
F14.62 option of 0 〇
1: valid
synchronous
motor
Self-learning
F14.63 gain at initial 0 - 200 % 100 ●
position
Frequency of
low
frequency
band of
110
injection
current
Injection
current of
F14.65 low 0.0-60.0 (100.0 is the rated current of the motor) % 20.0 ●
frequency
band
Regulator
gain of low
frequency
F14.66 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
band of
injection
current
Regulator
integral time
of low
F14.67 frequency 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
band of
injection
current
Frequency of
high
frequency
band of
injection
current
Injection
current f high
frequency
band
Regulator
gain of high
frequency
F14.70 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
band of
injection
current
Regulator
integral time
of high
F14.71 frequency 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
band of
injection
current
0: the same as motor 1
Acceleration/
deceleration
F14.77 2: acceleration and deceleration time 2 0 〇
time options
of motor 2
111
Maximum
F14.78 frequency of 20.00~600.00 Hz 50 〇
motor 2
Upper
frequency Lower limit frequency F00.19 to maximum frequency
F14.79 Hz 50 ●
limit of F14.78
motor 2
2: 1.3-power V/F
V/F curve 3: 1.7-power V/F
F14.80 setting of 4: square V/F 0 〇
motor 2 5: VF complete separation mode (Ud = 0, Uq = K * t =
voltage of separation voltage source)
6: VF semi-separation mode (Ud = 0, Uq = K * t = F/Fe *
2 * voltage of separation voltage source)
Multi-point
F14.81 VF frequency 0.00 - F14.83 Hz 0.50 ●
F1 of motor 2
Multi-point
VF voltage
F14.82 0.0～100.0 (100.0 = Rated voltage) % 1.0 ●
V1 of motor
2
Multi-point
F14.83 VF frequency F14.81 - F14.85 Hz 2.00 ●
F2 of motor 2
Multi-point
VF voltage
F14.84 0.0-100.0 % 4.0 ●
V2 of motor
2
Multi-point
F14.85 VF frequency F14.83 to rated frequency of motor (reference frequency) Hz 5.00 ●
F3 of motor 2
Multi-point
VF voltage
F14.86 0.0-100.0 % 10.0 ●
V3 of motor
2
Stop mode of 0: Slow down to stop
F14.87 0 〇
motor 2 1: free stop
Low speed
correction
factor of
F14.96 stator resistor 10.0~500.0 % 100.0 ●
of
asynchronous
motor 2
F14.97 Low speed 10.0~500.0 % 100.0 ●
112
correction
factor of
rotor resistor
of
asynchronous
motor 2
Slip gain
switching
F14.98 frequency of 0.10~Fmax Hz 5.00 〇
asynchronous
motor 2
F15 Auxiliary function group
F15.00 Jog frequency 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 5.00 ●
Jog 0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
F15.01 acceleration 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 5.00 ●
time (F15.13=2)
Jog 0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
F15.02 deceleration 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 5.00 ●
time (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
Acceleration
F15.03 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 15.00 ●
time 2
(F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
Deceleration
F15.04 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 15.00 ●
time 2
(F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
Acceleration
F15.05 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 15.00 ●
time 3
(F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
Deceleration
F15.06 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 15.00 ●
time 3
(F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
Acceleration
F15.07 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 15.00 ●
time 4
(F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
Deceleration
F15.08 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 15.00 ●
time 4
(F15.13=2)
Fundamental
frequency of
0: maximum frequency F00.16
acceleration
F15.09 1: 50.00Hz 0 〇
and
2: set frequency
deceleration
time
F15.10 Automatic 0: Invalid 0 〇
113
switching of 1: valid
acceleration
and
deceleration
time
Switching
frequency of
acceleration
time 1 and 2
Switching
frequency of
deceleration
time 1 and 2
Acceleration
0:0.01s
and
F15.13 1:0.1s 0 〇
deceleration
2:1s
time unit
Frequency
F15.14 hopping point 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
1
Hopping
F15.15 0.00-20.00, 0.00 is invalid Hz 0.00 ●
range 1
Frequency
2
Hopping
F15.17 0.00-20.00, 0.00 is invalid Hz 0.00 ●
range 2
Frequency
3
Hopping
F15.19 0.00-20.00, 0.00 is invalid Hz 0.00 ●
range 3
Detection
width of
F15.20 output 0.00 - 50.00 Hz 2.50 〇
frequency
arrival (FAR)
Output
frequency
F15.21 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 30.00 〇
detection
FDT1
FDT1
F15.22 -(Fmax-F15.21)～F15.21 Hz 2.00 〇
hysteresis
114
Output
frequency
F15.23 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 20.00 〇
detection
FDT2
FDT2
F15.24 -(Fmax-F15.23)～F15.23 Hz 2.00 〇
hysteresis
Options of
analog level 0:AI1
F15.25 0 ○
detection 1：AI2
ADT
Analog level
F15.26 detection 0.00-100.00 % 20.00 ●
ADT1
ADT1
F15.27 0.00 to F15.26 (valid down in one direction) % 5.00 ●
hysteresis
Analog level
F15.28 detection 0.00-100.00 % 50.00 ●
ADT2
ADT2
F15.29 0.00 to F15.28 (valid down in one direction) % 5.00 ●
hysteresis
Options of
energy
0: Invalid
F15.30 consumption 0 〇
1: valid
braking
function
Energy
consumption
F15.31 110.0-140.0 (380V, 100.0 = 537V) % 125.0 〇
braking
voltage
F15.32 Braking rate 20-100 (100 means that duty ratio is 1) % 100 ●
Operating
mode with set
frequency 0: running at the lower frequency limit
F15.33 less than 1: Shutdown 0 〇
lower 2: zero-speed running
frequency
limit
0: running after power-on
F15.34 Fan control 1: running at startup 1 〇
2: intelligent operation, subject to temperature control
Overmodulati
F15.35 1.00 - 1.10 1.05 ●
on intensity
F15.36 Switching 0: invalid (7-segment PWM modulation) 0 〇
115
options of 1: valid (5-segment PWM modulation)
PWM
modulation
mode
Switching
frequency of
F15.37 PWM 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 15.00 ●
modulation
mode
Options of
0: no compensation
dead zone
F15.38 1: compensation mode 1 1 〇
compensation
2: compensation mode 2
mode
Terminal jog 0: Invalid
F15.39 0 〇
priorityv 1: valid
Deceleration 0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0) 0.0 -
F15.40 time for 6500.0 (F15.13=1) 0 - 65000 s 1.00 ●
quick stop (F15.13=2)
Overcurrent
F15.66 detection 0.1-300.0 (0.0: no detection; 100.0%: corresponding to the % 200.0 ●
level rated current of motor)
Overcurrent
F15.67 detection 0.00-600.00 s 0.00 ●
delay time
F15.68 Market price 0.00-100.00 1.00 〇
Power-freque
F15.69 ncy load 30.0-200.0 % 90.0 〇
factor
F16 Customization function group
0: Universal model
1: Water supply application
2: Air compressor application
Industry 3: Winding application
F16.00 0 〇
application 4: fan application
5: Spindle application of machine tool
6: Extruder application
7: High-speed motor application
1 - 65535 (F16.13=0)
0.1 - 6553.5 (F16.13=1)
F16.01 Set length m 1000 ●
0.01 - 655.35 (F16.13=2)
0.001 - 65.535 (F16.13=3)
116
Pulses per
F16.02 0.1 - 6553.5 100.0 ●
meter
Set count
F16.03 F16.04 - 65535 1000 ●
value
Specified
F16.04 1 - F16.03 1000 ●
count value
Set time of
F16.05 regular 0.0-6500.0, 0.0 is invalid min 0.0 ●
running
Agent
F16.06 0~65535 0 ●
password
Setting of
cumulative 0-65535; 0: disable the protection when the power-on time
F16.07 h 0 ●
power-on is up
arrival time
Setting of
cumulative 0-65535; 0: disable the protection when the running time is
F16.08 h 0 ●
running up
arrival time
Factory
F16.09 0~65535 XXXX ●
password
Analog
output
percentage
F16.10 0.00-100.00 % 0.00 〇
correspondin
g to the count
value 0
Analog
output
percentage
F16.11 0.00-100.00 % 100.00 〇
correspondin
g to the set
count value
0:1m
Set length 1:0.1m

F16.13 0 〇
resolution 2:0.01 m
3:0.001m
F17 Virtual I/O function group
VX1 virtual
The same as the function options of digital input terminal of
F17.00 input 0 〇
F02 group
function
117
options
VX2 virtual
input
F17.01 0 〇
function
options
VX3 virtual
input
F17.02 0 〇
function
options
VX4 virtual
input
F17.03 0 〇
function
options
VX5 virtual
input
F17.04 0 〇
function
options
VX6 virtual
input
F17.05 0 〇
function
options
VX7 virtual
input
F17.06 0 〇
function
options
VX8 virtual
input
F17.07 0 〇
function
options
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1
Virtual input
0: positive logic, valid in the closed state/invalid in the open 000
F17.08 positive/nega 〇
state 00000
tive logic
1: Negative logic, invalid in the closed state/valid in the open
state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX1-VX8
VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1 000
F17.09 status setting 〇
0: the VXn status is the same as VYn output status 00000
options
1: status set by F17.10
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX1-VX8 VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1 000
F17.10 ●
status setting 0: Invalid 00000
1: valid
118
VX1 valid
F17.11 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VX1 invalid
F17.12 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VX2 valid
F17.13 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VX2 invalid
F17.14 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VX3 valid
F17.15 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VX3 invalid
F17.16 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VX4 valid
F17.17 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VX4 invalid
F17.18 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY1 virtual
output
F17.19 0 〇
function
options
VY2 virtual
output
F17.20 0 〇
function
options
VY3 virtual
output
F17.21 0 〇
function
The same as the function options of digital output terminal
options
of F03 group
VY4 virtual
output
F17.22 0 〇
function
options
VY5 virtual
output
F17.23 0 〇
function
options
F17.24 Reserved
F17.25 Reserved
F17.26 Reserved
Virtual D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
F17.27 00000 〇
output VY8 VY7 VY6 VY5 VY4 VY3 VY2 VY1
119
positive/nega 0: positive logic, valid in the closed state/invalid in the open
tive logic state
open state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Control
VY8 VY7 VY6 VY5 VY4 VY3 VY2 VY1
options of
0: Depending on the status of terminal X1-X5 (without
F17.28 virtual 11111 〇
output VY6-8)
terminal
1: depending on the output function status
VY1 valid
F17.29 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY1 invalid
F17.30 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY2 valid
F17.31 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY2 invalid
F17.32 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY3 valid
F17.33 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY3 invalid
F17.34 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY4 valid
F17.35 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
VY4 invalid
F17.36 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
delay time
Virtual input VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1
000
F17.37 terminal 0: Invalid ×
00000
status 1: valid
Virtual VY8 VY7 VY6 VY5 VY4 VY3 VY2 VY1
output
F17.38 0: Invalid ×
terminal 00000
1: valid
status
F18 Monitoring parameter group
Output
F18.00 0.00 to upper frequency limit Hz XXX ×
frequency
Set
F18.01 0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz XXX ×
frequency
Estimate
F18.03 feedback 0.00 to upper frequency limit Hz XXX ×
frequency
Output
F18.04 -200.0 - 200.0 % XXX ×
torque
120
Torque
F18.05 -200.0 - 200.0 % XXX ×
setting
Output 0.00 to 650.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F18.06 A XXX ×
current 0.0 to 6500.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW)
Output
F18.07 current 0.0-300.0 (100.0 = the rated current of inverter) % 0 ×
percentage
Output
F18.08 0.0 - 690.0 V XXX ×
voltage
DC bus
F18.09 0 - 1200 V XXX ×
voltage
Simple PLC
F18.10 running 0 - 10000 XXX ×
times
Simple PLC
F18.11 operation 1 - 15 XXX ×
stage
PLC running
F18.12 time at the 0.0 - 6000.0 XXX ×
current stage
F18.14 Load rate 0~65535 rpm XXX ×
UP/DOWN
F18.15 offset 0.00 to 2 * Maximum frequency F00.16 Hz XXX ×
frequency
F18.16 PID setting 0.0 to PID maximum range XXX ×
PID
F18.17 0.0 to PID maximum range XXX ×
feedback
Power meter:
F18.18 0~65535 MWh XXX ×
MWh
Watt-hour
F18.19 0.0 - 999.9 kWh XXX ×
meter: kWh
Output
F18.20 -650.00~650.00 kW XXX ×
power
Output
F18.21 -1.000 - 1.000 XXX ×
power factor
Digital input X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
F18.22 terminal XXX ×
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
status 1
Digital input * AI2 AI1 * *
F18.23 terminal XXX ×
* 0/1 0/1 * 0/1
status 2
Output * * R1 * Y1
F18.25 XXX ×
terminal * * 0/1 * 0/1
121
state
F18.26 AI1 0.0-100.0 % XXX ×
F18.27 AI2 0.0-100.0 % XXX ×
High-freque
ncy pulse
F18.31 input 0.00-100.00 kHz XXX ×
frequency:
kHz
High-freque
ncy pulse
F18.32 input 0~65535 Hz XXX ×
frequency:
Hz
F18.33 Count value 0~65535 XXX ×
Actual
F18.34 0~65535 m XXX ×
length
Remaining
time of
F18.35 0.0 - 6500.0 min XXX ×
regular
running
Rotor
position of
F18.36 0.0~359.9° XXX ×
synchronous
motor
VF
separation
F18.39 0 - 690 V XXX ×
target
voltage
VF
separation
F18.40 0 - 690 V XXX ×
output
voltage
F18.51 PID output -100.0 - 100.0 % ×
Inverter
F18.60 -40 to 200 ℃ 0 ×
temperature
Saved
electric
F18.67 Cumulative energy saving MWH 0～65535 MWh ×
energy
(MWH)
Saved
electric 0.0～
F18.68 Cumulative energy saving KWH kWh ×
energy 999.9
(KWH)
122
Saved
electric
F18.69 High cumulative cost saving (*1000) 0～65535 ×
charge
(1,000 yuan)
Saved
electric 0.0～
F18.70 Low cumulative cost saving ×
charge 999.9
(yuan)
Power-frequ
ency power
F18.71 Power-frequency power consumption MWH 0～65535 MWh ×
consumption
MWh
Power-frequ
ency power 0.0～
F18.72 Power-frequency power consumption KWH kWh ×
consumption 999.9
KWh
F19 Protection record group
0: No protection
E01: output short circuit protection
E02: instantaneous overcurrent
E04: steady-state overcurrent
E05: Overvoltage
E06: Undervoltage
E07: input phase loss
E08: output phase loss
E09: inverter overload
E10: inverter overheat protection
E11: Parameter setting conflict
E13: motor overload
Category of
E14: External protection
F19.00 last 0 ×
E15: inverter memory protection
protection
E16: communication abnormality
E17: Temperature sensor abnormality
E18: Abnormal disconnection of soft start relay
E19: current detection circuit abnormality
E20: Stall protection
E21: PID feedback disconnection
E22: retention
E24: parameter identification abnormality
E25: retention
E26: Load loss protection
E27: up to the cumulative power-on time
E28: up to the cumulative running time
123
E43: Material cutoff protection
E44: Cable protection
E57: Overpressure in pipeline network
E58: Under-pressure in pipeline network
E76: Short-circuit protection to ground
Output
F19.01 frequency in 0.00 to upper frequency limit Hz 0.00 ×
protection
Output
F19.02 current in A 0.00 ×
protection
Bus voltage
F19.03 0 - 1200 V 0 ×
in protection
0: not running
1: forward acceleration
Operating 2: reverse acceleration
F19.04 status in 3: forward deceleration 0 ×
protection 4: reverse deceleration
5: constant speed in forward running
6: reverse constant speed in reverse running
Working
F19.05 time in h 0 ×
protection
Category of
F19.06 previous Same as F19.00 parameter description 0 ×
protection
Output
F19.07 frequency in Hz 0.00 ×
protection
Output
protection
Bus voltage
F19.09 V 0 ×
in protection
Operating
F19.10 status in Same as F19.04 parameter description 0 ×
protection
Working
protection
Category of
F19.12 two previous Same as F19.00 parameter description 0 ×
protections
124
Output
F19.13 frequency in Hz 0.00 ×
protection
Output
protection
Bus voltage
F19.15 V 0 ×
in protection
Operating
F19.16 status in Same as F19.04 parameter description 0 ×
protection
Working
protection
F27 Winding/unwinding application macro parameter group
0: Winding mode
Application 1: Unwinding mode
F27.00 0 〇
macro 2: Wire drawing mode
3: Straight wire drawing machine mode
Feedforward 0: feedforward gain * set source B
F27.01 gain action 1: Feedforward gain * set source A 1 〇
channel 2: Feedforward gain * 10V
0: No change in feedforward gain
Feedforward
1: 0.00 to upper limit of feedforward gain
F27.02 gain input 1 〇
2: - upper limit of feedforward gain to + upper limit of
mode
feedforward gain
Ones place: Feedforward reset option
0: Automatic reset
1: Terminal reset
Tens place: Feedforward power-off stop option
Feedforward 0: Save after power failure
F27.03 10 〇
control 1: Not save after power failure
Hundreds place: Options of continuous feedforward
calculation
0: Not calculate
1: Calculate
Upper limit
of
F27.04 0.00~500.00 % 500.00 〇
feedforward
gain
Initial
F27.05 feedforward 0.00~500.00 % 50.00 ●
gain
125
Feedforward
F27.06 gain filter 0~1000 ms 0 ●
time
Feedforward
F27.07 0.00 to feedforward range 1 % 4.00 ●
range 0
Feedforward
F27.08 Feedforward range 0 to feedforward range 2 % 12.00 ●
range 1
Feedforward
range 2
Feedforward
range 3
Feedforward
range 4
Feedforward
F27.12 Feedforward range 4 to 100.00 % 72.00 ●
range 5
Soft start
F27.13 0.00 - 50.00 %/S 0.60 ●
increment
Feedforward
F27.14 0.00 - 50.00 %/S 0.11 ●
increment 1
Feedforward
F27.15 0.00 - 50.00 %/S 0.30 ●
increment 2
Feedforward
F27.16 0.00 - 50.00 %/S 0.75 ●
increment 3
Feedforward
F27.17 0.00 - 50.00 %/S 1.55 ●
increment 4
Feedforward
F27.18 0.00 - 50.00 %/S 4.00 ●
increment 5
Feedforward
F27.19 0.00 - 50.00 %/S 11.00 ●
increment 6
Ones place: Disconnection detection mode
0: Automatic detection
1: External signal
Tens place: Material cutoff detection control
0: Detect when the output is greater than the lower limit of
material cutoff detection
Material
1: no detection
F27.20 cutoff 01201 〇
Hundreds place: Material cutoff handling mode
control mode
0: Protection of terminal action only
1: Delayed stop and trip protection
2: Material cutoff protection
3: Automatic reset after protection shutdown
4: Material cutoff detection terminal output only (straight
wire drawing machine) 5: Automatic reset of cutoff
126
detection terminal (straight wire drawing machine)
Thousands place: Brake mode
0: mode 0
1: mode 1
Myriabit: Reverse unwinding mode
0: No speed limit
1: Reverse speed limit by F27.24
Material
cutoff
F27.21 0.0~10.0 S 6.0 ●
detection
delay
Lower limit
of material
F27.22 cutoff 0.00 - 60.00 Hz 5.00 ●
detection
after parking
Time of
continuous
F27.23 running after 0.0 - 60.0 S 10.0 ●
material
cutoff
Frequency of
continuous
F27.24 running after 0.00~Fmax Hz 5.00 ●
material
cutoff
Brake signal
F27.25 output 0.00~FUP Hz 2.50 ●
frequency
Braking
F27.26 signal 0.0-100.0 S 5.0 ●
duration
Minimum
frequency of
F27.27 0.00~20.00 Hz 10.00 ●
wiring
detection
Judgment
time for
F27.28 0.1 - 20.0 S 10.0 ●
invalid cable
signal
Judgment
F27.29 time for 0.1 - 20.0 S 2.0 ●
valid cable
127
signal
Filtering
time for
F27.30 material 1~100 ms 5 ●
cutoff
detection
Current
value of
F27.36 -500.0~500.0 % ×
feedforward
gain
128
Chapter 7 Function Code Details
7.1 Basic Function Parameter Group of F00 Group

Parameter description Unit Attribute
code name setting
Drive control
F00.01 1: Speed sensorless vector control 0 〇
mode of motor 1
(SVC)
F00.01=0: V/F control (VVF)
It is used for one-to-many, fast and low-precision speed control.
F00.01=1: speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
The open-loop vector control is suitable for general high-performance control. An inverter
drives one motor only. It is suitable for machine tools, centrifuges, drawing machines, injection
molding machines and other loads.
1. In order to improve the control performance, self-learning is needed to
obtain the correct motor parameters before vector control.
2. In the vector control mode, the inverter can be used with one motor only,
and the motor capacity should not be greatly different from the inverter capacity;
otherwise, the control performance may decline or the system may not work properly.

code name setting
F00.02=0: keyboard control
(LOC/REM indicator ON)
Options of
1: terminal control (LOC/REM
F00.02 command 0 〇
indicator: OFF)
source
2: communication control
(LOC/REM indicator: flicker)
F00.02=0: keyboard control (LOC/REM indicator ON)
The start and stop of the inverter are controlled by the RUN key , STOP key
on the keyboard. In the case of no trip protection, press the RUN key to enter the
129
running status. If the green LED indicator above the RUN key is ON, it indicates that
the inverter is in the running status. If this indicator is flickering, it means that the inverter is in
the status of deceleration to stop.
Regardless of the speed or torque reference input control, the inverter will run in the input
control mode at the jog speed once jogging is enabled.
F00.02=1: terminal control (LOC/REM indicator OFF)
The start and stop of the inverter are controlled by the start and stop control terminals that
are defined by the function codes F02.00 to F02.06. Detailed settings of terminal control are
dependent on F00.03.
F00.02=2: Communication control (LOC/REM indicator flickering)
The inverter start and stop are controlled by the host through the RS485 communication
port. See the 11.3.4Register address distribution 7000H control description for details.
The final command source also depends on the input functions “24: switching
from the Run command to keyboard” and “25: switching from the Run
command to communication”. If the input function “24: switching from the
Run command to keyboard” is valid, the current command source is
“keyboard control”. If the input function “25: switching from the Run command to
communication” is valid, the current command source is “communication control”.
Otherwise, the command source depends on the setting of the function code F00.02.

code name setting
0: terminal RUN (running) and F/R
(forward/reverse)
1: terminal RUN (forward) and F/R
Options of
(reverse)
F00.03 terminal 0 〇
2: terminal RUN (forward), Xi (stop)
control mode
and F/R (reverse)
3: terminal RUN (running), Xi (stop)
and F/R (forward/reverse)
Terminal RUN: Xi terminal is set to “1: terminal RUN”
Terminal F/R: Xi terminal is set to “2: running direction F/R”
Terminal control can be divided into two types: two-line control and three-line
control.
Two-line control:
F00.03=0: the terminal RUN is in the running status, and F/R in the forward/reverse status.
130
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the start and stop of the inverter, and the
terminal F/R to control the forward/reverse running. If F00.21 is set to 1 and reverse running is
disabled, the F/R terminal will not be available. If the mode of deceleration to stop is selected,
the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 7-6(b);
F00.03=1: the terminal RUN controls forward running, and the terminal F/R is in the
reverse mode.
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the forward running and stop of the inverter,
and the terminal F/R to control the reverse running and stop. When the terminals RUN and F/R
are enabled simultaneously, the inverter will be stopped. If reverse running is disabled, the
terminal F/R will not be available. If the mode of deceleration to stop is selected, the
forward/reverse logic will be run, as shown in Fig. 7-6(d);
24V
Operation
RUN
Inverter
F/R
Forward/reverse
COM
(a) Wiring diagram of two-line control (F00.03=0) (b) F04.19=0, F00.03=0, run the
forward/reverse logic
24V (c) RUN Wiring

Forward
RUN F/R diagram
Inverter
F/R of f two-line
Reverse
Output
frequency control
Time
COM
-f
(F00.03=1) (d) F04.19=0, F00.03=1: forward/reverse running logic
Fig. 7-6 Two-line Control
When the start/stop value of F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, even if the terminal RUN is
available, the inverter can be stopped by pressing the STOP key or sending an
external stop command to the terminal. In this case, the inverter will not be in the
131
running status until the terminal RUN is disabled and then enabled.
Three-line control:
F00.03=2: the terminal RUN controls forward running, the terminal Xi is for stop,
and the terminal F/R is in the reverse status.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for forward running, and the terminal F/R is normally
ON for reverse running, with valid pulse edges. The terminal Xi is normally closed for stop,
with the valid level. When the inverter is in the running status, press Xi to stop it. When the
mode of deceleration to stop (F04.19=0) is selected, the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 7-7(b).
The terminal Xi is for “three-line running and stop control” as defined by F02.00 to F02.04.
F00.03=3: the terminal RUN is for running, Xi for stop and F/R for forward/reverse
control.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for running, with the valid pulse edge, F/R for
forward/reverse switching (forward in the OFF status and reverse in the ON status), and Xi is
normally OFF for stop, with the valid level. When the mode of deceleration to stop (F04.19=0)
is selected, the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 7-7(d).
24V RUN
Forward F/R
RUN
Inverter
F/R Xi
Parking
f
Xi
Output
frequency
COM Time
-f
（a）Wiring diagram of three-line control (F00.03=2) (b) F04.19=0, F00.03=2:

forward/reverse running logic
RUN
24V
Operation F/R
RUN
Inverter Forward/reverse
F/R Xi
Parking
f
Xi
Output
frequency
COM Time
-f
132
(c) Wiring diagram of three-line control (F00.03=3) (d) F04.19=0, F00.03=3:

forward/reverse running logic
Fig. 7-7 Three-line Control
The three-line control logic of the EM730/EM730E series inverter is consistent
with the conventional electrical control. The keys and knob switches should be
used correctly as shown in the schematic diagram. Otherwise, operation errors may be
caused.
Function Default
code setting
F00.07
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
Options of main 4: retention
F00.04 5: high frequency pulse input 8 〇
frequency source A (X5)
6: Percentage setting of main
7: Direct setting of main
F00.04=0: digital frequency setting F00.07
The main frequency source A depends on the digital frequency setting F00.07.
F00.04=1:AI1
F00.04=2:AI2
The main frequency source A depends on the AI (percentage) * F00.16.
AI1 is the 0-10V voltage input;
AI2 is the 0-10V voltage input or 0-20mA current input, selected via the terminals S4/S5
on the terminal block.
The percentage corresponding to the input physical quantity of the AI terminal is set by the
function codes F02.31 to F02.36. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F00.16
(maximum frequency).
F00.04=5: High-frequency pulse input (X5)
The main frequency source A depends on the HDI (percentage) * F00.16.
The terminal X5 can also be used for high-frequency pulse input (set the terminal function
F02.04 to “40: pulse input”), with the frequency of 0.00-100.00kHz and voltage of 12-48V. The
133
corresponding percentage of terminal input pulse frequency is set by F02.06-F02.29. 100.00% is

the percentage relative to the set value of F00.16 (maximum frequency).
F00.04=6 or 7: main frequency communication setting
The main frequency source A depends on the communication, etc.
 If the master-slave communication (F10.05=1) is enabled and the inverter works as the
slave (F10.06=0), the main frequency source A is set to “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F00.16 (maximum frequency) * F10.08 (slave receiving
proportional coefficient)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as
detailed in Table 12-31.
 For general communication (F10.05=0):
a、 F00.04=6 percentage setting: the main frequency source A is set to “7001H
(communication percentage setting of the main channel frequency A) * F00.16
(maximum frequency)”;
b、 F00.04=7 direct frequency setting: the main frequency source A is set to “7015H
(communication setting of the main channel frequency A)”
The 7001H data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, and the 7015H data range is 0.00 to
F00.16 (maximum frequency), as detailed in Table 12-31.
F00.04=8: digital potentiometer setting
In the speed mode, the main frequency source A is set directly by the digital potentiometer,
and only the monitoring interface is available. See F12.42 for the specific value.
Operating instructions for the digital potentiometer: In the monitoring interface, turn
the digital potentiometer clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the set
frequency. This is the editing status, and the value will flash if changed. After the change is
made, press the ENTER key to exit the editing status. The indicator will no longer flicker. Or,
press the ESC key to cancel the current change, exit the editing status and restore the original
value. The normal status will be displayed, and the indicator will no long flicker. (After the
product is powered on again, this value will still be displayed.) See the running monitoring of
keyboard operation.
The final setting of the main frequency source A is also dependent on the DI terminal
status:
134
Table 7-3 Detailed Setting of Main Frequency Source A

Terminal Function Status Description Priority
11-14: multi-segment speed If one is valid, the multi-segment speed mode will be
1
terminals 1-4 enabled (F08.00-F08.14).
51: switching of main
Valid, depending on the digital frequency setting
frequency source to digital 2
F00.07, the same as the function code F00.04=0
frequency setting
52: switching of main Valid, depending on the AI1 input percentage setting,
3
frequency source to AI1 the same as the function code F00.04=1
53: Switching of main Valid, depending on the AI2 input percentage setting,
4
frequency source to AI2 the same as the function code F00.04=2
56: switching of main
Valid, depending on the communication input, the same
frequency source to 7
as the function code F00.04=6
communication setting
-- All invalid, depending on the setting of function code
8
F00.04
F00.05=0: digital frequency setting F00.07
Function Default
code setting
F00.07
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
4: retention
5: high frequency pulse input
Options of auxiliary (X5)
F00.05 0 〇
frequency source B 6: percent setting of auxiliary
7: direct setting of auxiliary
9: retention
10: process PID
11: simple PLC
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the digital frequency setting F00.07.
F00.05=1:AI1
F00.05=2:AI2
The auxiliary frequency B is determined by AI (percentage) * F00.16.
For the details of AI1 and AI2, refer to the F00.04 description. They have the same
135
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F00.16 (maximum frequency).
The auxiliary frequency B is determined by HDI (percentage) * F00.16.
For the details of AI1-AI2 and X5, refer to the F00.04 description. They have the same
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F00.16 (maximum frequency).
F00.05=6 or 7: auxiliary frequency communication setting
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the communication and others.
slave (F10.06=0), the auxiliary frequency B is set to “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F00.16 (maximum frequency) * F10.08 (slave receiving
proportional coefficient)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as
a. F00.05=6, the auxiliary frequency B is set to “7002H (communication setting of the
auxiliary channel frequency B) * F00.16 (maximum frequency)”;
b. F00.05=7, the auxiliary frequency B is set to “7016H (communication setting of the
auxiliary channel frequency B)”.
The 7002H data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, and the 7002H data range is 0.00 to
F00.16 (maximum frequency), as detailed in Table 12-31.
In the speed mode, the auxiliary frequency B is set directly by the digital potentiometer.
See the F00.04 description for details.
F00.05=10: process PID
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the process PID function output, as detailed in 7.10.
This is usually applied in on-site closed-loop process control, such as the constant-pressure
closed-loop control and constant-tension closed-loop control.
F00.05=11: Simple PLC
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the simple PLC function output, as detailed in the
multi-segment group (F08) and simple PLC parameter group.
1.The same physical channel (AI1 or AI2) cannot be selected for the main
frequency source A and auxiliary frequency source B;
136
2. The process PID and simple PLC modules will not be valid until they are
selected.

code name setting
0: main frequency source A
1: auxiliary frequency source B
2: main and auxiliary operation results
3: switching between main frequency
Options of source A and auxiliary frequency source B
F00.06 frequency 4: switching between main frequency 0 〇
source source A and main and auxiliary operation
results
5: switching between auxiliary frequency
source B and main and auxiliary
operation results
Select the final valid frequency setting channel and operation mode.
F00.06=0: main frequency source A
The final set frequency only depends on the main frequency source A.
F00.06=1: auxiliary frequency source B
The final set frequency only depends on the auxiliary frequency source B.
F00.06=2: main and auxiliary operation results
The final set frequency depends on the main and auxiliary operation results. Refer to the
description of the function code F00.08.
F00.06=3: switching between the main frequency source A and auxiliary frequency
source B
The final set frequency is determined by the status of the input function “26: Frequency
source switching”: invalid, depending on the main frequency source A; valid, depending on the
auxiliary frequency source B.
F00.06=4: switching between main frequency source A and main and auxiliary
calculation results
source switching”: invalid, depending on the main frequency source A; valid, depending on the
main and auxiliary operation results. Refer to the description of the function code F00.08.
F00.06=5: switching between the auxiliary frequency source B and main and auxiliary
137
operation results
source switching”: invalid, depending on the auxiliary frequency source B; valid, depending on
the main and auxiliary operation results. Refer to the description of the function code F00.08.
Function Default
code setting
Digital frequency
F00.07 0.00 to maximum frequency Hz 50.00 ●
setting
F00.07 is used to set the digital frequency, and its maximum value is limited by the
maximum frequency (F00.16).
Function Default
code setting
0: main frequency source A +
auxiliary frequency source B
1: main frequency source A -
Options of main and auxiliary frequency source B
F00.08 0 〇
auxiliary operation 2: larger value of main and
3: smaller value of main and
Select the main and auxiliary operation mode. The final results are limited by the lower
frequency limit (F00.19) and upper frequency limit (F00.18).
F00.08=0: main frequency source A + auxiliary frequency source B
The main and auxiliary operation result is the sum of the two items, and may be positive or
negative. That is, the result of the forward 20.00Hz and reverse 40.00Hz is reverse 20.00Hz.
F00.08=1: main frequency source A - auxiliary frequency source B
The main and auxiliary operation result is the difference between the two items, and may
be positive or negative. That is, the result of the forward 20.00Hz and reverse 40.00Hz is
forward 50.00Hz (upper frequency limit F00.18=50.00).
F00.08=2: the larger of main and auxiliary operation results
The main and auxiliary operation result is the larger of the two items, and may be positive
or negative. That is, the result of the forward 20.00Hz and reverse 40.00Hz is forward 20.00Hz.
F00.08=3: the smaller of main and auxiliary operation results
The main and auxiliary operation result is the smaller of the two items, and may be positive
138
or negative. That is, the result of the forward 20.00Hz and reverse 40.00Hz is reverse 40.00Hz.
Function Default
code setting
Reference options of 0: relative to he maximum
auxiliary frequency frequency
F00.09 0 〇
source B in main and 1: Relative to main frequency
auxiliary operation source A
During the main and auxiliary operations, the range of the auxiliary frequency source B
depends on the selected object, maximum frequency by default. If selected relative to the main
frequency source A (F00.09=1), the range of the auxiliary frequency source B will change along
with that of the main frequency source A (according to the maximum frequency by default).
Function Default
code setting
Gain of main frequency
F00.10 0.0～300.0 % 100.0 ●
source
Gain of auxiliary
F00.11 0.0～300.0 % 100.0 ●
frequency source
Synthetic gain of main
F00.12 and auxiliary frequency 0.0～300.0 % 100.0 ●
sources
0: synthetic frequency of main
and auxiliary channels
1: AI1 * synthetic frequency of
main and auxiliary channels
2: AI2 * synthetic frequency of
Analog adjustment of
F00.13 main and auxiliary channels 0 〇
synthetic frequency
3: retention
4: retention
5: High frequency pulse
(PULSE) * synthetic frequency
of main and auxiliary channels
Such parameters are mainly used to adjust the gain of each setting source, as shown in
139
Fig. 7-8. Both the main frequency source A and the auxiliary frequency source B have a set
gain. When synthesis is selected via the function code F00.06, a synthetic gain will be generated.
The final setting is limited by the analog adjustment and upper and lower frequency limits.
Synthetic F00.06, etc.
Main frequency source Gain of main frequency
A setting D00.04, etc. source F00.10 Synthetic gain of main and Analog adjustment of Limit
auxiliary frequency sources synthetic frequency
Auxiliary frequency source B Gain of auxiliary (F00.12) (F00.13)
setting F00.05, etc. frequency source F00.11
Fig. 7-8 Frequency Source Setting Control (Gain Description)
The gain type function codes (F00.10 to F00.12) are for “multiplication”, i.e. “set value =
original set value * gain”. Below is only the description of the analog adjustment (F00.13).
F00.13=0: synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
The synthetic frequency is directly set to the synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary
channels.
F00.13=1: AI1 * synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
F00.13=2: AI2 * synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
The synthetic frequency is directly set to “AI (percentage) * synthetic frequency of main
and auxiliary channels”.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage relative to the main and auxiliary synthetic frequency.
F00.13=5: High frequency pulse (PULSE) * synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary
channels
The synthetic frequency is directly set to “HDI (percentage) * synthetic frequency of main
and auxiliary channels”.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage relative to the main and auxiliary synthetic frequency.
Function Default
code setting
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
140
The acceleration time is the time for the output frequency to rise from 0.00Hz to the set
value Fbase of F15.09 (reference frequency of the acceleration and deceleration time); and the
deceleration time is the time for the output frequency to fall from Fbase to 0.00Hz, regardless of
forward and reverse running. See Fig. 7-9.
Output frequency (Hz)
Output frequency (Hz)
Fbase Fbase
Time (s)
Time (s)
t2
t1
(a) Acceleration time 1 (b) Deceleration time 1

Fig. 7-9 Acceleration and Deceleration Time
Note that the acceleration and deceleration time is in 0.01 s, 0.1 s or 1s, depending
on the F15.13.
Function code Default

Function code Parameter description Unit Attribute
name setting
Maximum
F00.16 1.00～600.00 Hz 50.00 〇
frequency
The allowable maximum frequency of the inverter is represented by Fmax. The Fmax
range is from 20.00 to 600.00Hz.
Function Default
code setting
0: set by F00.18
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
Options of upper 4: retention
F00.17 frequency limit 5: high frequency pulse input (X5) 0 〇
control 6: percent setting of upper limit
7: direct setting of upper limit frequency
communication
Upper frequency Lower frequency limit F00.19 to
F00.18 Hz 50.00 ●
limit maximum frequency F00.16
141
Lower frequency
F00.19 0.00 to upper frequency limit F00.18 Hz 0.00 ●
limit
F00.17=0: set by F00.18
The upper frequency limit is set by F00.18.
F00.17=1:AI1
F00.17=2:AI2
The upper frequency limit depends on AI (percentage) * F00.18.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage relative to the set value of F00.18 (upper frequency limit).
The upper frequency limit depends on HDI (percentage) * F00.18.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage relative to F00.18 (maximum frequency).
F00.17=6 or 7: communication setting
The torque depends on the communication and the like.
 If the master-slave communication (F10.05=1) is enabled, and the inverter works as the
slave (F10.06=0), the actual upper frequency limit is “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient) * F00.18
(upper frequency limit)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as
a. F00.17=6, the actual frequency limit is “700AH (communication setting of the upper
frequency limit) * F00.18 (upper frequency limit)”.
b. F00.17=7, the actual frequency limit is “7017H (communication setting of the upper
frequency limit)”.
The 700AH data range is 0.00% to 200.00%, and the 7017H data range is 0.00 to F00.16
(maximum frequency). For details, see Table 12-31.
F00.18 is the highest frequency allowed after the inverter is started. It is represented by Fup,
ranging from Fdown to Fmax;
F00.19 is the lowest frequency allowed after the inverter is started. It is represented by
Fdown, ranging from 0.00Hz to Fup.
142
1. The upper and lower frequency limits should be set carefully according to the nameplate
parameters and operating conditions of the actually controlled motor, and the
motor should be prevented from long-time operation at the low frequency;
otherwise, the motor life may be shortened due to overheat.
2. Relationship of the maximum frequency, upper frequency limit and lower frequency
limit: 0.00Hz≤Fdown≤Fup≤Fmax≤600.00Hz;
3. When the set frequency is lower than F00.19 (lower frequency limit), the running mode
is dependent on F15.33.

name setting
Running 0: consistent direction
F00.20 0 ●
direction 1: opposite direction
The rotation direction of the motor can be changed by modifying this function code instead
of motor wiring. This is equivalent to the change in the rotation direction of the motor by
adjusting any two wires of the motor (U, V, W).
1． After the parameters are initialized, the rotation direction of the motor will return to
its original status.
2． Be careful to conduct the aforesaid operation where it is forbidden to
change the rotation direction of the motor after system debugging.
3． When the inverter is prohibited from reverse running (e.g. F00.21=1), this
function is invalid.

name setting
0: Allow forward/reverse
F00.21 Reverse control running 0 〇
1: Prohibit reversing
Duration of
F00.22 forward and 0.00～650.00 s 0.00 ●
reverse dead zone
F00.21=0: reversing running is allowed.
The rotation direction of the motor is controlled by the setting of the F/R terminal or
F00.20.
F00.21=1: reverse running is prohibited.
The motor can only work in one direction, and the F/R terminal and F00.20 are invalid.
Select the forward/reverse status of the motor.
If F00.22=0.00 is set, forward and reverse running is subject to smooth transition.
If F00.22≠0 is set, when the speed drops to 0.00Hz during forward and reverse switching,
143
the inverter will work at 0.00Hz within the duration of the forward and reverse dead zone
(F00.22) and then in the opposite direction to the set frequency. See Fig. 7-10.
Output
frequenc
y
Time
Duration of Duration of
forward and forward and
reverse dead reverse dead
zone zone
Fig. 7-10 Schematic Diagram of Duration of Forward/Reverse Dead Zone
When reverse running is allowed, the running direction of the inverter depends
on the status of the F/R terminal and the set value of F00.20. If the set forward
running direction of the inverter is inconsistent with the desired rotation direction of
the motor, exchange any two of the output terminal wires (U, V, W) of the inverter, or
set F00.20 to the opposite value.
Function Function Default

code code name setting
1.0-16.0 (rated power of the inverter: less than
4.00kW)
1.0-10.0 (rated power of the inverter:
4.0 (7.5
5.50-7.50kW)
and
Carrier 1.0 - 8.0 (rated power of inverter 11.00 -
F00.23 kHz below) ●
frequency 45.00kW)
/2.0
1.0 - 4.0 (rated power of inverter 55.00 -
90.00kW)
1.0-3.0 (rated power of inverter: 110.00kW and
above)
Increasing the carrier frequency can reduce the motor noise, but will lead to the heat
increase of the inverter. When the carrier frequency is higher than the default value and
increased by 1kHz, the load needs to be derated to some extent. Please set F00.24=1. The actual
carrier frequency of the inverter will be adjusted automatically according to the actual situation.
The recommended relationship between the rated power and carrier frequency of the
inverter is shown in Table 7-4.
144
Table 7-4 Relationship between Rated Power and Carrier Frequency Setting of Inverter
Inverter power 11kW～ 55kW～ 110kW～
Pe≤4kW 5.5kW～7.5kW
Pe 45kW 90kW 560kW
Rated carrier
4.0kHz 2.0kHz
frequency
Maximum
allowable
16.0 kHz 10.0kHz 8.0kHz 4.0kHz 3.0kHz
carrier
frequency

name setting
Automatic 0: Invalid
F00.24 adjustment of 1: valid 1 1 〇
carrier frequency 2: valid 2
F00.24=0: invalid
The carrier frequency is dependent on F00.23, but limited by the allowable maximum
carrier frequency. It will not change during operation.
F00.24=1: valid 1
The carrier frequency is affected by the inverter temperature and load based on the F00.23
setting. If the inverter temperature is too high or the load is too heavy, the carrier frequency will
be limited. When the set carrier frequency F00.23 is greater than the limit, the carrier frequency
of the inverter will be the limit during operation.
F00.24=2: valid 2
The carrier frequency is auto-tuned on the basis of the F00.23 setting.
Function Default
code setting
Noise suppression of 0: Invalid
F00.25 0 〇
carrier frequency 1: valid
Noise suppression
F00.27 10～150 Hz 100 ●
intensity
When the noise suppression function is enabled (F00.25=1), the motor noise can be
suppressed to a certain extent.
Default
Function code Function code name Parameter description Unit Attribute
setting
F00.28 Options of motor 0: parameter group of motor 0 〇
145
parameter group 1
1: parameter group of motor
2
The EM730/EM730E series inverter supports time-sharing control of two motors. The
motor parameters and control parameters can be set separately. The corresponding parameters of
the motor 1 are in the F00 group, F01 group and F06 group, and those of the motor 2 are in the
F14 group.
The valid motor can be selected in conjunction with F00.28 and the input function “Motor
1/Motor 2 switching”, as detailed in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5 Details of Motor Parameter Group Options
F00.28: Motor parameter Related parameter
30: motor 1/motor 2 switching Valid motor
group options group
0: parameter group of Invalid Motor 1 F00/F01/F06
motor 1 Valid Motor 2
F14
1: parameter group of Invalid Motor 2
motor 2 Valid Motor 1 F00/F01/F06

name setting
F00.29 User password 0 - 65535 0 〇
F00.29 is used to set a password to enable the password protection and prevent the function
code parameters of the inverter from modification by unauthorized personnel. If the password is
set to 0, the password function will be invalid. When a non-zero user password is set, all
parameters (except this function code) can only be viewed and are not modifiable.
name setting
Frequency 0：0.01Hz
F00.31 0 〇
resolution 1: 0.1Hz (speed unit: 10rpm)
F00.31=0: The frequency resolution is 0.01Hz, corresponding to the frequency of 50.00Hz.
The maximum frequency in this mode is 600.00Hz.
F00.31=1: The frequency resolution is 0.1Hz, corresponding to the frequency of 50.00Hz.
The maximum frequency in this mode is 3000.0Hz. It is suitable for high-frequency spindle
motors.
146
Default
setting
0: 380V
F00.35 Power supply voltage selection 0 〇
1: 440V
F00.55=0: 380V
The voltage of the applied power supply is 380V.
F00.55=1: 440V
The voltage of the applied power supply is 440V. When the function code is set to 440V,
the corresponding dynamic braking voltage and stall overvoltage will increase accordingly.
7.2 Motor 1 parameter group of F01 group

Function Default
code setting
1: variable-frequency asynchronous
F01.00 Motor type motor 0 〇
2: permanent magnet synchronous
motor
The EM730/EM730E series inverter supports asynchronous and synchronous motors. Please
set this parameter correctly according to the actual situation.

code name setting
Depending
Rated power of on the
F01.01 0.10～650.00 kW 〇
electric motor motor
type
Depending
Rated voltage of on the
F01.02 50～2000 V 〇
motor motor
type
0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ Depending
Rated current of 75 kW) on the
F01.03 A 〇
motor 0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > motor
75 kW) type
Depending
Rated frequency on the
F01.04 0.01～600.00 Hz 〇
of motor motor
type
F01.05 Rated speed 1～60000 rpm Depending 〇
147
on the
motor
type
Depending
Motor winding 0:Y on the
F01.06 〇
connection 1:Δ motor
type
Depending
Rated power on the
F01.07 0.600～1.000 〇
factor of motor motor
type
Depending
on the
F01.08 Motor efficiency 30.0～100.0 % 〇
motor
type
The above function codes are the nameplate parameters of the asynchronous motor. When
the motor is connected to the inverter for the first time, regardless of VF control or vector
control, the above parameters must be correctly set according to the motor nameplate before
operation.
When the rated power (F01.01) of the motor is changed, the values of F01.03 to F01.08 of
the inverter will change automatically. Pay attention to this during operation.

code name setting
Depending
Stator resistance 1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
on the
F01.09 of asynchronous 0.1-6000.0 (rated power of motor: > mΩ 〇
motor
motor 75kW)
type
Depending
Rotor resistance 1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
on the
F01.10 of asynchronous 0.1-6000.0 (rated power of motor: > mΩ 〇
motor
motor 75kW)
type
Leakage 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 Depending
inductance of kW) on the
F01.11 mH 〇
asynchronous 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of motor: > motor
motor 75 kW) type
Mutual 0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 Depending
inductance of kW) on the
F01.12 mH 〇
asynchronous 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: > 75 motor
motor kW) type
148
No-load
0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 Depending
excitation
kW) on the
F01.13 current of A 〇
0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 motor
asynchronous
kW) type
motor
The function codes F01.09 to F01.13 are the parameters of the asynchronous motor. They
are usually unavailable to users. Please get them through motor parameter self-identification
(F01.34).
When the motor parameters (F01.01 to F01.08) are modified, the values of F01.09 to
F01.13 of the inverter will change automatically. Pay attention to this during operation.
Before the motor parameter self-identification, be sure to set F01.00 to F01.08 correctly
according to the actual situation.
The specific meanings of motor parameters are shown in Fig. 7-11:
R1 L1-Lm R2 L2-Lm
I1
I2
U1 (1-s)/s*R2
I0 Lm
Fig. 7-11 Steady-state Equivalent Model of Asynchronous Motor

R1, L1, R2, L2, Lm, and I0 in the figure represent: stator resistance, stator inductance, rotor
resistance, rotor inductance, mutual inductance, no-load excitation current.
Function Default
code setting
Magnetic saturation
F01.14 coefficient 1 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 87.00 〇
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
asynchronous motor
F01.17 Magnetic saturation 10.00 - 100.00 % 72.00 〇
149
coefficient 4 of
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
asynchronous motor
The magnetic saturation coefficient of the asynchronous motor is automatically set during
the motor parameter self-identification. Users do not need to set it under normal circumstances.

code name setting
Stator
1-60000 (rated power of motor: ≤75kW)
resistance of Model
F01.19 0.1 to 6000.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 mΩ 〇
synchronous Confirm
kW)
motor
d-axis 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75
inductance of kW) Model
F01.20 mH 〇
synchronous 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75 Confirm
motor kW)
q-axis 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75
inductance of kW) Model
F01.21 mH 〇
synchronous 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of motor: > 75 Confirm
motor kW)
Counter
electromotive
10.0-2000.0 (counter electromotive force of Model
F01.22 force of V 〇
rated speed) Confirm
synchronous
motor
Initial
electrical angle
F01.23 0.0-359.9 (valid for synchronous motor) 0.0 〇
of synchronous
motor
The function codes F01.19 to F01.23 are the parameters of the synchronous motor. They
are usually unavailable to users. Please get them through motor parameter self-identification
(F01.34).
Before the motor parameter self-identification, be sure to set F01.00 to F01.08 correctly
according to the actual situation. In particular, select the motor type (F01.00=2) correctly.
Function Default
code setting
Motor parameter 0: No operation
F01.34 0 〇
self-learning 1: static self-learning of
150
asynchronous motor
2: rotation self-learning of
asynchronous motor
11: static self-learning of
synchronous motor
12: rotary self-learning of
synchronous motor
F01.34=0: not identified
F01.34=1: the asynchronous motor remains stationary during parameter self-identification.
Prior to the static self-learning of the asynchronous motor, please set the motor type
(F01.00) and motor nameplate parameters (F01.01 to F01.08) correctly. Relevant parameters
(F01.09 to F01.13) of the asynchronous motor can be obtained during static self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor cannot rotate. Static self-learning has poorer
effects than rotary self-learning.
F01.34=2: the asynchronous motor rotates during parameter self-identification.
Prior to the rotary self-learning of the asynchronous motor, please set the motor type
(F01.00) and motor nameplate parameters (F01.01 to F01.08) correctly. Relevant parameters
(F01.09 to F01.18) of the asynchronous motor can be obtained during rotary self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor can rotate. However, loads should be avoided or
minimized; otherwise, self-learning will have poor effects.
F01.34=11: the synchronous motor remains stationary during parameter self-identification.
Prior to the static self-learning of the synchronous motor, please set the motor type (F01.00)
and motor nameplate parameters (F01.01 to F01.05) correctly. Relevant parameters (F01.19 to
F01.21) of the synchronous motor and current loop parameters (F06.12 to F06.15) can be
obtained during static self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor cannot rotate. It is necessary to manually enter
the counter electromotive force (F01.22).
F01.34=12: the synchronous motor rotates during parameter self-identification.
Prior to the rotary self-learning of the synchronous motor, please set the motor type (F01.00)
and motor nameplate parameters (F01.01 to F01.05) correctly. Relevant parameters (F01.19 to
F01.21) of the synchronous motor, current loop parameters (F06.12 to F06.15) and counter
electromotive force (F01.22) can be obtained during rotary self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor can rotate. However, loads should be avoided or
minimized; otherwise, self-learning will have poor effects.
151
1. Motor parameter self-learning is valid only in the keyboard-controlled start/stop
mode (F00.02=0): Set F01.34 to the corresponding value, and press the ENTER key
for confirmation and then the RUN key to start motor parameter
self-learning. After the parameter self-learning, F01.34 of the inverter
will be automatically set to 0;
2. If there is an overcurrent or overvoltage protection during
self-learning, extend the acceleration and deceleration time and try
again.
3. The first group of motor parameters is taken as an example above. For the second
group of motor parameters, refer to the above description.
7.3 Function Parameter Group of Input Terminal of F02 Group

The standard EM730/EM730E series inverter is equipped with five multi-function digital
input terminals (X1 to X5) and two analog input terminals (AI1 and AI2, to be used with the
corresponding function set to digital input, as detailed in the F02.31 description).
Function Default
code setting
Options of X1 digital
F02.00 1 〇
input function
F02.01 2 〇
input function
F02.02 11 〇
input function
See Table 7-6 Function List of
F02.03 Multi-function Digital Input 12 〇
input function
Terminals
F02.04 13 〇
input function
Options of AI1 digital
F02.07 0 〇
input function
Options of AI2 digital
F02.08 0 〇
input function
The terminals X1 to X5, AI1 and AI2 are seven multi-function input terminals. The
functions of the input terminals can be defined by setting the values of the function codes
F02.00 to F02.14.
For example, if you define F02.00=1, the function of the X1 terminal is “RUN”. If the
command source is set to terminal control (F00.02=1) and the X1 terminal input is valid, the
“RUN” function of the inverter will be enabled. Specific options are described in Table 7-6.
If multiple terminals are set to the same function (except for #34 function terminal), the
152
function status is dependent on the “OR logic” of the two terminals. In the case of F02.00=1 and
F02.04=1, once one of the terminals X1 or X5 is valid, the “RUN” function of the inverter will
be enabled.
Table 7-6 Function List of Multi-function Digital Input Terminals
Settings Function Description
Disable the protection terminal or set it to “0: Unavailable” to
0 No function
prevent malfunction.
When the command source is set to terminal control
(F00.02=1), and the function terminal is valid, the inverter will
Running terminal
1 execute the corresponding RUN function according to the set
(RUN)
value of the terminal control mode option (F00.03). (See the
explanation of the function code F00.03 for details.)
(F00.02=1), and the function terminal is valid, the inverter will
Running direction
2 execute the corresponding F/R function according to the set
F/R
value of the terminal control mode option (F00.03). (See the
explanation of the function code F00.03 for details.)
(F00.02=1), the terminal control mode is set to three-line
Stop control of
3 control (F00.03=2/3) and the function terminal is valid, the
three-line operation
inverter will execute the stop command. (See the explanation of
the function code F00.03 for details.)
4 Forward jog (FJOG) (F00.02=1), and the function terminal FJOG is valid, the
inverter will run forward; if the function terminal RJOG is
valid, the inverter will run reversely; and if the two function
terminals are valid at the same time, the inverter will decelerate
5 Reverse jog (RJOG) to stop.
★： When reverse running is prohibited, the reverse jog will be
invalid.
If the function terminal UP is valid, the frequency offset will be
6 Terminal UP increase at the rate defined by F12.11; and if the function
terminal DOWN is valid, the frequency offset will decrease at
the rate defined by F12.11.
7 Terminal DOWN If the UP/DOWN offset clear terminal is valid, the frequency
offset will be cleared to 0.
Final set frequency of the frequency source A = set frequency
of the frequency source A + UP/DOWN offset.
Clear UP/DOWN ★: The UP/DOWN function is valid only when the main
8 frequency source A is involved in setting.
offset
The offset frequency can be viewed via F18.15.
The function of the terminal UP/DOWN is the same as that of
153
the UP/DOWN on the keyboard.
If this function terminal is valid during inverter operation, the
9 Free stop output will be blocked, the inverter will stop in the free status,
and the motor will not be controlled by the inverter.
If the inverter is subject to protection and the faulty point is
10 Reset protection eliminated, you can use this terminal to reset the inverter. This
has the same function as the Reset key on the keyboard.
When the speed control and main frequency source A are
involved in setting, four function input terminals can be defined
Multi-segment as multi-segment speed terminals. The current set frequency of
11 the inverter depends on the code combination of these four
speed terminal 1
terminals and the settings of related function codes. Details are
given in the following table. (0/1: the current function terminal
is invalid/valid.)
★: When a function has no corresponding input terminal
options, it is invalid (0) by default.
Multi-segment
12 14 13 12 11 Set frequency of the inverter
speed terminal 2
Depending on the option (F00.04)
0 0 0 0
of the main frequency source A
0 0 0 1 Multi-segment speed 1 (F08.00)
Multi-segment
13 0 1 0 0 Multi-segment speed 4 (F08.03)
speed terminal 3
Multi-segment 1 0 1 1 Multi-segment speed 11 (F08.10)
14
speed terminal 4 1 1 0 0 Multi-segment speed 12 (F08.11)
The 4-segment PID setting can be performed via these two
Multi-segment PID terminals, as detailed in the following table (0/1: the current
15
terminal 1 function terminal is invalid/valid).
16 15 Multi-segment PID setting
0 0 Depending on the PID setting source
Multi-segment PID (F09.00)
16
terminal 2 0 1 Multi-segment PID setting 1 (F09.32)
1 0 Multi-segment PID setting 2 (F09.33)
154
1 1 Multi-segment PID setting 3 (F09.34)
The 4-segment torque setting can be performed via these two

Multi-segment terminals, as detailed in the following table (0/1: the current
17
torque terminal 1 function terminal is invalid/valid).
18 17 Multi-segment torque setting
0 0 Depending on the torque setting source
option (F13.01)
Multi-segment
18 0 1 Multi-segment torque 1 (F13.03)
torque terminal 2
1 0 Multi-segment torque 2 (F13.04)
1 1 Multi-segment torque 3 (F13.05)
The inverters of this series have four groups of acceleration and
deceleration time in total. You can define two function input
terminals as acceleration and deceleration time terminals. The
Acceleration and
current acceleration/deceleration time of the inverter depends
19 deceleration time
on the code combination of these four terminals and settings of
terminal 1
related function codes. Details are given in the following table.
(0/1: the current function terminal is invalid/valid); or see the
function codes F15.03 to F15.13 for details.
20 19 Acceleration and deceleration time
0 0 The first group (acceleration time: F00.14;
deceleration time: F00.15)
Acceleration and 0 1 The second group (acceleration time: F15.03;
20 deceleration time deceleration time: F15.04)
terminal 2 1 0 The third group (acceleration time: F15.05;
Deceleration time: F15.06)
1 1 The fourth group (acceleration time: F15.07;
Deceleration time: F15.08)
When the acceleration and deceleration prohibition terminal is
Acceleration and valid, the execution of acceleration and deceleration commands
21 deceleration will be prohibited, and the output frequency of the inverter will
prohibition remain unchanged. The inverter in the overcurrent protection
status will run based on the current limit.
The inverter decelerates to stop, but all running parameters will
be kept in the memory, such as PLC and PID parameters. When
22 Operation pause
this terminal is invalid, the inverter will restore the running
status before stop.
Using this terminal, you can input the protection signal of the
External protection external device, to facilitate protection monitoring and
23
input protection of the external device via the inverter. Upon
receiving an external protection signal, the inverter will display
155
“E14” and freely stop running.
Switching of RUN The current command channel depends on the status of these
24 command to two terminals and setting of F00.02. The priority is as follows:
keyboard “24: switching of RUN command to keyboard” > “25:
Switching of RUN switching of RUN command to communication” > “F00.02:
25 command to command source option”. Refer to the F00.02 description for
communication details.
This terminal is mainly used to switch the frequency sources in
Frequency source
26 conjunction with the function code F00.06. When F00.06=3 to
switching
5, this terminal will be valid. Refer to the F00.06 description.
The regular running function is defined by F16.05. This
Clearing of regular terminal can be used to clear the running time (reset the
27
running time remaining time of regular running). Refer to the F16.05
description.
Speed These two terminals are used to change the current inverter
28 control/torque control mode in conjunction with F13:00 When #28 terminal is
control switching valid, speed control and torque control can be switched; and
Torque control when #29 terminal is valid, only speed control is enabled. See
29
prohibition the F13.00 description.
This terminal is used to determine the current valid motor in
Motor 1/Motor 2 conjunction with F00.28. If #30 terminal is valid, the motors
30
switching will be switched based on the F00.28 setting. See the F00.28
description.
Resetting of simple
PLC status (running When this terminal is valid, the simple PLC module will restart
from the first running from the first segment. To further understand this
31
segment, with the function, you can view the simple PLC description of the F08
running time group.
cleared)
When this terminal is valid, the simple PLC module will keep
simple PLC time
running at the current segment. When this terminal is invalid,
32 pause (keep running
the simple PLC module will continue to run after running at the
at current segment)
current segment.
33 Reserved
It is a pulse input terminal that has the counting function. The
counter input input pulse frequency is limited to 250Hz or below, and only
34
(≤250Hz) one terminal can be set with this function. See the description
of the function codes F16.03 to F16.04.
It is a pulse input terminal that has the counting function. The
High-speed count
input pulse frequency is limited to 100kHz or below. This is
35 input (≤100kHz,
valid only for the terminal X5 (that is, only F02.06=35 can be
only valid for X5)
set). See the description of the function codes F16.03 to F16.04.
36 Count clearing This terminal is used to clear the counter that has a counting
156
function.
This is the pulse input terminal that has a length counting
Length counter function, the input pulse frequency is limited to 250Hz or
37
input (≤250Hz) below, and only one terminal can be set with this function. See
the description of the function codes F16.01 to F16.02.
This is the pulse input terminal that has a length counting
High-speed length
function, and the input pulse frequency is limited to 100kHz or
count input
38 below. It is invalid only for the terminal X5 (that is, only
(≤100kHz, only
F02.06=38 can be set). See the description of the function
valid for X5)
codes F16.01 to F16.02.
39 Length clearing This length clearing terminal has a length counting function.
This is a pulse signal input terminal, and the input pulse
frequency is limited to 100kHz or below. It is valid only for the
Pulse input (≤ 100 terminal X5.
40 kHz, only valid for ★： This is used only to set the equivalent AI percentage
X5) instead of other special functions (e.g. counting). When
F00.04=5, you need to set F02.06=40 and the set frequency
pulse needs to be inputted from the terminal X5.
When this terminal is valid, PID adjustment will be stopped,
and the output of the process PID module will remain
41 Process PID pause
unchanged. For more information, refer to the description of
the function code F09.18.
When this terminal is valid, the PID integral adjustment will be
Process PID integral suspended, but the proportional and differential adjustment of
42
pause the PID will be still valid. This function is known as integral
separation. See the F09.20 description.
If the digital input terminal (F09.11=1) for PID parameter
PID parameter
43 switching is valid, PID parameters will be switched. See the
switching
description of the function codes F09.05 to F09.13.
PID When this terminal is valid, the PID positive/negative modes
44 positive/negative will be switched. See the description of the function code
switching F09.04.
When a stop command is triggered and the frequency reaches
the starting frequency (F04.20) for direct braking during stop,
Stop and DC
45 braking will be enabled. The braking time is subject to the
braking
longer of the terminal closing time and stop/DC braking time
(F04.22).
The stop command is not triggered. When there is a stop
command, and the frequency reaches the starting frequency
46 DC braking at stop (F04.20) for direct braking during stop, braking will be
enabled. The braking time is subject to the longer of the
terminal closing time and stop/DC braking time (F04.22).
47 Immediate DC The inverter will immediately stop running and be subject to
157
braking DC braking at the current frequency. The braking current is
dependent on the DC braking current (F04.21) in stop.
Fastest deceleration The inverter will stop running within the minimum allowable
48
to stop acceleration and deceleration time.
49 Reserved
When this terminal is valid, the inverter will stop running
50 External stop according to the set stop mode (F04.19) and
acceleration/deceleration time 4 (F15.07/F15.08).
Switching of main
frequency source to
51
digital frequency
setting
Switching of main
52 frequency source to
AI1 When the main frequency source A is involved in setting, the
Switching of main multi-segment speed model is not enabled and this terminal is
53 frequency source to valid, the main frequency source will be switched to the
AI2 corresponding setting. The functions 51 to 56 can work
Switching of main independently, but subject to the priority. See the description of
frequency source to the function code F00.04Table 7-3.
55
high-frequency
pulse input
Switching of main
frequency source to
56
communication
setting
When the inverter meets the operating conditions and the
current function terminal is valid, the inverter is able to run.
Otherwise, it will not run even if other operating conditions are
met.
57 Inverter enabling ★: Inverter enabling function: If no terminal is selected, this
function is valid by default; if one terminal is selected, the
status of the selected terminal will prevail; and if more than one
terminal is selected and any selected terminal is invalid, this
function will not be valid.
58 - 67 Reserved
It is only applicable to the straight wire drawing machines in
winding applications.
1: When the function of 69# input terminal is available and/or
Prohibition of
68 F00.21=1, 68# input terminal is available, and reversing
reversing disabling
disabling is prohibited, that is, reversing is allowed; otherwise,
reversing disabling is not prohibited, that is, reversing is not
allowed.
158
2: When the function of 69# input terminal is available and/or
F00.21=1, 68# input terminal is available, and reversing is
disabled, that is, reversion is not allowed; otherwise, reversing
disabling is not disabled, that is, reversing is allowed.
Prohibition of When this terminal is valid, its function is the same as that in
69
reversing the case of F00.21=1.
70 - 78 Reserved
This is a dedicated function for winding applications, which is
used for external input of material cutoff detection. When
External material
121 material cutoff detection is an external signal and the terminal
cutoff signal
is closed (consistent with restrictions), E43 protection will be
reported.
This is a dedicated function for winding applications, which is
Wiring detection
122 used for wiring detection. When the valid or invalid time of the
signal
wiring detection signal expires, E44 protection will be reported.
This is a dedicated function for winding applications. When the
123 Brake reset terminal brake output is valid, this terminal can be closed to reset the
brake output.

code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Positive/ * * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
negative logic 0: positive logic is valid in the closed
F02.15 00000 〇
1 of digital state/invalid in the open state
input terminal 1: negative logic is valid in the closed
state/invalid in the open state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Positive/ * * * * * * AI2 AI1
negative logic 0: positive logic is valid in the closed
F02.16 00 〇
2 of digital state/invalid in the open state
input terminal 1: negative logic is valid in the closed
159
Xi input Close Off
Positive logic
sampling Valid Invalid
Negative logic
sampling Invalid Valid
Fig. 7-12 Schematic Diagram of Positive/Negative Logic Sampling of Terminal

When the bit is set to 0, the multi-function input terminal is valid in the closed status and
invalid in the open status;
When the bit is set to 1, the multi-function input terminal is valid in the open status and
invalid in the closed status.
These function code are subject to bit operation. You only need to set the corresponding bit
to 0 or 1. Take F02.15 as an example, as shown in the following table:
Table 7-7 Function Code Details of Bit Operation
Setting item * * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
Corresponding bit * * * 4 3 2 1 0
Settings * * * 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
The seventh bit is reserved and cannot be set. The specific displayed value does not mean
anything.
For example: To set the terminal X1 to reverse logic, you only need to set the 0 th bit
corresponding to X1 to 1, i.e. F02.15=xxx xxxx1.
To set the terminals X1 and X5 to reverse logic, you only need to set the 0 th bit
corresponding to X1 and 4th bit corresponding to X5 to 1. That is, 02.15=xxx 1xxx1.
★ This function is for logic matching with other external devices.
Default
setting
Filtering times of digital 0-100; 0: no filtering; n:
F02.17 2 〇
input terminal sampling once in n ms
160
Sampling clock
1ms
Xi input
Note: It is
Interference: assumed that
greater than the number of
Anti-interference Interference: less the number anti-shake
processing than the number of of anti-shake waves is “2” by
anti-shake waves waves default.
Fig. 7-13 Schematic Diagram of Terminal Filter Sampling

Since the multi-function input terminal is triggered by level or pulse, digital filtering is
needed when the terminal status is read, in order to avoid interference.
★ The parameters of this code do not need to be adjusted under normal circumstances.
Where adjustment is required, pay attention to the relationship between the filtering
time and terminal action duration, to avoid the susceptibility to interference due to
insufficient filtering times or slow responses and command losses arising from
excessive filtering times.
Default
setting
161
Xi input
Delay processing
Valid delay Invalid delay
Fig. 7-14 Schematic Diagram of Terminal Delay Sampling

In the event of changes in the status of the function terminal, a response will be made with
delay according to the function code settings. Currently only the terminals X1 to X4 support this
function. Specifically, it is embodied in: This function will take effect when the function
terminal changes from the invalid to valid status and is maintained with the valid delay, and not
take effect when the function terminal changes from the valid to invalid status and is maintained
with the invalid delay.
★ If the function code is set to 0.000s, the corresponding delay will be invalid.

code name setting
Ones place: AI1
0: analog input
Options of 1: digital input (0 below 1V, 1 above
F02.31 analog input 3V, the same as last time under 1-3V) 00D 〇
function Tens place: AI2
0: analog input
1: digital input (the same as above)
The analog input terminals AI1 and AI2 of the EM730/EM730E series inverter can be used
as digital input terminals. You only need to set the corresponding bit to 1. To use the AI2
terminal as a digital terminal, you only need to set F02.31=xx1x. The analog input and digital
logic conversion are as follows:
 When the input voltage of the terminal is less than 1V, its corresponding logic status
will be invalid;
 When the input voltage of the terminal is greater than 3V, its corresponding logic
status will be valid;
162
 When the input voltage of the terminal is within [1V, 3V], its corresponding logic
status will remain unchanged.
Logic
1
0
0V 1V 3V Voltage
Fig. 7-10 Correspondence between Analog Input Terminal Voltage and Current Logic Status
If it is used as an analog input terminal, the filter time and corresponding offset curve can
be set via F02.32 to F02.60. The terminals AI1 to AI2 can be set separately.
Function Default
code setting
Ones place: Options of
AI1 curve
0: curve 1
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
3: curve 4
F02.32 Options of analog input curve 10D 〇
Tens place: AI2 curve
selection
0: curve 1
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
3: curve 4
F02.33 Minimum input of curve 1 0.00 - F02.35 V 0.10 ●
Minimum input setting of
F02.34 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 1
Maximum input setting of
F02.36 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
curve 1
F02.37 Minimum input of curve 2 -10.00 - F02.39 V 0.10 ●
F02.38 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 2
F02.40 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
curve 2
F02.41 Minimum input of curve 3 0.00V - F02.43 V 0.10 ●
163
F02.42 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 3
Input of inflection point 1 of
F02.43 F02.41 - F02.45 V 2.50 ●
curve 3
Input setting of inflection point
F02.44 –100.0 - +100.0 % 25.0 ●
1 of curve 3
F02.45 F02.43 - F02.47 V 7.50 ●
curve 3
F02.46 –100.0 - +100.0 % 75.0 ●
2 of curve 3
F02.48 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
curve 3
F02.49 Minimum input of curve 4 -10.00 - F02.51 V 0.10 ●
F02.50 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 4
F02.51 F02.49 - F02.53 V 2.50 ●
curve 4
F02.52 –100.0 - +100.0 % 25 ●
1 of curve 4
F02.53 F02.51 - F02.55 V 7.50 ●
curve 4
F02.54 –100.0 - +100.0 % 75 ●
2 of curve 4
F02.56 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100 ●
curve 4
F02.32 is used to select the corresponding offset curve for each analog input terminal. In
total, four groups of offset curves are available. Among them, the curves 1 and 2 indicate
two-point offsets, while the curves 3 and 4 indicate four-point offsets. After selecting an offset
curve, you can set the corresponding function code to meet the input requirements.
The filtering time can be adjusted according to the analog input and actual working
conditions. The actual effect will prevail.
Function Default
code setting
F02.61 AD sampling hysteresis 2 - 50 2 〇
This function code can be increased properly in the case of analog input hysteresis, long
164
input lines or excessive on-site interference resulting in significant input fluctuations. In

principle, this function code should be minimized.
Function Default
code setting
0: 0~10V
Selection of analog input
F02.62 3: -10~10V 0 〇
AI1 type
4: 0~5V
0: 0~10V
Selection of analog input 1: 4~20mA
F02.63 0 〇
AI2 type 2: 0~20mA
4: 0~5V
Select the input type of AI1 and AI2: current or voltage type. Determine the upper and
lower limits corresponding to the range.
F02.62 =0: 0~10V
AI1 is the voltage type, with a range of 0-10V. The input voltage (0-10V) corresponds to
the setting 0%-100%. 0V corresponds to 0%, and +10V corresponds to 100%.
F02.62 =3: -10~10V
AI1 is the voltage type, with a range of -10-10V. The input voltage (-10 to 10V)
corresponds to the setting -100% to 100%. -10V corresponds to -100%, and +10V corresponds
to 100%.
F02.62 =4: 0~5V
AI1 is the voltage type, with a range of 0-5V. The input voltage (0-5V) corresponds to the
setting 0%-100%. 0V corresponds to 0%, and +5V corresponds to 100%.
F02.63 =0: 0~10V
AI2 is the voltage type, with a range of 0-10V. The input voltage (0-10V) corresponds to
the setting 0%-100%. 0V corresponds to 0%, and +10V corresponds to 100%.
F02.63=1: 4-20mA (adjust the short circuit cap of the control panel to the current
mode)
AI2 is the current type, with a range of 4-20mA. The input current (4-20mA) corresponds
to the setting 0%-100%. The current of 4mA or less corresponds to 0%, and 20mA corresponds
to 100%.
F02.63=2: 0-20mA (adjust the short circuit cap of the control panel to the current
165
mode)
AI2 is the current type, with a range of 0-20mA. The input current (0-20mA) corresponds
to the setting 0%-100%. 0mA corresponds to 0%, and 20mA corresponds to 100%.
F02.63 =4: 0~5V
AI2 is the voltage type, with a range of 0-5V. The input voltage (0-5V) corresponds to the
setting 0%-100%. 0V corresponds to 0%, and +5V corresponds to 100%.
Function Default
code setting
Selection of AI2 current 0: 500Ω
F02.66 0 〇
input impedance 1: 250Ω
Select the AI2 current input impedance according to the actual situation on the site. The
default input impedance is 500 ohms. In case of no 20mA output due to the poor load capacity
of the input current source, the input impedance can be changed to 250 ohms.
7.4 Function Parameter Group of Output Terminal of F03 Group

The standard EM730/EM730E series inverter is equipped with one multi-function digital
output terminal (Y1) and one relay output terminal (R1).
Function Default
code setting
Options of Y1 output
F03.00 SeeTable 7-8 Function 1 ○
function
List of Multi-function
Options of R1 output
F03.02 Digital Output Terminals 7 ○
function
Y1 and R1 are two multi-function digital output terminals. Their functions can be defined
separately by setting the function codes F03.00 to F03.02.
For example, if you define F03.02=7, the function of the R1 terminal is “inverter
protection”. When the inverter is in the protection status, the output of the function terminal R1
will be valid; and when the inverter is in the normal status, the output of the function terminal
R1 will be invalid. Specific options are described in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Function List of Multi-function Digital Output Terminals
The protection terminal will be disabled or set to “0:
0 No output
Unavailable” to prevent incorrect output.
Inverter running The inverter is in the status of slave running, slave stop, jog
1
(RUN) running or jog stop. The current output is valid in the
166
aforesaid statuses and invalid in other statuses.
When the |output frequency-set frequency| is less than or
equal to the frequency detection width (F15.20) in the
running status, the current output will be valid. When the
Up to output
2 inverter is not in the running status, or the |output
frequency (FAR)
frequency-set frequency| is beyond the frequency detection
width (F15.20), the current output will be invalid. See the
When the |output frequency| is greater than the result of
output frequency detection FDT1 (F15.21) in the running
status, the current output will be valid. When the inverter is
not in the running status, or the |output frequency| is less
Output frequency
3 than or equal to the result of output frequency detection
detection FDT1
FDT1 (F15.21) minus FDT1 hysteresis (F15.22), the
current output will be invalid. In other statuses, the current
output will remain unchanged. See the description of the
function codes F15.21 and F15.22.
When the |output frequency| is greater than the result of
output frequency detection FDT2 (F15.23) in the running
status, the current output will be valid. When the inverter is
not in the running status, or the |output frequency| is less
Output frequency
4 than or equal to the result of output frequency detection
detection FDT2
FDT2 (F15.23) minus FDT2 hysteresis (F15.24), the
current output will be invalid. In other statuses, the current
output will remain unchanged. See the description of the
function codes F15.23 and F15.24.
When the running direction and acceleration/deceleration
of the inverter is in the status of reverse acceleration,
Reverse running
5 reverse deceleration or reverse constant speed, the current
(REV)
output will be valid. In other statuses, the current output
will be invalid.
When the inverter is in the status of JOG running or JOG
6 Jog stop, the current output will be valid.
In other statuses, the current output will be invalid.
The current output will be valid when the inverter is in the
7 Inverter protection protection status and invalid when the inverter is in other
statuses.
Inverter ready to run When the inverter has been powered on and completely
8
(READY) initialized without any abnormality, the current output will
167
be valid. When the inverter is not suitable for running, the
current output will be invalid.
When the inverter is in the JOG or slave running status, the
output frequency (F18.00) is greater than or equal to the
Reach the upper upper frequency limit (F00.17||F00.18), and the set
9
frequency limit frequency (F18.01) is greater than or equal to the upper
frequency limit (F00.17||F00.18), the current output will be
valid. Otherwise, the current output will be invalid.
When the inverter is in the JOG or slave running status, the
output frequency (F18.00) is less than or equal to the lower
Reach the lower frequency limit (F00.19), and the set frequency (F18.01) is
10
frequency limit less than or equal to the lower frequency limit (F00.19), the
current output will be valid. Otherwise, the current output
will be invalid.
When the output current (F18.06) is greater than or equal to
the current limit (F07.12), the current output will be valid;
when the output current (F18.06) is less than or equal to the
11 Valid current limit
current limit (F07.12) -5.0%, the current output will be
invalid; and when the output current is an intermediate
value, the current output will remain unchanged.
When the output voltage (F18.07) is greater than or equal
to the voltage of overvoltage stall control (F07.07), the
current output will be valid; when the output voltage
Valid overvoltage
12 (F18.07) is less than or equal to the voltage of overvoltage
stall
stall control (F07.07) minus 10V, the current output will be
invalid; and when the output voltage is an intermediate
value, the current output will remain unchanged.
When the simple PLC is in the mode of stop after a single
operation (F18.15=0), it will be stopped after one operation
and the current output will be valid; when the simple PLC
Complete simple is in the mode of stop after a limited number of operations
13
PLC cycle (F18.15=1), it will be stopped after the operations set by
F08.16, and the current output will be valid; otherwise (e.g.
further running, simple PLC status resetting), the current
output will be invalid.
When the input pulse count value (F18.34) is greater than
Reach the set count or equal to the set count value (F16.03), the current output
14
value will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid. See the
description of function codes F16.03 to F16.04.
168
When the input pulse count value (F18.34) is greater than
Reach the specified or equal to the specified count value (F16.04), the current
15
count value output will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid.
See the description of function codes F16.03 to F16.04.
When the input pulse conversion length (F18.34) is greater
Reach the length (in than or equal to the set length (F16.01), the current output
16
meters) will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid. See the
description of the function codes F16.01 to F16.02.
When the current motor current is greater than or equal to
Motor overload
17 the motor pre-alarm coefficient (F07.02), the current output
pre-alarm
will be valid; otherwise, the current output will be invalid.
When the inverter temperature is greater than or equal to
the hot spot (-10 ℃), the pre-alarm output will be valid;
Inverter overheat
18 and when the inverter temperature is less than the hot spot
pre-alarm
minus 15 ℃, the pre-alarm output will be invalid (5 ℃
hysteresis).
If the PID feedback (F18.17) is greater than or equal to the
Reach the upper
upper limit (F09.16) of PID output during operation, the
19 limit of PID
current output will be valid; otherwise, the output will be
feedback
invalid.
If the PID feedback (F18.17) is less than or equal to the
Reach the lower
lower limit (F09.17) of PID output during operation, the
20 limit of PID
current output will be valid; otherwise, the output will be
feedback
invalid.
Analog level When the selected analog channel input is greater than or
21
detection ADT1 equal to the result of analog level detection (F15.26/28), the
corresponding output will be valid; when the selected
analog channel input is less than or equal to the result of
Analog level analog level detection (F15.26/28) minus hysteresis
22
detection ADT2 (F15.27/29), the corresponding output will be invalid; and
in other statuses, the current output will remain unchanged.
See the description of the function codes F15.25 to F15.29.
When the DC bus voltage (F18.08) is less than or equal to
the voltage of undervoltage stall control (F07.08), the
current output will be valid; when the DC bus voltage
24 Undervoltage status (F18.08) is greater than or equal to the voltage of power
failure end judgment (F07.09), and the holding time is
greater than or equal to the determined delay time of power
failure end (F07.10), the current output will be invalid.
169
When it reaches the regular running time, the current output
26 Up to the set time will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid. See the
When the inverter is in the JOG or slave running status and
Running at zero the output frequency (F18.00) is less than or equal to the
27
speed zero servo start frequency (F04.29), the current output will
be valid; otherwise, the current output will be invalid.
28 - 37 Reserved
38 Off-load The inverter is in the off-load status.
39 - 46 Reserved
When this function is selected for the output terminal, the
output of Y1 and R1 will be controlled by the
47 PLC output corresponding bit of F03.31. If the corresponding bit is 1,
the output will be valid; and if the corresponding bit is 0,
the output will be invalid.
48～66 Reserved
This is a dedicated function for winding applications. When
67 Brake control the brake is enabled, the output of this function will be
valid.
This is a dedicated function for winding applications. In
Material cutoff
68 case of material cutoff, the output of this function will be
detection output
valid.
FDT1 lower limit This is similar to #3/4 function. The difference is that the
69 output will be valid when the frequency is lower than the
(pulse)
“setting-hysteresis” and automatically turn invalid after
FDT2 lower limit some time. If the single pulse output is set, the time will be
70 set by F03.17 to F03.20; and if the level output is enabled,
(pulse)
the time is 0.1 s by default.
FDT1 lower limit
71 (pulse, invalid in
JOG) This function is the same as #69/70 function, except for no
FDT2 lower limit output in the JOG status.
72 (pulse, invalid in
JOG)
When this function of the output terminal is enabled, the
current exceeds the F15.66 overcurrent detection level, and
73 Output overcurrent
the duration reaches the value of F15.67, the output will be
valid.
The Y1 multi-function output ports are of open collector output type, with YCM as the
common output port. If the selected function is disabled, the electronic switch will be OFF, and
170
the multi-function output ports will be in the invalid status. If the selected function is enabled,
the electronic switch will be ON, and the multi-function output ports will be in the valid status.
The open collector can be powered on internally or by an external power supply (12-30V).
The relay output is from the internal

relay of the inverter. The relay has one set of EA
normally open contacts and one set of EB
normally closed contacts. When the selected Relay E coil
EC
function is disabled, the EB-EC is normally
closed and EA-EC is normally open. When
the selected function is enabled, the internal
relay coil will be powered on, the EB-EC
Fig. 7-12 Relay Contacts
will be disconnected, and the EA-EC will be
engaged. See Fig. 7-12.
code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Options of
* * * * * R1 * Y1
F03.05 output signal 0*0 〇
0: level
type
1: single pulse
Function i output Valid Invalid
Level output Valid Invalid
Single pulse
output Valid Invalid
Pulse output width
Fig. 7-13 Schematic Diagram of Level and Single Pulse Output of Digital Output Terminal
171
The digital output terminal Y1 and relay output terminal R1 have two output types: level
and single pulse, as shown in Fig. 7-. For the level output, the output status of the function
terminal is consistent with the function status; and for the single pulse output, the active level of
a certain pulse width will not be outputted until the function is enabled.
This function code is subject to bit operation. For specific settings, refer to the description
of the function code F02.15. Table 7-7

code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
* * * * * R1 * Y1
Positive/
0: positive logic is valid in the closed
F03.06 negative logic 0*0 〇
of digital output
1: negative logic is valid in the closed
Pre-output
Valid Invalid
Positive logic
output Active level Inactive level
Negative logic
output Inactive level Active level
Fig. 7-14 Schematic Diagram of Positive and Negative Logic Output of Digital Output Terminal
The multi-function digital output terminal has two output logics according to the design:
0: Positive logic. When the function is enabled, the multi-function output terminal will
output the active level; otherwise, the multi-function output terminal will output the inactive
level.
1: Negative logic. When the function is enabled, the multi-function output terminal will
output the inactive level; otherwise, the multi-function output terminal will output the active
level.
★ This function is for logic matching with other external devices.
Active level: Y1, low level by default; R1, high level by default.
172

code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FDT FDT
Output status * * * REV FAR RUN
F03.08 2 1 00000 〇
control in jog
0: valid in jogging
1: invalid in jogging
It is usually not necessary for DO to output certain statuses during jog running. The
corresponding output can be shielded by setting the corresponding bit of this function code to 1.
If F03.08=xxx1x is set and the FAR output is valid, the actually selected output terminal will not
output the active level.
Function Default
code setting
F03.09 Y1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.10 Y1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.13 R1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.14 R1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
173
Function i
Valid Invalid
output
Level output Valid Invalid
Valid delay Invalid delay
Single pulse output Valid Invalid
Pulse output width

Fig. 7-15 Schematic Diagram of Level and Single Pulse Output of Digital Output Terminal
When the status of the selected function changes, the corresponding output terminal will
make a response with delay based on the function code settings. At present, the terminals Y1 and
R1 support this function. Details under default conditions: When the function changes from the
invalid to valid status and is maintained with the valid delay, the corresponding output terminal
will output the active level. When the function changes from the valid to invalid status and is
maintained with the invalid delay, the corresponding output terminal will output the inactive
level.
★ If the function code is set to 0.000s, the delay will be invalid.
Function Default
code setting
Single pulse time of
F03.17 0.001 - 30.000 s 0.250 ●
Y1 output
Single pulse time of
F03.19 0.001 - 30.000 s 0.250 ●
R1 output
When one function output terminal is in the single pulse output mode (see F03.05 for
details), the pulse width of the active level can be controlled by setting the single pulse output
time, in order to meet different process or control requirements. Details are given in Fig. 7- and
174
Fig. 7-.
Function Default
code setting
F03.21 Options of analog SeeTable 7-9 Function List of
output M1 Multi-function Analog Output 0 〇
Terminal
M1 is a multi-function analog output terminal. Its functions can be defined separately by

setting the value of the function code F03.21.
For example, if F03.21=0 is defined, the function of the M1 terminal is to output the
“operating frequency (absolute value)”. The current |operating frequency| is reflected by the
output voltage. If the operating frequency increases from 0.00Hz to 50.00Hz (assuming
F00.16=50.00), the voltage of the M1 output port will increase from 0.00V to 10.00V under the
default conditions, showing the same change trend. Specific options are described in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9 Function List of Multi-function Analog Output Terminal

Operating frequency 0.00Hz to Fmax, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
0
(absolute value) 100.0%
Set frequency 0.00Hz to Fmax, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
1
Output torque 0.0% to 200.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
2
Set torque (absolute 0.0% to 200.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
3
value) 100.0%
4 Output current 0.0A to 2*Ie, corresponding to the output 0.0% to 100.0%
0.0V to 1.5*Ue, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
5 Output voltage
100.0%
0V to about 2.63*Ue, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
100.0%
(That is, for the 220V driver, 579V corresponds to the
6 Bus voltage output 100.0%; and for the 380V driver, 1000V
corresponds to the output 100.0%. Drivers at different
voltage levels have the same output voltage at their rated
voltages.)
175
0.00kW to 2*Pe, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
7 Output power
100.0%
8 AI1 Output the actual input voltage, instead of the offset
result.
9 AI2 0.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
100.0%
High-frequency
pulse input (with The function codes F02.26-F02.28 correspond to the
12
100% corresponding output 0.0%-100.0%.
to 100.00kHz)
Communication Communication setting by M1 terminal, communication
13
setting 1 address option 701AH
14 Count value 0 to F16.03, corresponding to the output F16.10 to F16.11
15 Length value 0 to F16.01, corresponding to the output F16.10 to F16.11
PID output -100.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
16
percentage 100.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
18 PID feedback
100.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
19 PID setting
100.0%
★ Fmax, maximum frequency (F00.16)
Ie, rated current of the inverter (F12.21)
Ue, rated voltage of the inverter (F12.20)
Pe, rated power of the inverter (F12.19)
The output physical quantity of the analog output terminal can be switched between the
voltage signal (0.00V to 10.00V) and current signal (0.00mA to 20.00mA) via the jumper cap
For the voltage signal output, the value from 0.0% to 100.0% corresponds to the output 0.00V to
10.00V. For the current signal output, the value from 0.0% to 100.0% corresponds to the output
0.00mA to 20.00mA.

code name setting
F03.27 M1 output bias -100.0 - 100.0 % 0.0 ●
F03.28 M1 output gain -10.00 - 10.00 1.00 ●
The above function codes are usually used to correct the zero drift of analog output and the
deviation of output amplitude. They can also be used to customize the required AO output curve
to meet the requirements of different instruments or others. If the offset is represented by “b”,
176
the gain by “k”, actual output by “Y” and standard output by “X”, the actual output is: Y=kX＋
b.
1. In order to meet the needs of different instruments or external devices, the
full-scale voltage of M1 is actually 10.9V and the full-scale current is
actually 22mA.
2. The default setting of M1 is 0.00-10.00V.
3. Where there are high precision requirements for the analog output during operation,
test the no-load outputs of the terminals M1 with a multimeter first.
Function Default
code setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Control logic options
* * * * * R1 * Y1
F03.31 of PLC output 0*0 ●
terminal 0: no output
1: Output
When the output functions of Y1 and R1 are set to “47: PLC output”, the output result will
be controlled by the corresponding bit of F03.31. 0 indicates no output and 1 indicates that there
is output.
Function Default
code setting
0: 0~10V
Output type options of
F03.34 1: 4~20mA 0 〇
analog output M1
2: 0~20mA
The output type of M1 is controlled by F03.34, and the corresponding short-circuit cap of
the control panel M1 needs to be set correctly according to the output voltage or current:
F03.34=0: output voltage 0-10V
F03.34=1: output current 4-20mA
F03.34=2: output current 0-20mA
7.5 Start/Stop Control Parameter Group of F04 Group

code name setting
0: direct start
F04.00 Start-up method 0 〇
F04.00=0: direct start
177
The inverter is started at the starting frequency, following the DC braking (not suitable
when F04.04=0) and pre-excitation (not suitable when F04.07=0). The starting frequency will
change to the set frequency after the holding time.
F04.00=1: start with speed tracking
The inverter is smoothly started from the current rotation frequency of the motor,
following the speed tracking (size and direction).
Function Default
code setting
F04.01 Start frequency 0.00 - 10.00 Hz 0.00 〇
Start frequency hold
F04.02 0.00-60.00, 0.00 is invalid s 0.00 〇
time
In order to ensure the motor torque during the start, please set the appropriate starting
frequency. To fully establish the magnetic flux during the motor start, the starting frequency
should be maintained for some time. The starting frequency F04.01 is not limited by the lower
frequency limit.
Function Default
code setting
Starting current of DC 0.0～100.0 (100.0 = Rated
F04.03 % 100.0 〇
braking current of motor)
Starting time of DC
F04.04 0.00 - 30.00 s 0.00 〇
braking
Before the inverter is started, the motor may be in the status of low-speed running or
reverse rotation. If the inverter is started immediately, it may be subject to overcurrent
protection. In order to avoid such protections, it is necessary to perform DC braking to stop the
motor and then make the motor run in the set direction to the set frequency before the inverter is
started.
When F04.03 is set to different values, DC braking torques can be enabled.
F04.04 is used to set the time to enable DC braking. The inverter will start running once the
set time is up. If F04.04=0.00, DC braking is invalid during start.
★ DC braking is started as shown in Fig. 7-.
178
When multiple motors are driven by a single inverter, this function can be applied.

code name setting
Pre-excitation 50.0-500.0 (100.0 = no-load
F04.06 % 100.0 〇
current current)
F04.07 Pre-excitation time 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.10 〇
The inverter will start running after the magnetic field is established according to the set
pre-excitation current F04.06 and the set pre-excitation time F04.07 is up. If the pre-excitation
time is set to 0, the inverter will be started directly without pre-excitation.
The pre-excitation current F04.06 is the percentage relative to the rated no-load current of
the motor.
Function Default
code setting
Ones place: Tracking start
frequency
0: maximum frequency
1: stop frequency
2: power frequency
Tens place: Selection of
F04.08 Speed tracking mode search direction 0 〇
0: search only in command
direction
1: Search in the opposite
direction if the speed
cannot be found in the
command direction
When the speed tracking start mode (F04.00=1) is selected, the inverter will be subject to
speed tracking according to the setting of F04.08 during the start. For quicker tracking to the
current operating frequency of the motor, please select the appropriate mode based on the
working conditions.
If the units place of F04.08 is 0, tracking will be performed from the maximum frequency.
This can be applied when the operating conditions of the motor are completely uncertain (for
example, the motor is already rotating when the inverter is powered on).
If the units place of F04.08 is 1, tracking will be performed from the stop frequency. This
mode is usually applied.
179
If the units place of F04.08 is 2, tracking will be performed from the power frequency. This
mode can be applied during switching from the power frequency.
If the tens place of F04.08 is 0, search will be performed only in the command direction
after speed tracking is enabled. In case that the corresponding speed is not found, the inverter
will start running from the zero speed.
If the tens place of F04.08 is 1, search will be performed first in the command direction
after speed tracking is enabled and then in the opposite direction if no speed is found.
Function Default
code setting
Deceleration time of
F04.10 0.1 - 20.0 s 2.0 〇
speed tracking
30.0-150.0 (100.0 = rated
F04.11 Speed tracking current % 50.0 〇
current of inverter)
Speed tracking
F04.12 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 〇
compensation gain
F04.10: scanning speed for speed tracking from the predetermined frequency. The duration
is the time for the rated frequency to decrease to 0.00Hz.
F04.11: current tracking, ratio to the rated current of the inverter. The lower the current, the
less the impact on the motor is, and the higher the tracking accuracy is. If the set value is too
small, the tracking result may be inaccurate, causing failure in start. The higher the current, the
less the motor speed drops. This value should be increased during heavy-load tracking.
F04.12: tracking intensity, usually taking the default value. When the tracking speed is high
and the overvoltage protection is enabled, you can try to increase this value.

code name setting
0: linear acceleration and deceleration
Acceleration
1: acceleration and deceleration of
and
F04.14 continuous S curve 0 〇
deceleration
2: acceleration and deceleration of
mode
intermittent S curve
0.00 to system acceleration time/2
Starting time (F15.13=0)
F04.15 of S curve in 0.0 to system acceleration time/2 s 1.00 ●
acceleration (F15.13=1)
0 to system acceleration time/2
180
(F15.13=2)
(F15.13=0)
Ending time of
F04.16 S curve in s 1.00 ●
(F15.13=1)
acceleration
0 to system acceleration time/2
(F15.13=2)
0.00 to system deceleration time/2
(F15.13=0)
Starting time
F04.17 of S curve in s 1.00 ●
(F15.13=1)
deceleration
0 to system deceleration time/2
(F15.13=2)
(F15.13=0)
Ending time of
F04.18 S curve in s 1.00 ●
(F15.13=1)
deceleration
0 to system deceleration time/2
(F15.13=2)
F04.14=0: linear acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases linearly. The acceleration and deceleration
time is set by the function codes F00.14 and F00.15 by default.
F04.14=1: continuous S-curve acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases according to the curve. The S curve is usually
where there are relatively low requirements for start and stop, such as elevators and conveyor
belts. In the acceleration process shown in Fig. 7–16, t1 is the set value of F04.15, and t2 is the
set value of F04.16. In the deceleration process, t3 is the set value of F04.17, and t4 is the set
value of F04.18. The slope of the output frequency remains unchanged between t1 and t2 as well
as between t3 and t4.
F04.14=2: intermittent S-curve acceleration and deceleration
Compared with the continuous S-curve, the intermittent S-curve will not be over-tuned.
The current S-curve trend will be stopped immediately according to changes in the settings and
acceleration/deceleration time, and the new planned S-curve trend will be applied.
181
Output
frequency
Linear
acceleration
and
deceleration
S-curve
acceleration
and
deceleration
t1 t2 t3 t4
Acceleration time Deceleration time
Fig. 7-16 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Control Diagram
Function Default
code setting
0: slow down to stop
1: Free stop
F04.19=0: deceleration to stop
The motor decelerates to stop according to the set deceleration time [default setting: based
on F00.15 (deceleration time 1)].
F04.19=1: free stop
When the stop command is valid, the inverter will stop output immediately, and the motor
will freely coast to stop. The stop time depends on the inertia of the motor and load.
182
If the free stop terminal has been set and enabled, the inverter will be immediately in the
free stop status. Even if this terminal is disabled, the inverter will not restart running. Instead,
the running command must be entered again to start the inverter.
Function Default
code setting
Starting frequency of DC 0.00 to maximum
F04.20 Hz 0.00 〇
braking in stop frequency F00.16
DC braking current in 0.0 to 150.0 (100.0 =
F04.21 % 100.0 〇
stop rated current of motor)
0.00～30.00 0.00:
F04.22 DC braking time in stop s 0.00 〇
invalid
Demagnetization time for
F04.23 0.00 - 30.00 s 0.50 〇
DC braking in stop
F04.20: Set the starting frequency of DC braking in deceleration to stop. Once the output
frequency is less than the set frequency during deceleration stop, and the time of DC braking for
stop is not 0, DC braking for stop will be enabled.
F04.21: Set different values to apply the torques of DC braking for stop.
F04.22: Set the duration of DC braking for stop. If F04.22=0.00, DC braking for stop will
be invalid. When an external terminal sends a signal of DC braking for stop, the duration of DC
braking for stop will be larger of the valid time of the signal of DC braking for stop from the
external terminal and the set time of F04.22.
F04.23: When the output frequency reaches the set value of F04.20 during deceleration to
stop, and the set time of F04.23 is up, DC braking will be enabled.
The process of DC braking for stop is shown in Fig. 7-.
183
Output frequency
Output frequency
Time
Time 0
0
Motor speed Motor speed
Time Time
0 0
Braking current Braking current

Degaussing time
Time
0 0
Time
Brake time Degaussing time Brake time
Fig. 7-17 DC Braking Process for Start Fig. 7-18 DC Braking Process for Stop
In the presence of heavy loads, the motor cannot be stopped completely through
normal deceleration due to inertia. You can extend the duration of DC braking for
stop or increase the current of DC braking for stop to stop the motor from rotating.
Leave-fa
Function Function code
Parameter description Unit ctory Attribute
code name
value
F04.24 Flux braking gain 100-150 (100: no flux braking) 100 〇
When the magnetic flux braking is valid (F04.24>100), the motor can be quickly slowed
down by increasing its magnetic flux, and the electric energy can be converted into thermal
energy during motor braking.
Flux braking may lead to quick deceleration, but the output current may be high. The flux
braking intensity (F04.24) can be set restriction and protection to avoid damage to the motor. If
flux braking is not applied, the deceleration time will be extended but the output current will be
low.

code name setting
0: start according to F04.00
Start mode after
F04.26 setting mode 0 〇
protection/free stop
The start after the protection or free stop may be enabled by default according to the F04.00
184
setting (F04.26=0), or set to the speed tracking start (F04.26=1). For the stop mode, see the
Function Default
code setting
0: Not required for
Second confirmation of
F04.27 confirmation 0 〇
terminal start command
1: to be confirmed
F04.27=0: not confirmed
The running terminal (RUN or F/R) is closed, F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, and the terminal is
powered on during start/stop or directly run once enabled by switching the start/stop mode.
F04.27=1: confirmed
The running terminal is closed, F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, and the terminal is powered on
during start/stop or cannot directly run once enabled by switching the start/stop mode. It is
necessary to first disconnect the running terminal and then close it to start running.
Function Default
code setting
Zero speed check
F04.29 0.00 - 5.00 Hz 0.25 ●
frequency
When the output frequency is lower than the zero speed judgment frequency, the terminal
“zero-speed running” will be valid.
Function Default
code setting
Initial position search
0: Invalid
F04.30 after power-on or 1 ●
1: valid
protection
When the synchronous motor is used (e.g. F01.00=2) and subjected to VF control, the
initial angle is essential for the control performance. In particular, reversing may occur at the
moment of start. Thus, the initial position is searched by default after power-on or protection, in
order to achieve a better control performance.
7.6 VF Control Parameter Group of F05 Group

The function codes in this group are valid for V/F control and invalid for vector control.
V/F control is suitable for general-purpose loads such as fans and pumps, or when multiple
motors are driven by one inverter or the power of the inverter is quite different from that of the
185
motor.
code name setting
2: 1.3-power V/F
3: 1.7-power V/F
4: square V/F
V/F curve
F05.00 5: VF complete separation mode (Ud 0 〇
setting
= 0, Uq = K * t = voltage of
separation voltage source)
6: VF semi-separation mode (Ud = 0,
Uq = K * t = F/Fe * 2 * voltage of
F05.00=0: linear V/F
It is suitable for ordinary constant-torque loads.
F05.00=1: multi-point V/F
It is suitable for special loads such as dehydrators, centrifuges and cranes. Any V/F
relationship curve can be obtained by setting the parameters F05.01 to F05.06.
F05.00=2/3: 1.3th power/1.7th power of V/F
It is a VF curve between the linear VF and square VF.
F05.00=4: square V/F
It is suitable for centrifugal loads such as fans and pumps.
F05.00=5: VF complete separation mode
In this case, the output frequency and output voltage of the inverter are independent of each
other. The output frequency depends on the frequency source, and the output voltage is
determined by F05.07 (VF separation voltage source).
The VF complete separation mode is usually applied in induction heating, inverter power
supply, torque motor control, etc.
F05.00=6: VF semi-separation mode
In this case, V and F are proportional, but their proportional relationship can be set by the
voltage source F05.07. In addition, the relationship between V and F is also related to the rated
voltage and rated frequency of the motor in the F1 group.
Assuming that the voltage source input is X (X is 0 to 100%), the relationship between the
output voltage V and frequency F of the inverter is:
186
V/F=2*X* (rated voltage of the motor)/(rated frequency of the motor)

code name setting
Frequency point F1
F05.01 0.00 - F05.03 Hz 0.50 ●
of multi-point VF
Voltage point V1 of 0.0～100.0 (100.0 = Rated
F05.02 % 1.0 ●
multi-point VF voltage)
Frequency point F2
F05.03 F05.01～F05.05 Hz 2.00 ●
of multi-point VF
Voltage point V2 of
F05.04 0.0-100.0 % 4.0 ●
multi-point VF
Frequency point F3 F05.03 to rated frequency of
F05.05 Hz 5.00 ●
of multi-point VF motor (reference frequency)
Voltage point V3 of
F05.06 0.0-100.0 % 10.0 ●
multi-point VF
The code parameters F05.01 to F05.06 are valid when the multi-point polyline VF is
selected (F05.00=1).
All V/F curves are dependent on the curve set by the percentage of input frequency and the
percentage of output voltage, linearized in sections within different input ranges.
The rated frequency of the motor is the final frequency of the V/F curve, and also the
frequency corresponding to the highest output voltage. Percentage of the input frequency: rated
frequency of the motor = 100.0%; percentage of the output voltage: rated voltage U e of the
motor = 100.0%.
The relationships of the three voltage points and frequency points must meet the following
requirements: V1<V2<V3, F1<F2<F3;
If the slope of the V/F curve is too large, the “overcurrent” protection may be
enabled. Particularly, if the low-frequency voltage is too high, the motor may be
overheated and even burnt, and the inverter may be subject to overcurrent stall or
overcurrent protection.
187
Output voltage
(%)
Rated voltage
of motor
V3
V2
V1
Output frequency
Rated frequency （%）
F1 F2 F3
of motor
Fig. 7-19 Schematic Diagram of Multi-point Polyline V/F Curve
Function Default
code setting
0: digital setting of VF
separation voltage
1: AI1
2: AI2
Voltage source of 3: retention
F05.07 0 〇
VF separation mode 4: High-frequency pulse (X5)
5：PID
Note: 100% is the rated voltage
of the motor.
Digital setting of VF 0.0 to 100.0 (100.0=Rated
F05.08 % 0.0 ●
separation voltage voltage of motor)
VF separation is usally applied in induction heating, inverter power supply, torque motor
control, etc.
When VF separation control is selected, the output voltage can be set by the function code
F05.08 or according to the analog, high-speed pulse, PID or communication settings. For
non-digital settings, 100% of each setting corresponds to the rated voltage of the motor. When
the percentage set by the analog output is negative, the set absolute value will be taken as the
valid set value.
F05.07=0: digital setting of VF separation voltage (F05.08)
The VF separation output voltage depends on the digital setting of VF separation voltage
(F05.08).
F05.07=1:AI1
188
F05.07=2:AI2
F05.07=4: High-frequency pulse (X5)
The VF separation output voltage depends on AI/HDI (percentage) * F05.08 (digital setting
of VF separation voltage).
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F05.08 (digital setting of VF separation
voltage).
F05.07=5: process PID
The VF separation output voltage depends on the process PID function output, as described
in 7.10.
F05.07=6: communication setting
The VF separation output voltage depends on the communication.
slave (F10.06=0), the VF separation output voltage is “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F01.02 or others (rated voltage of the motor) * F10.08
(slave receiving proportional coefficient)”. The 700FH data range is 0.00% to
100.00%, as detailed in Table 12-31.
 For general communication (F10.05=0), the VF separation output voltage is “7006H
(voltage setting of the VF separation mode) * F05.08 (digital setting of the VF
separation voltage)”, and the 7006H data range is 0.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in
Table 12-31.
Function Default
code setting
Rise time of VF
F05.09 0.00 - 60.00 s 2.00 ●
separation voltage
The rise time of VF separation voltage refers to the time for the output voltage to increase
from 0 to the rated voltage of the motor.
189
Output voltage
Rated voltage of
motor
VF separation
voltage
Actual rise time
0 Set rise time Time t
Fig. 7-20 Rise Time Description of VF Separation Voltage
Function Default
code setting
Compensation gain of
F05.10 0.00 - 200.00 % 100.00 ●
V/F stator voltage drop
It is used to compensate for the voltage drop caused by the stator resistor and wire, and
improve the low-frequency load capacity.
Function Default
code setting
V/F slip compensation
F05.11 0.00 - 200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
F05.12 V/F slip filtering time 0.00 - 10.00 s 1.00 ●
As the load increases, the rotor speed of the motor will decrease. To make the rotor speed
of the motor close to the synchronous speed under rated load, slip compensation can be enabled.
When the motor speed is less than the target value, the set value of F05.11 can be increased.
★: In the case of F05.11=0, slip compensation is invalid. This parameter is valid only for the
asynchronous motor.
The slip is 100% during the quick start with large inertia and 0 when the frequency reaches
the set value. Quick increase or decrease of the output frequency will cause overvoltage or
overcurrent. F05.12 filtering can slow down the rise of voltage and current.
Function Default
code setting
Oscillation
F05.13 0 - 20000 100 ●
suppression gain
F05.14 Oscillation 0.00-600.00 Hz 55.00 ●
190
suppression cutoff
frequency
This parameter can be adjusted to suppress motor oscillations during the open loop control
(VVF). When the motor does not oscillate, this parameter should not be adjusted as little as
possible or properly reduced. If the motor oscillates obviously, this parameter can be increased
properly.

code name setting
Droop control
F05.15 0.00 - 10.00 Hz 0.00 ●
frequency
This function is usually applied for load distribution when one load is driven by multiple
motors.
Droop control is to reduce the output frequency of the inverter with the load increasing, so
that the output frequency of the motor drops more in the load driven by multiple motors, thus
reducing the load on this motor and leading to evener distribution of the load on multiple
motors.
This parameter refers to the output frequency drop of the inverter under the rated load.
Function Default
code setting
F05.16 Energy saving rate 0.00 - 50.00 % 0.00 ●
Energy saving action
F05.17 1.00 - 60.00 s 5.00 ●
time
The energy saving rate (F05.16) reflects the energy saving capacity. The larger the set value,
the more energy will be saved. If the set value is 0.00, energy saving will be invalid.
When energy-saving operation is valid, energy saving control will be enabled once the
energy saving conditions are met and have been maintained for the energy saving time (F05.17).
The default settings of the VF control optimization parameters of the synchronous motor
are used under normal circumstances.
On the basis of the VF separation voltage source setting, the set value of F05.20 changes at
intervals of one minute in the power supply setting.
7.7 Vector Control Parameter Group of F06 Group

Function Default
code setting
F06.00 Speed proportional gain 0.00-100.00 12.00 ●
191
ASR_P1
Speed integral time 0.000 - 30.000, 0.000: no
F06.01 s 0.200 ●
constant ASR_T1 integral
Speed proportional gain
F06.02 0.00-100.00 8.00 ●
ASR_P2
Speed integral time 0.000 - 30.000, 0.000: no
F06.03 s 0.300 ●
constant ASR_T2 integral
0.00 to switching
F06.04 Switching frequency 1 Hz 5.00 ●
frequency 2
Switching frequency 1 to
F06.05 Switching frequency 2 maximum frequency Hz 10.00 ●
F00.16
In the vector control mode, the dynamic speed response of the inverter is adjusted by
changing the speed proportional gain (ASR_P) and speed integral time (ASR_T) of the speed PI
regulator. The increase in ASR_P or decrease in ASR_T may accelerate the dynamic response of
the speed loop. If ASR_P is too large or ASR_T is too small, however, the system may be
over-tuned to cause oscillation.
Users should adjust the above speed PI parameters according to the actual load
characteristics. Generally, as long as the system does not oscillate, ASR_P should be increased
as much as possible, and then ASR_T should be adjusted, so that the system makes response fast,
without excessive over-tuning.
To enable fast dynamic responses of the system at low and high speeds, PI regulation
should be performed separately at low and high speeds. During the actual operation, the speed
regulator will automatically calculate the current PI parameters based on the current frequency.
The speed PI parameters are P1 and T1 at the switching frequency 1, and P2 and T2 at the
switching frequency 2. If the frequency is greater than the F06.04 switching frequency 1 and
less than F06.05 switching frequency 2, the switching frequency 1 and switching frequency 2
will be subject to linear transition. See Fig. 7-.
192
PID parameters
P1,Ti1
P2,Ti2
Switching Switching Feedback

frequency 1 frequency 2 frequency
Fig. 7-21 Schematic Diagram of PI Parameters
1. The parameters F06.00 to F06.05 need to be adjusted carefully. They should

not be adjusted under normal circumstances.
2. While setting the switching frequency, note that the F06.04 switching
frequency 1 must be less than or equal to the F06.05 switching frequency 2.
Function Default
code setting
Filtering time constant of
F06.07 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 ●
speed loop output
Speed loop output filtering can reduce the impact on the current loop, but the value of
F06.07 should not be too large. Otherwise, slow responses may be caused. Use the default
settings under normal circumstances.
Function Default
code setting
Vector control slip
F06.08 50.00-200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
As the load increases, the rotor speed of the motor will increase. To make the rotor speed
close to the synchronous speed under the rated load, slip compensation can be enabled. When
the motor speed is less than the target value, the set value of F06.08 can be increased.
For the speed sensorless vector control, this parameter can be used to adjust the speed
accuracy of the motor. Increase this parameter if the motor speed is low under load, and vice
193
versa.
Function Default
code setting
0: set by F06.10 and
F06.11
1: AI1
2: AI2
Upper limit source 5: Communication
F06.09 selection of speed control setting (percentage) 0 〇
torque 6: the larger of AI1 and
AI2
7: The smaller of AI1
and AI2
Upper limit of speed
F06.10 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
control motor torque
Upper limit of speed
F06.11 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
control brake torque
Vector control is used to set the operating conditions of the torque limit. If the output torque
of the inverter is greater than the set upper limit, the torque limit function will be enabled, thus
controlling the output torque not to exceed the upper limit of speed control torque.
F06.09=0: depending on F06.10 and F06.11
The upper limit of electric torque is F06.10, and that of braking torque is F06.11.
F06.09=1:AI1
F06.09=2:AI2
The upper torque limit is dependent on AI (percentage) * F06.10/F06.11.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F06.10/F06.11.
The upper torque limit depends on the communication.
slave (F10.06=0), the upper torque limit is “700FH (master-slave communication
setting) * 250.0% * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient)”, and the
700FH data range is 0.00% to 100.00%.
 For the general communication (F10.05=0), the upper torque limit is “7019H
(communication setting of the upper torque limit for speed control) * F06.10/F06.11”,
and the 7019H data range is 0.0 to 250.0%.
194
F06.09=6: the larger of AI1 and AI2
The formula for torque upper limit calculation is the same as described above, except that
the percentage of AI is the larger of AI1 and AI2.
F06.09=7: the smaller of AI1 and AI2
The formula for torque upper limit calculation is the same as described above, except that
the percentage of AI is the smaller of AI1 and AI2.
1. This code parameter represents the ratio of the output torque in the torque
limit action to the rated output torque of the inverter.
2. The user can set the upper torque limit according to the actual needs, to
protect the motor or meet the working conditions.
3. The electric mode and braking mode are set separately.
Function Parameter Default

Function code name Unit Attribute
code description setting
Excitation current proportional
F06.12 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
gain ACR-P1
Excitation current integral time 0.0.00 - 600.00
F06.13 ms 10.00 ●
constant ACR-T1 0.00: no integral
Torque current proportional gain
F06.14 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
ACR-P2
Torque current integral time 0.0.00 - 600.00
F06.15 ms 10.00 ●
constant ACR-T2 0.00: no integral
The parameters of the current loop PID regulator directly affect the performance and
stability of the system. The user does not need to change the default settings under normal
circumstances.
Function Default
code setting
0: braking
SVC zero-frequency
F06.17 1: not processed 2 〇
processing
2: seal the tube
50.0-400.0 (100.0 is the
SVC zero-frequency
F06.18 no-load current of the % 100.0 〇
braking current
motor)
In the case of SVC control (e.g. F00.01=1) and zero-frequency operation, the inverter will
work according to the F06.17 setting.
F06.17=0: braking by the set current of F06.18 for zero servo operation;
F06.17=1: no processing;
F06.17=2: the inverter freely stop running with its output blocked.
195
Function Default
code setting
Voltage feedforward
F06.20 0 - 100 % 0 ●
gain
In the vector control mode, voltage feedforward adjustment is added to automatically
increase the torque, i.e. the compensation for stator voltage drop.
Function Default
code setting
0: Invalid
Flux weakening control
options
2: automatic adjustment
F06.22 Flux weakening voltage 70.00-100.00 % 100.00 ●
0.0-150.0 (100.0 is the
Maximum flux weakening
F06.23 rated current of the % 100.0 ●
current of synchronous motor
motor)
Proportional gain of flux
F06.24 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
weakening regulator
Integral time of flux
F06.25 0.01 - 60.00 s 2.00 ●
weakening regulator
The synchronous motor is subject to flux weakening control.
F06.21 Ones place=0, invalid
Flux weakening control is not performed. The maximum speed of the motor is related to
the bus voltage of the inverter. When the maximum speed of the motor does not meet user
requirements, the flux weakening function of the synchronous motor should be enabled to
increase the speed.
EM730/EM730E has two flux weakening modes: direct calculation and automatic
adjustment.
F06.21 Ones place=1, direct calculation
In the direct calculation mode, the flux weakening current is calculated according to the
target speed and can be adjusted manually via the option 06.22. The lower the flux weakening
current, the lower the total output current will be, but the desired effect of flux weakening may
not be achieved.
F06.21 Ones place=2, automatic adjustment
In the automatic adjustment, the optimal flux weakening current will be selected
automatically, but it may affect the dynamic performance of the system or become unstable.
The speed of flux weakening current adjustment can be changed by setting the
proportional gain (F06.24) and integral time (F06.25). However, fast adjustment of the flux
196
weakening current adjustment may cause instability. This does not need to be changed manually
under normal circumstances.
Function Default
code setting
Self-learning gain at
F06.27 0 - 200 % 100 ●
initial position
This parameter is used to determine the amplitude of the high-frequency current injected
during the initial position identification. The larger this value, the higher the “squeak” sound
will be.

code name setting
Frequency of low
0.00-100.00 (100.00 is the
F06.28 frequency band of % 10.00 ●
rated frequency of the motor)
injection current
Injection current of
0.0-60.0 (100.0 is the rated
F06.29 low frequency % 40.0 ●
current of the motor)
band
Regulator gain of
low frequency
F06.30 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
band of injection
current
Regulator integral
time of low
F06.31 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
frequency band of
injection current
Frequency of high
0.00-100.00 (100.00 is the
F06.32 frequency band of % 20.00 ●
rated frequency of the motor)
injection current
Injection current f
0.0-30.0 (100.0 is the rated
F06.33 high frequency % 8.0 ●
current of the motor)
band
Regulator gain of
high frequency
F06.34 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
band of injection
current
Regulator integral
time of high
F06.35 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
frequency band of
injection current
197
Injection
current
F06.29
High frequency band
Low frequency band
F06.33
0 F06.28 F06.32 Frequency
Fig. 7-22 Schematic Diagram of High Frequency Injection

The injection current depends on F06.29 in the low frequency band (output frequency
<F06.28) and F06.33 in the high frequency band (output frequency> F06.32).
To get better results, the gain and integral time of the regulator can be adjusted. Default
settings can be used under normal circumstances.
They must not be adjusted by non-professionals.
Function Default
code setting
Stiffness coefficient of
F06.37 0~20 12 ●
speed loop
In case of any change in F06.37, the default values of F06.00-F06.03 will change
accordingly. The adjustment intensity of the speed PI regulator can be changed. There are 21
optional groups of parameters in total. The larger the set value of F06.37, the larger the
proportional gain is, the smaller the integral time is, and the more intense the speed PID
regulation is. The smaller the set value of F06.37, the weaker the speed PID regulation is.

F06.41 Open-loop low-frequency 0: VF 0 〇
198
processing of synchronous 1: IF
motor 2: IF in start and VF
in stop
Open-loop low-frequency
F06.42 processing range of 0.0 - 50.0 % 8.0 〇
synchronous motor
F06.43 IF injection current 0.0 - 600.0 % 80.0 〇
The default settings of low frequency optimization options of the synchronous motor are
suitable for most applications. If a larger torque is required at the low frequency, you can enable
the IF mode.
Speed tracking proportional gain
F06.46 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 〇
of synchronous motor
Speed tracking integral gain of
F06.47 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 〇
synchronous motor
Filtering time constant of speed
F06.48 0.00 - 10.00 ms 0.40 〇
tracking of synchronous motor
Speed tracking control intensity
F06.49 1.0 - 100.0 5.0 〇
Speed tracking control threshold
F06.50 0.00 - 10.00 0.20 〇
Injection current (Iq) rise time
F06.51 0.010 - 1.000 S 5.0 〇
Tuning parameters for speed tracking of the synchronous motor.
7.8 F07 protection parameter group

E20 * E13 E06 * E04 E07 E08

Protection 0*00*0
F07.00 〇
shield 0: valid protection 00
1: shielded protection
Bit setting = 0: when the inverter detects the protection corresponding to this bit, it will
stop the output and enter the protection status.
Bit setting = 1: when the inverter detects the protection corresponding to this bit, it will
keep the original status without protection.
This code is subject to bit operation. You only need to set the corresponding bit to 0 or 1.
199
As shown in the table below:
Table 7-10 Detailed Definition of Protection Shield Bits
Protection E20 * E13 E06 * E04 E07 E08
code
Correspond 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ing bit
Settings 0/1 * 0/1 0/1 0/1 * 0/1 0/1
For example: To shield the E07 protection, you only need to set the first bit corresponding to
E07 to 1, i.e. F07.00=xxx xxx1x.
To shield the E08 and E13 protection, you only need to set the 0th bit corresponding to E08
and the 5th bit corresponding to E13 to 1. That is, F07.00=xx1 xxxx1.
Unless there are special needs, please do not shield any protection function, so
as to prevent the inverter from damage as a result of protection failure.
Function Default
code setting
Motor overload
F07.01 0.20 - 10.00 1.00 ●
protection gain
Motor overload
F07.02 50 - 100 % 80 ●
pre-alarm coefficient
The inverse time curve of motor overload protection is: 200% × (F07.01) × rated current of
the motor, sending an alarm of motor overload protection (E13) if the duration reaches one
minute; 150% × (F07.01) ×rated current of the motor, sending an alarm of motor overload (E13)
if the duration reaches 15 minutes.
The user needs to set F07.01 correctly according to the actual overload capacity of the
motor. If the set value is too large, the motor may be damaged as a result of overheat but the
inverter may not send an alarm!
The F07.02 warning coefficient is used to determine the extent of motor overload for a
protection warning. The larger this value, the less the warning is advanced.
When the cumulative output current of the inverter is greater than the product of the inverse
time curve of load by F07.02, the multi-function digital DO terminal of the inverter will output
the valid signal “17: Motor overload pre-alarm”.
Function Default
code setting
F07.06 Bus voltage control Ones place: Instantaneous 2 〇
stop/no-stop function options
200
options 0: Invalid
1: deceleration
2: deceleration to stop
Tens place: Overvoltage stall
function options
0: Invalid
1: valid
Voltage of
110.0 - 150.0 (380V, 131.0
F07.07 overvoltage stall % 〇
100.0=537V) (703V)
control
F07.06=0X: Invalid
The overvoltage stall is invalid. It is recommended not to set it to 0 in the case of no
external braking unit.
The undervoltage stall is also invalid.
When the value in the ones place is 1 or 2, F07.30 is the reference deceleration time.
F07.06=1X: Valid overvoltage stall
When the overvoltage stall is valid, the stall control voltage is dependent on F07.07.
The DC bus overvoltage is usually caused by deceleration. Due to the energy feedback
during deceleration, the DC bus voltage will rise.
When the DC bus voltage is greater than the overvoltage threshold and the overvoltage stall
is valid (F07.06=2/3), the deceleration of the inverter will be suspended, the output frequency
will remain unchanged, and the energy feedback will be stopped until the DC bus voltage is
normal. Then the inverter will restart deceleration. The process of overvoltage stall protection in
deceleration is shown in Fig. 7-.
201
DC bus voltage
Voltage of
overvoltage stall
Invalid voltage of
overvoltage stall
Output frequency
Treatment of
regenerated
overvoltage
Time t
Fig. 7-23 Schematic Diagram of Overvoltage Stall Protection

Function Default
code setting
Instantaneous 60.0 to instantaneous
F07.08 stop/no-stop operating stop/no-stop recovery 76.0 〇
voltage voltage (100.0 = standard
bus voltage)
Instantaneous
F07.09 stop/no-stop recovery Instantaneous stop/no-stop % 86.0 ●
operating voltage to 100.0
voltage
Check time for
F07.10 instantaneous s 0.5 ●
stop/no-stop recovery 0.00-100.00
voltage
Instantaneous
F07.30 stop/no-stop 0.00 - 300.00 s 20.00 〇
deceleration time
When the bus voltage is lower than the instantaneous stop/non-stop action voltage (F07.08),
the inverter will be in the power-down status. When the bus voltage is higher than the
instantaneous stop/non-stop recovery voltage (F07.09), and the judgment time (F07.10) for the
instantaneous stop/non-stop recovery voltage is up, the inverter will recover normal operation.
When the ones place of the instantaneous stop/non-stop option of F07.06 bus voltage
control is set to “1: Slow down”, as shown in Fig. 7-24: When the bus voltage is lower than the
instantaneous stop/non-stop action voltage (F07.08), the inverter will slow down at the speed set
based on the decleration time for the instantaneous stop/non-stop action (F07.30). When the bus
202
voltage is higher than the instantaneous stop/non-stop recovery voltage (F07.09), the inverter
will not slow down. When the cumulative time reaches the judgement time for instantaneous
stop/non-stop recovery voltage (F07.10), the inverter will start to acceleration, and the frequency
will gradually return to the set value.
When the ones place of the instantaneous stop/non-stop option of F07.06 bus voltage
control is set to “2: Slow down to stop”, the action is similar to that of the option 1. When the
bus voltage reaches the instantaneous stop/non-stop action voltage, the speed set based on the
instantaneous stop/non-stop slowdown time (F07.30) will constantly decrease to 0, regardless of
voltage recovery.
DC bus voltage
Instantaneous stop/no-
stop recovery voltage
Instantaneous stop/no-
stop operating voltage
Output frequency
Time
Judgment time for
voltage recovery
Fig. 7-24 Schematic Diagram of Instantaneous Stop/Non-stop Deceleration Function

code name setting
0: Invalid
Current limit
F07.11 1: limit mode 1 2 〇
control
2: limit mode 2
20.0-180.0 (100% = rated current
F07.12 Current limit level % 150.0 ●
of inverter)
F07.11=0: invalid
The current limit does not work.
203
F07.11=1: limit mode 1

F07.11=2: limit mode 2
When the output current reaches the current limit level (F07.12) and the current limit
control is valid (F07.11=1) during operation, the current limit function of the inverter will be
enabled. The output frequency will be reduced to limit the increase in output current, thus
disabling the overcurrent stall of the inverter. When the output current decreases to below the
current limit level, the original running status will be restored. The current limit process is
shown in Fig. 7-25.
Fig. 7-25 Current Limit Process

F07.12 is used to set the operating conditions of current limit. If the current of the inverter
is greater than the set value of this code, the current limit function will be enabled, thus
controlling the output current not to exceed the current limit level.
The current limit is valid only for the V/F drive mode. It is recommended to use
this function in the case of large inertia or fan type loads or driving of multiple
motors by a single inverter.
Function Default
code setting
Quick current limit 0: Invalid
F07.13 0 〇
options 1: valid
F07.13=0: invalid
The quick current limit does not work.
F07.13=1: valid
The quick current limit can reduce overcurrent protections.
204
code name setting
Protection
F07.14 0-20; 0: Disable protection retry 0 〇
retries
Options of
digital output
0: no action
F07.15 action in 0 〇
1: action
protection
retries
Interval of
F07.16 protection 0.01 - 30.00 s 0.50 ●
retries
Restoration
time of
F07.17 0.01 - 30.00 s 10.00 ●
protection
retries
0
E07 * E02 E06 E05 E04 〇
Action option of *0000
F07.18
protection 0: allow protection retry
1: disable protection retry
000
E10 E13 E15 E16 * E19 E20 * 〇
Action option 2 00000
F07.32
of protection 0: allow protection retry
* * * * * * E09 E17 *****00 〇
Action option 3
F07.34 0: allow protection retry
of protection
The function of protection retry is to prevent the impact of occasional protection on the
normal operation of the system. This is valid only for protections of F07.18, F07.32 and F07.34.
If protection retry is enabled, this will be performed after a corresponding protection. That
is, the protection will be reset. The protection status depends on F07.15 and the output of the
digital output terminal. If a fault is still detected after the protection retry interval, the protection
retry will be continued to the set number of protection retries (F07.14) and then the
corresponding protection will be reported. If the fault is not detected after several protection
retries, the protection retries will be deemed successful and the inverter will continue to run
normally.
When protection retries succeed and no trip protection is enabled within the recovery time
(F07.17), the number of protection retries will be cleared. When a protection is enabled again,
protection retries will be performed from zero. In case of any trip protection within this period,
205
protection retries will be carried out based on the last count.
code name setting
Action E21 E16 E15 E14 E13 * E08 E07
000
Action E28 E27 * E23
With regard to some protections, the action mode of the inverter can be selected via this
function code. The inverter will stop running freely when the corresponding bit is set to 0 and
according to the stop mode (F04.19) when the corresponding bit is set to 1.
These two function codes are subject to bit operation. You only need to set the
corresponding bit to 0 or 1. As shown in the table below:
Table 7-11 Detailed Definition of Protection Action Bits

F07.19 E21 E16 E15 E14 E13 * E08 E07
F07.20 * * * * E28 E27 * E23
Correspond 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ing bit
Settings 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
For example: To stop the inverter according to the stop mode (F04.19) after the E08 and
E13 protection is enabled, you only need to set the 1 st bit corresponding to E08 and the 3rd bit
corresponding to E13 to 1. That is, F07.19=xxx x1x1x.
Function Default
code setting
Options of load loss
F07.21 0: invalid 1: valid 0 ●
protection
F07.22 Load loss detection level 0.0-100.0 % 20.0 ●
F07.23 Load loss detection time 0.0 - 60.0 s 1.0 ●
0: trip protection, free stop
1: trip protection, stop
Options of load loss
F07.24 according to stop mode 1 〇
protection action
2: Continue to run, with DO
status output
When the off-load protection is valid (F07.21=1), the inverter will be in the running status
without DC braking, and the output current is below the off-load detection level (F07.22) and
maintained for the off-load detection time (F07.23), the inverter will be in the off-load status.
Specific processing depends on F07.24.
206
Function Default
code setting
0: Invalid
F07.27 AVR function 1: valid 1 〇
2: automatic
F07.27=0: invalid
The automatic voltage regulation (AVR) function is invalid.
F07.27=1: valid
The AVR function is continuously valid. If the input voltage is lower than the rated input
voltage, and the output frequency is greater than the corresponding frequency on the VF curve,
the inverter will output the output the maximum voltage to maximize the power output of the
motor. If the input voltage is higher than the rated input voltage, the output voltage of the
inverter will decrease, and the VF ratio will remain unchanged.
F07.27=2: automatic
The AVR function is valid automatically (invalid during deceleration): the inverter will
automatically adjust the output voltage according to changes in the actual grid voltage, to keep it
at the rated output voltage.
Function Default
code setting
Stall protection 0.0-6000.0(0.0: no stall
F07.28 s 0.0 〇
detection time protection detection)
F07.29 Stall control intensity 0 - 100 % 100 〇
When the continuous stall time exceeds the set value of F07.28, the driver will report a stall
protection.
In the stall status, the driver will perform automatic control according to the set value of
F07.29. The intensity setting depends on the on-site application, instead of maximization.
7.9 Multi-segment Speed and Simple PLC Parameter Group of F08 Group
code name setting
Multi-segment 0.00 to maximum frequency
F08.00 Hz 0.00 ●
speed 1 F00.16
F08.01 Hz 5.00 ●
speed 2 F00.16
F08.02 Hz 10.00 ●
speed 3 F00.16
F08.03 Hz 15.00 ●
speed 4 F00.16
F08.04 Hz 20.00 ●
speed 5 F00.16
F08.05 Multi-segment 0.00 to maximum frequency Hz 25.00 ●
207
speed 6 F00.16
F08.06 Hz 30.00 ●
speed 7 F00.16
F08.07 Hz 35.00 ●
speed 8 F00.16
F08.08 Hz 40.00 ●
speed 9 F00.16
F08.09 Multi- speed 10 Hz 45.00 ●
F00.16
F08.10 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 11 F00.16
F08.11 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 12 F00.16
F08.12 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 13 F00.16
F08.13 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 14 F00.16
F08.14 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 15 F00.16
The 16-segment speed can be provided according to the multi-segment speed control
terminal, 15-segment frequency command and digital frequency setting F00.07.
Table 7-12 Combination of Multi-segment Speed Command and Multi-segment Speed Terminal
Multi- Multi-
Multi- Multi-
segment segment
Segment segment segment Selected Corresponding
speed speed
Speed speed speed frequency function code
terminal terminal
terminal 2 terminal 1
4 3
Digital
Depending on
1 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid frequency
F00.07
setting
Multi-segment
2 Invalid Invalid Invalid Valid F08.00
speed 1
Multi-segment
3 Invalid Invalid Valid Invalid F08.01
speed 2
Multi-segment
4 Invalid Invalid Valid Valid F08.02
speed 3
Multi-segment
5 Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid F08.03
speed 4
Multi-segment
6 Invalid Valid Invalid Valid F08.04
speed 5
7 Invalid Valid Valid Invalid Multi-segment F08.05
208
speed 6
Multi-segment
8 Invalid Valid Valid Valid F08.06
speed 7
Multi-segment
9 Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid F08.07
speed 8
Multi-segment
10 Valid Invalid Invalid Valid F08.08
speed 9
Multi- speed
11 Valid Invalid Valid Invalid F08.09
10
Multi-segment
12 Valid Invalid Valid Valid F08.10
speed 11
Multi-segment
13 Valid Valid Invalid Invalid F08.11
speed 12
Multi-segment
14 Valid Valid Invalid Valid F08.12
speed 13
Multi-segment
15 Valid Valid Valid Invalid F08.13
speed 14
Multi-segment
16 Valid Valid Valid Valid F08.14
speed 15
Precautions for setting:

★ The start and stop in multi-segment speed operation depends on the function code
F00.02.
★ The acceleration/deceleration time in multi-segment speed operation can be controlled
by the external terminal with the acceleration/deceleration time function.
The direction of multi-segment speed operation is controlled by the terminals F/R and
RUN.

code name setting
0: stop after a single run
1: stop after a limited number of
Simple PLC cycles
F08.15 0 ●
running mode 2: run at the last segment after a
limited number of cycles
3: continuous cycles
Limited number of
F08.16 1 - 10000 1 ●
cycles
In addition to the multi-segment speed mode, it also has the simple PLC function. There are
209
four running modes in total, as detailed in Table 7-13.

Table 7-13 Details of PLC Running Mode
F08.15 Description
0 The inverter will be stopped after running in the last segment.
The inverter will run cyclically and be stopped after the set cycles. The number
1
of cycles depends on the function code F08.16.
The inverter will run cyclically and keep the speed of the last segment after
2 running in the last segment, until a stop command is received. The number of
cycles depends on the function code F08.16.
3 The inverter will continue cyclic operation until a stop command is received.
★ The last segment refers to the segment that is not set to 0, judged from the running
time (F08.48) of the 15th segment toward the 1st segment.
Output frequency (Hz) 5
2
1
Time (s)
4
12
13
T1 T2 T4 T5 T12 T13
Fig. 7-26 Schematic Diagram of Simple PLC Operation

Fig. 7-26 shows the operation diagram in the running mode “0: stop after a single run”.
Since the running time of the 3rd segment is set to 0 (F08.24=0.0), the 3rd segment will not be
put into actual operation. The running time of the 14th and 15th segments is set to 0 (F08.46=0.0,
F08.48=0.0), so the last segment is the 13th segment, and the inverter will be stopped after
running in the 13th segment.

code name setting
Ones place: Stop memory
Simple PLC options
F08.17 00 ●
memory options 0: no memory (from the first
segment)
210
1: memory (from the moment of
stop)
Tens place: Power-down
memory options
0: no memory (from the first
segment)
1: Memory (from the
power-down moment)
The PLC stop memory is to record the current simple PLC running times (F18.10), running
stage (F18.11), and running time at the current stage (F18.12). The inverter will continue to run
from the memory stage during next operation. If you choose no memory, the PLC process will
be performed every time the inverter is started.
The PLC power-down memory is to record the current simple PLC running times (F18.10),
running stage (F18.11), and running time at the current stage (F18.12) before the memory is
powered off. The inverter will continue to run from the memory stage when the inverter is
powered on again. If you choose no memory, the PLC process will be performed every time the
inverter is powered on.
Function Default
code setting
Simple PLC time 0: s (second)
F08.18 0 ●
unit 1: min (minute)
In order to meet different working conditions, the running time involved in the PLC
function is set to a numerical value. Its specific meaning needs to be set in conjunction with the
simple PLC time unit (F08.18). At present, there are two types of unit: second and minute.
Function Default
code setting
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Tens place: Acceleration and
Setting of the first
F08.19 deceleration time options 0 ●
segment
0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
211
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.20 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
first segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
deceleration time options
Setting of the second 0: acceleration and
F08.21 0 ●
segment deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.22 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
second segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the third 0: acceleration and
F08.23 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.24 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
third segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
Setting of the fourth 0: forward
F08.25 0 ●
segment 1: reverse
212
0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.26 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fourth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the fifth 0: acceleration and
F08.27 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.28 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fifth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the sixth 0: acceleration and
F08.29 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.30 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
sixth segment
F08.31 Setting of the Ones place: Running 0 ●
213
seventh segment direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.32 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
seventh segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the eighth 0: acceleration and
F08.33 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.34 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
eighth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the nineth deceleration time options
F08.35 0 ●
segment 0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
214
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.36 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
ninth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the tenth 0: acceleration and
F08.37 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.38 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
tenth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the 0: acceleration and
F08.39 0 ●
eleventh segment deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.40 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
eleventh segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
Setting of the twelve
F08.41 1: reverse 0 ●
segment
0: acceleration and
215
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.42 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
twelfth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
F08.43 0 ●
thirteenth segment deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.44 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
thirteenth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
F08.45 0 ●
fourteenth segment deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.46 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fourteenth segment
Setting of the Ones place: Running
F08.47 0 ●
fifteenth segment direction options
216
0: forward
1: reverse
0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.48 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fifteenth segment
When the simple PLC is running, the operating frequency, operating direction,
acceleration/deceleration time and operating time in the entire segment can be set separately.
This is described below with the 13th segment (the last segment) as an example. The specific
operation is shown in Fig. 7-.
F08.12=50.00: the operating frequency of 13th segment is 50.00Hz.
F08.43=31: the operating direction in the 13th segment is reverse, and the acceleration and
deceleration are controlled based on the acceleration and deceleration time 4 (F15.07/F15.08).
F08.44=5.0: the operating time in the 13th segment is 5.0s (F08.18=0 by default).
7.10 PID Function Parameter Group of F09 Group

The EM730/EM730E series inverter has a process PID function, as described in this
section. Process PID control is mainly for pressure control, flow control and temperature
control.
Kp
+
+

Ref KpKi Out
+ Ts
+
d
Fdb KpKdTs
dt
Fig. 7-27 Block Diagram of Process PID
217
PID control is a kind of closed-loop control. The output signal (Out) of the object
controlled by the system is fed back to the PID controller, and the output of the controller is
adjusted after PID operation, thus forming one or more closed loops. This function is to make
the output value (Out) of the object controlled by the system consistent with the set target value
(Ref). The specific block diagram is shown in Fig. 7-27.
The PID controller is used for control by calculating the control quantity with three
calculation factors, i.e. proportion (P), integral (I) and differential (D), according to the
difference between the set target (Ref) and feedback signal (Fdb). The features of each
calculation factor are as follows:
Proportion (P):
Proportional control is one of the simplest control modes. The output of the controller is
proportional to the input error signal. When only proportional control is enabled, there are
steady-state errors in the system output.
Integral (I):
In the integral control mode, the output of the controller is proportional to the integral of
the input error signal. Steady-state errors can be eliminated, so that the system has no
steady-state errors while operating in the steady state. However, drastic changes cannot be
tracked.
Differential (D):
In the differential control mode, the output of the controller is proportional to the
differential (i.e. change rate of the error) of the input error signal. This can predict the trend of
changes in errors, quickly respond to drastic changes, and improve the dynamic features of the
system in the control process.
Function Default
code setting
0: digital PID setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
F09.00 PID setting source 4: retention 0 〇
5: PULSE, high-frequency
pulse (X5)
6: communication setting
(percentage setting)
0.0 to PID setting feedback
F09.01 Digital PID setting 0.0 ●
range F09.03
PID setting feedback
F09.03 0.1 - 6000.0 100.0 ●
range
F09.00=0: digital PID setting F09.01
218
The PID setting depends on the digital PID setting (F09.01), and the specific percentage is
F09.01/F09.03 * 100.00%.
F09.00=1:AI1
F09.00=2:AI2
For the details of AI1 to AI2, refer to the description of F00.04. For PID setting, the
percentage is directly given, and the maximum output is 100.00%.
F09.00=5: PULSE high-frequency pulse (X5)
The set percentage of PID is directly dependent on the HDI (percentage).
For the details of AI1-AI2 and X5, see the description of F00.04. When used as the PID
setting, the percentage will directly turn the set value, and the maximum output is 100.00%.
The percentage of PID setting depends directly on the communication (percentage).
slave (F10.06=0), the specific setting percentage is “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient)”, and the
700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 12-31.
 For the general communication (F10.05=0), the specific setting percentage is “7004H
(communication setting of process PID setting)”, and the 7004H data range is
-100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 12-31.
Function Default
code setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
F09.02 PID feedback source 4: retention 1 〇
5: PULSE, high-frequency
pulse (X5)
F09.02=1:AI1
F09.02=2: AI2
The PID feedback percentage is directly dependent on the AI (percentage).
For the details of AI1 to AI2, see the description of F00.04. When is used as the PID
feedback, the percentage will directly turn the feedback value, and the maximum output is
219
100.00%.
F09.02=5: PULSE high-frequency pulse (X5)
The set percentage of PID is directly dependent on the HDI (percentage).
For the details of AI1-AI2 and X5, see the description of F00.04. When used as the PID
setting, the percentage will directly turn the set value, and the maximum output is 100.00%.
The PID feedback percentage is directly dependent on the communication (percentage).
slave (F10.06=0), the specific feedback percentage is “700FH (master-slave
 For the general communication (F10.05=0), the specific feedback percentage is “7005H
(communication setting of process PID feedback)”, and the 7005H data range is
-100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 12-31.
Function Default
code setting
PID positive and
0: positive
F09.04 negative action 0 〇
1: negative
selection
The process PID action mode depends jointly on the setting of the function code F09.04
and the status of the input function “44: PID positive/negative action switching”, as detailed in
Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 Description of PID Positive/Negative Action
F09.04 44: PID positive/negative Mode of action Note
switching
0 0 Positive action Both the deviation and
output are positive.
0 1 Negative action The deviation is positive
and the output is negative.
1 0 Negative action The deviation is positive
and the output is negative.
1 1 Positive action Both the deviation and
output are positive.
Note: The deviation in PID control is usually “setting - feedback”.
 When the feedback signal is greater than the PID setting, the output frequency of the
220
inverter should decrease for PID balance. Take the water supply control as an
example. When the pressure increases, the pressure feedback will increase. The
output frequency of the inverter must be decreased to reduce the pressure and
keep the constant pressure. In this case, the PID should be set to the positive
action.
 When the feedback signal is greater than the PID setting, the output frequency of the
inverter needs to increase for PID balance. Take temperature control as an
example. The PID regulator needs to be set to negative action to control the
temperature.
Function Default
code setting
F09.05 Proportional gain 1 0.00-100.00 0.40 ●
0.000 to 30.000; 0.000: no
F09.06 Integral time 1 s 2.000 ●
integral
F09.07 Differential time 1 0.000-30.000 ms 0.000 ●
F09.08 Proportional gain 2 0.00-100.00 0.40 ●
0.000 to 30.000; 0.000: no
F09.09 Integral time 2 s 2.000 ●
integral
F09.10 Differential time 2 0.000-30.000 ms 0.000 ●
0: no switching
1: switching via digital input
terminal
PID parameter
F09.11 2: automatic switching 0 ●
switching conditions
according to deviation
3: Automatic switching by
frequency
PID parameter
F09.12 switching deviation 0.00 - F09.13 % 20.00 ●
1
PID parameter
F09.13 switching deviation F09.12 - 100.00 % 80.00 ●
2
For a variety of complex scenes, two sets of PID parameters have been introduced into the
process PID module. Switching or linear interpolation of the two sets of parameters can be
performed according to the function setting (F09.11) and input conditions [e.g. input function
“43: PID parameter switching”, and deviation e(k)). See the instruction Table 7-15 for details.
221
Table 7-15 Description of PID Parameter Options

Method
Description
F09.11 Other conditions
0 -- PID parameters are not switched. The first group of
parameters is used.
43: PID parameter PID parameters are switched via the digital input terminal
switching (43: PID parameter switching).
1
0 Invalid switching, the first group of parameters
1 Valid switching, the second group of parameters
|e（k）| - F09.12/13 PID parameters are automatically switched according to the
deviation.
|e(k)|< F09.12 The first group of parameters
2
|e(k)|< F09.13 The second group of parameters
According to the deviation, linear interpolation is performed
Middle
based on the two groups of parameters.
|P|~F09.12/13 PID parameters are automatically switched by frequency.
|P|< F09.12 The first group of parameters
|P|> F09.13 The second group of parameters
3
According to the frequency, linear interpolation is
Middle
performed based on the two groups of parameters.
As described in the table, when the function code F09.11 is set to 0, the PID parameters
will not be switched, and the first group of parameters (F09.05 to F09.07) will prevail; when the
function code is set to 1, the PID parameters will be selected according to the status of the input
function “43: PID parameter switching”; when the function code 2 is used, the PID parameters
will be selected according to the absolute value |e(k)| (=|setting-feedback|) of the current
deviation and the relationship between the function codes F09.12 and F09.13, or the linear
difference may be used; when the function code 3 is used, processing is similar to that of the
option 2, the PID parameters will be selected according to the percentage of the current output
frequency to maximum frequency |P| = (output frequency/maximum frequency * 100%) and the
relationship between the function codes F09.12 and F09.13, or the linear difference may be
used.
In the case of “F09.12≤|e(k)|≤F09.13”, the current PID parameters are obtained through
linear interpolation of the first and second groups of parameters. The specific principle is shown
by the intermediate segment in Fig. 9-28
222
PID
parameters
Parameter 2
Parameter 1
|Deviation|
0 Switching Switching 100.00%
deviation 1 deviation 2
Fig. 9-28 Schematic Diagram of Automatic Switching of PID Parameters based on Deviation
(F19.11=2)
Function Default
code setting
F09.14 Initial PID value 0.00-100.00 % 0.00 ●
PID initial value
F09.15 0.00～650.00 s 0.00 ●
holding time
The inverter starts running, and the process PID module constantly outputs the initial PID
value (F09.14) for the initial PID holding time (F09.15). Then the output is adjusted by the PID
based on the deviation. Specific effects are shown in Fig. 9-29.
When the initial PID holding time is set to 0.00s, i.e. F09.15=0.00, the initial PID output
function will be invalid.
223
Output
frequency
Initial PID
value
(F09.14)
Time
0 Holding time of initial
PID value (F09.15)
Fig. 9-29 Schematic Diagram of Initial PID Output
Function Default
code setting
Upper limit of PID
F09.16 F09.17 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
output
Lower limit of PID
F09.17 –100.0 - F09.16 % 0.0 ●
output
The PID output is limited. The output range of the PID module in the whole process is
(F09.17, F09.16). That is, if the actual adjustment result is beyond this range, the output will be
based on the boundaries.

code name setting
F09.18 PID deviation limit 0.00-100.00 (0.00: invalid) % 0.00 ●
When the deviation between the PID setting and feedback is less than or equal to the
deviation limit (F09.18), the PID will stop the adjustment. When the deviation between the
setting and feedback is smaller, the output frequency will remain stable. This is valid for some
closed-loop control applications.
224
If the input terminal function “41: process PID pause” is valid, the PID will also
stop the adjustment. Users need to use these two modes together.

code name setting
PID differential
F09.19 0.00-100.00 % 5.00 ●
limit
The differential (D) component of the PID regulator must not be greater than the PID
differential limit (F09.19), in order to avoid the excessive deviation and output at a certain
moment to cause system oscillations. If this value is set correctly, the impact of sudden
interference on the system can be well suppressed.

code name setting
PID integral
0.00-100.00 (100.00% =
F09.20 separation % 100.00 ●
invalid integral separation)
threshold
For better PID regulation, only PD or P adjustment is needed sometimes, while integral
adjustment is not needed. For this reason, the EM730/EM730E series inverter has a special
integral separation function. When the deviation between the PID setting and feedback is greater
than the PID integral separation threshold (F09.20), the integral separation will be valid. That is,
the integral (I) adjustment of the PID regulator will be suspended. To facilitate remote control,
the input terminal function “42: process PID integration pause” can be used. But if the function
code setting is invalid (F09.20=100.00), the input terminal function will not work, as detailed in
Table 7-16.
Table 7-16 Description of Integral Separation Function
Method Description
F09.20 DI(42) F09.20: PID integral separation threshold; DI (42): Process PID
integral pause
100.00% -- The integral (I) is always valid.
Depending on the relationship between |e(k)| and F09.20 as well
0.00%
as the status of the DI function
~
Invalid If |e(k)|>F09.20, the integral separation is valid.
99.99%
Valid The integral separation is valid.
Function Function code Parameter description Unit Default Attribute
225
code name setting
PID setting change
F09.21 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
The PID setting change time refers to the time required for the setting to change from 0.0%
to 100.0%, similar to the acceleration and deceleration time function. When the PID setting
changes, the actual PID setting will change linearly, thus reducing the impact of sudden changes
on the system. Smoothing is invalid during the initial setting. The setting will change from the
current feedback value during the start.

code name setting
PID feedback
F09.22 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
filtering time
PID output
F09.23 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
filtering time
F09.22 is used to filter the PID feedback. This is helpful to reduce the impact of
interference on the feedback, but will cause the decline of the response performance of the
process closed-loop system.
F09.23 is used to filter the PID output. This is helpful to reduce the sudden changes in the
output frequency of the inverter, but will also cause the decline of the response performance of
the process closed-loop system.
Function Default
code setting
Upper limit detection 0.00-100.00; 100.00 =
F09.24 value of PID feedback invalid feedback % 100.00 ●
disconnection disconnection
Lower limit detection
0.00-100.00; 0.00 = invalid
F09.25 value of PID feedback % 0.00 ●
feedback disconnection
disconnection
Detection time of PID
F09.26 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
feedback disconnection
The function of PID feedback disconnection detection is to prevent galloping caused by
feedback disconnection. Depending on the nature of the feedback sensor, the settings are
different.
If the 0.0% type sensor is fed back at the time of disconnection, the lower limit of PID
feedback disconnection detection (F09.25) needs to be set to an appropriate value. If the
feedback amount is below the F09.25 setting and has been maintained for the PID feedback
226
disconnection detection time (F09.26), the PID feedback will be regarded disconnected. When
the 100.0% type sensor is fed back at the time of disconnection, the upper limit of PID feedback
disconnection detection (F09.24) needs to be set to an appropriate value. If the feedback amount
is greater than the feedback amount and has been maintained for the time corresponding to
F09.26, the PID feedback will be regarded disconnected.
★ Once the feedback sensor is determined, only the corresponding detection mode can
be applied. The upper limit detection and lower limit detection cannot be enabled at the
same time.
code name setting
0: Invalid
1: sleep at zero speed
PID sleep control
F09.27 2: sleep at lower frequency 0 ●
options
limit
3: sleep with tube sealed
0.00-100.00 (100.00
F09.28 Sleep action point corresponds to the PID setting % 100.00 ●
feedback range)
F09.29 Sleep delay time 0.0 - 6500.0 s 0.0 ●
0.00-100.00 (100.00
Wake-up action
F09.30 corresponds to the PID setting % 0.00 ●
point
feedback range)
Wake-up delay
F09.31 0.0 - 6500.0 s 0.0 ●
time
When the output value and feedback value tend to be stable or the controlled quantity is
within the allowable range on some occasions or at a certain moment, and the output is not
allowed, the sleep status can be applied for a short time. If the controlled quantity is beyond the
control range, the inverter will be awakened and generate the output. These steps will be
repeated to make the controlled quantity within the allowable range and also save the energy.
The detailed function description is shown in Table 7-17.
Table 7-17 Description of Sleep/Wake-up Function
Method
Mode of State Description
action
Positive Judgment of the sleep conditions: If the |Feedback| is greater than
action Normal the sleep action point (F09.28) (necessary condition: the feedback
(e.g. work pressure must be greater than or equal to the set pressure during
constant restart after the stop or sleep), or the output frequency of the
227
pressure inverter reaches the lower limit, causing the failure to continue to
control) decelerate (due to the lower frequency limit or lower output limit of
the inverter), and these conditions have been met and maintained to
the sleep delay time (F09.29), the sleep status will be enabled.
★： The PID continues the output during the delay period. The
output depends on the function code after the delay period.
Judgment of the wake-up conditions: If the |Feedback| is less than
or equal to the value of the wake-up action point (F09.30), and this
has been maintained for the wake-up delay time (F09.31), the sleep
Sleep
status will be disabled.
status
★: The output depends on the function code during the delay
period; and the PID can continue normal output after the delay
period.
Judgment of the sleep conditions: If the |Feedback| is less than the
sleep action point (F09.28) (necessary condition: the feedback
pressure must be lower than or equal to the set pressure during
restart after the stop or sleep), or the output frequency of the
Normal inverter reaches the lower limit, causing the failure to continue to
work decelerate (due to the lower frequency limit or lower output limit of
Negative
the inverter), and these conditions have been met and maintained to
action
the sleep delay time (F09.29), the sleep status will be enabled.
(e.g.
★： The PID continues the output during the delay period. The
constant
output depends on the function code after the delay period.
temperature
Judgment of the wake-up conditions: If the |Feedback| is greater
control)
than or equal to the value of the wake-up action point (F09.30), and
this has been maintained for the wake-up delay time (F09.31), the
Sleep
sleep status will be disabled.
status
★: The output depends on the function code during the delay
period; and the PID can continue normal output after the delay
period.
Suggestion: F09.28 (sleep action point) is greater than or equal to F09.30 (wake-up action point)
during the positive action, and less than or equal to F09.30 (wake-up action point) during the
negative action.

code name setting
Multi-segment 0.0 to PID setting feedback range
F09.32 0.0 ●
PID setting 1 F09.03
F09.33 0.0 ●
228
F09.34 0.0 ●
PID settings are determined in conjunction with the setting of the function code F09.00. The
EM730/EM730E series inverter has a multi-segment PID setting function, and its switching
conditions are mainly dependent on the input functions “15: multi-segment PID terminal 1” and
“16: multi-segment PID terminal 2”, as detailed in Table 7-16.
Table 7-18 Details of Multi-segment PID Setting Function
Method
Setting Scope PID Setting
16 15 F09.00
0 F09.01 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%
1 AI1 -100.00% - 100.00% -100.00% - 100.00%
Invalid Invalid
2 AI2 -100.00% - 100.00% -100.00% - 100.00%
6 485 -100.00% - 100.00% -100.00% - 100.00%
Invalid Valid -- F09.32 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%
Valid Invalid -- F09.33 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%
Valid Valid -- F09.34 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%

code name setting
Upper limit of Lower limit of feedback voltage to
F09.35 V 10.00 ●
feedback voltage 10.00
Lower limit of 0.00 to upper limit of feedback
F09.36 V 0.00 ●
feedback voltage voltage
The upper and lower limits of the feedback voltage can be used for automatic material
cutoff detection in winding applications. They represent the upper and lower limits of material
cutoff, respectively. Due to the particularity of winding applications, F09.35 and F09.36 can be
used to reflect the real sensor boundaries, which is more conducive to the system stability.
code name setting
0: Always calculate the integral term
Options of integral
1: Calculate the integral term after
action within the
F09.37 the F09.21 set time is reached 0 ●
set change time of
2: Calculate the integral term when
PID
the error is less than F09.38
Input deviation of
integral action
F09.38 0.00-100.00 % 30.00 ●
within the set
change time of PID
229
F09.37=0: always calculate the integral term

This function code does not affect the integral action.
F09.37=1: calculate the integral term after the F09.21 set time is reached
The integral is unavailable within the first change period (F09.21) after startup.
F09.37=2: calculate the integral term when the error is less than F09.38
The integral is unavailable within the first change period (F09.21) after startup. However, the
integral will be enabled again if the error is less than F09.38 within this period.
code name setting
0: target pressure F09.01*
F09.39 Wake-up option coefficient of wake-up action point 0 〇
1: Wake-up action point (F09.30)
Coefficient of
0.0-100.0 (100% corresponds to PID
F09.40 wake-up action % 90.0 ●
setting)
point
F09.39=0: target pressure F09.01* coefficient of wake-up action point
F09.40* preset
F09.39=1: wake-up action point (F09.30)
The PID will wake up if the value is less than the wake-up point (F09.30) and kept for the
wake-up delay time (F09.31).
code name setting
Pipeline network
F09.41 0.0 to pressure sensor range F09.03 % 90.0 ●
alarm overpressure
Overpressure
F09.42 0-3600 (0: invalid) bar 6 ●
protection time
It is dedicated to the water pump application macro. When the overpressure of the pipeline
network reaches the value of F09.41 and kept for the set time (F09.42), the E57 pipeline
network overpressure protection will be reported.
code name setting
0: no limit
F09.43 PID reverse limit 0 〇
1: limit
It is dedicated to the straight wire drawing machine of the winding and unwinding application
micro. When F27.00 is set to the option 3 (straight wire drawing machine) and the feedback
230
signal is the maximum value for a long time after startup, the system will be adjusted by PID to
the negative output.
F09.43=0: No limit
When the output is reduced to 0, it will not be limited and may continue to decrease.
F09.43=1: limit
When the output is reduced to 0, it will be limited and not continue to decrease.
7.11 Communication Function Parameter Group of F10 Group

The EM730/EM730E series inverter supports the RTU format Modbus protocol, and the
“single-master multi-slave” communication network with RS-485 bus.
Function Default
code setting
Local Modbus
F10.00 1-247; 0: broadcast address 1 〇
communication address
For the entire communication network, the inverter as a slave must have its own unique
address. Its setting range is 1 to 247. That is, a network supports 247 slave stations at most.
★ 0 is the broadcast address, which does not need to be set. All slave inverters can be
recognized.
The slaves and hosts attached to the same network must follow the same sending and
receiving principles (e.g. baud rate, data format, and protocol format) to ensure normal
communication. Hence, there are three corresponding function codes, i.e. F10.01 (baud rate),
F10.02 (data format) and F10.10 (protocol format, Modbus-RTU protocol by default for the
EM730/EM730E series inverter). The devices connected to the network must have the same
settings.

code name setting
0:4800
1:9600
Baud rate of
2:19200
F10.01 Modbus bps 1 〇
3:38400
communication
4:57600
5:115200
During the communication based on the Modbus-RTU protocol, the EM730/EM730E
series inverter supports six different baud rates in bps (bit/s). Take F10.01=9600bps as an
example. It means that data is transmitted at a rate of 9600bits per second. By default, each byte
consists of valid 8-bit data (such as 0x01). When 10-bit data needs to be transmitted in the actual
231
situation, the transmission time is about 1.04ms (approximately 1.04167ms=10bit/9600bps).

0: 1-8-N-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
stop bit)
1: 1-8-E-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
even parity check bit + 1 stop bit)
2: 1-8-O-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
Modbus data odd parity check bit + 1 stop bit)
F10.02 0 〇
format 3: 1-8-N-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 2
stop bits)
4: 1-8-E-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
even parity check bit + 2 stop bits)
5: 1-8-O-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
odd parity check bit + 2 stop bits)
In the UART transmission, the data usually consists of a start bit, valid data (8 bits by
default), check bit (optional), and a stop bit. The EM730/EM730E series inverter supports six
data formats according to the Modbus-RTU combinations in communication.
Start Bit Valid Data Check Bit Stop Bit
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 N/O/E 1
If F10.02=0, it means that the current data consists of one start bit + eight data bits + no
check bit + one stop bit.
★ N (NONE): no parity; E (EVEN): even parity; O (ODD), odd parity.
In order to meet different needs, the inverter also supports communication timeout and
response delay during the communication based on the Modbus protocol.

code name setting
Modbus
0.0 to 60.0; 0.0: invalid (also
F10.03 communication s 0.0 ●
valid for master-slave mode)
timeout
As shown in Fig. 7-30, the communication time interval △t is defined as the period from
the previous reception of valid data frames by the slave station (inverter) to next reception of
valid data frames. If △t is greater than the set time (depending on the function code F10.03; this
function is invalid if set to 0), it will be regarded communication timeout.
232
1# 2# 3# 1#
Send Return Return Send Return Send Return

△t
Fig. 7-30 Schematic Diagram of Communication Timeout

Example of this function: If the master station must send data to a slave station (e.g. #1)
within a certain period, you can use the communication timeout function of #1 slave station and
set F10.03>T. The communication timeout protection will not be triggered during normal
communication. However, if the master station does not send data to #1 slave station within the
specified time T, and this lasts for more than the set value of F10.03, a communication
protection (E16) will be reported. Once informed of the “communication protection of #1 slave
station”, the staff can conduct troubleshooting.
★ The set value of F10.03 must be greater than the set time T, but must not be too large, in
order to avoid adverse effects arising from too long operation in the protection status.
★ F10.03 should be set to be invalid under normal circumstances. This parameter will be
set only in the continuous communication system to monitor the communication.
code name setting
Modbus response
F10.04 1 - 20 ms 2 ●
delay
The response delay (twait2) is defined as the time interval from the reception of the valid
data frame 1 by the inverter to data parsing and return. To ensure the stable operation of the
protocol chip, the response delay should be set within 1-20ms (it must not be set to 0). If the
communication data involves EEPROM operation, the actual response delay time will be
extended, i.e. “EEPROM operation time + F10.04”.
1: valid data frame: sent by the external master station to inverter, in which the function code,
data length and CRC are correct.
Fig. 7-31 shows the data sending segment (tsend), sending end segment (twait1),
75176-to-sending wait segment (twait2), data return segment (treturn), and 75176-to-receiving wait
segment (twait3).
233
twait 3
twait 2
tsend twait 1 treturn
Fig. 7-31 Timing Parse Diagram of Complete Data Frame
Function Default
code setting
Options of master-slave
0: Invalid
F10.05 communication 0 〇
1: valid
function
0: slave
F10.06 Master-slave options 1: host (Modbus protocol 0 〇
broadcast transmission)
0: output frequency
1: set frequency
2: output torque
F10.07 Data sent by host 1 〇
3: set torque
4: PID setting
5: output current
Proportional factor of
F10.08 0.00-10.00 (multiple) 1.00 ●
slave reception
F10.09 Host sending interval 0.000-30.000 s 0.200 ●
The EM730/EM730E series inverter supports the master-slave communication function.
That is, one inverter works as the host and others as slaves. The slaves work according to the
command sent by the host, so that these inverters can work synchronously.
 The inverter used as the host is set as follows:
F10.05=1: enable the master-slave communication function;
F10.06=1 or 2: select the current inverter as the host (only one inverter can be set as
the host in a network);
F10.07: select the variable to be synchronized, such as the output current (set
F10.07=5).
 The inverter is used as the slave is set as follows:
234
F10.05=1: enable the master-slave communication function;
F10.06=0: select the current inverter as the slave;
Select one setting as the communication setting. If F09.00=6 is set and the process PID is
set separately (F00.05=10, F00.06=1), the slave inverter will be set to the host output
current for PID adjustment.
You can set the receiving proportional coefficient (F10.08) to determine how the slave
inverter receives data. If F10.08=0.80 is set, the final application data is “Recv (received data) *
0.80 (F10.08)”.
Functio Default
n code setting
0-10: default operation (for
commissioning)
Options of 485
F10.56 11: writing not triggered 0 〇
EEPROM writing
(available after
commissioning)
For the application “PLC controller/HMI + inverter”, you can set F10.56=11 after
debugging. Then all write data of PLC communication will not be stored, which can avoid
damage to the memory.
If you need parameter settings and power-down storage, set F10.56=0 first.
Function Default
code setting
0: Reply to both read and
write commands
1: Reply to write
F10.59 SCI response option 0 〇
commands only
2: No reply to both read
and write commands
F10.59=0: During the Modbus communication with the upper computer, both read and
write parameters will be returned to the upper computer.
F10.59=1: During the Modbus communication with the upper computer, the read
parameters will be returned to the upper computer, while the write parameters will not.
F10.59=2: During the Modbus communication with the upper computer, both read and
write parameters will not be returned to the upper computer. This can improve the
communication efficiency.
235
7.12 User-selected Parameter Group of F11 Group

The keyboard of the EM730/EM730E series inverter supports the user-selected function.
First, the user should select specific function codes by setting the parameters of the F11 group.
Then the user-selected mode (--U--, as detailed in 4.2.2) can be enabled. The selected function
codes can be switched cyclically by turning the digital potentiometer key . This function is
mainly used where less than 32 specific function codes are involved, which can avoid the
trouble caused by too many function codes.
code name setting
User-selected
F11.00 U00.00 ●
parameter 1
User-selected
F11.01 U00.01 ●
parameter 2
User-selected
F11.02 U00.02 ●
parameter 3
User-selected
F11.03 U00.03 ●
parameter 4
User-selected
F11.04 U00.04 ●
parameter 5
User-selected
F11.05 U00.07 ●
parameter 6
User-selected The displayed content is
F11.06 U00.14 ●
parameter 7 Uxx.xx, which means that the
User-selected Fxx.xx function code is
F11.07 U00.15 ●
parameter 8 selected. If the F11.00 function
User-selected code is enabled, the keyboard
F11.08 U00.16 ●
parameter 9 will display U00.00, indicating
User-selected the first optional parameter
F11.09 U00.18 ●
parameter 10 F00.00.
User-selected
F11.10 U00.19 ●
parameter 11
User-selected
F11.11 U00.29 ●
parameter 12
User-selected
F11.12 U02.00 ●
parameter 13
User-selected
F11.13 U02.01 ●
parameter 14
User-selected
F11.14 U02.02 ●
parameter 15
User-selected
F11.15 U03.00 ●
parameter 16
236
User-selected
F11.16 U03.02 ●
parameter 17
User-selected
F11.17 U03.21 ●
parameter 18
User-selected
F11.18 U04.00 ●
parameter 19
User-selected
F11.19 U04.20 ●
parameter 20
User-selected
F11.20 U05.00 ●
parameter 21
User-selected
F11.21 U05.03 ●
parameter 22
User-selected
F11.22 U05.04 ●
parameter 23
User-selected
F11.23 U08.00 ●
parameter 24
User-selected
F11.24 U19.00 ●
parameter 25
User-selected
F11.25 U19.01 ●
parameter 26
User-selected
F11.26 U19.02 ●
parameter 27
User-selected
F11.27 U19.03 ●
parameter 28
User-selected
F11.28 U19.04 ●
parameter 29
User-selected
F11.29 U19.05 ●
parameter 30
User-selected
F11.30 U19.06 ●
parameter 31
User-selected
F11.31 U19.12 ●
parameter 32
F11.00=U00.00, indicating that the first user-selected parameter is the function code
F00.00. The function codes in the user-selected mode of the keyboard are switched according to
the function code order from F11.00 to F11.31.
237
7.13 Keyboard and Display Function Parameter Group of F12 Group

code name setting
0: no function
1: forward jog
M.K 2: reverse jog
F12.00 multi-function key 3: forward/reverse switching 1 〇
options 4: quick stop
5: free stop
6: cursor movement to the left
M.K is a multi-function key, of which the function can be performed by setting the
function code F12.00. If F12.00=0, this key has no effect when pressed. For other settings, the
corresponding effects will be obtained when this key is pressed.
Function Default
code setting
0: valid only in keyboard
Options of stop control
F12.01 1 〇
function of STOP key 1: with all command
channels valid
According to the setting of the function code F00.02 (command source option), the
command sources are divided into the keyboard, terminal and communication. If the terminal is
selected as the current command source, the Run and Stop key on the keyboard
will be unavailable. In more dangerous cases, however, the fastest way is to stop the inverter via
the Stop key on the keyboard to resolve dangers. It is the most convenient to use the
keyboard to stop the inverter during normal operation. Therefore, the function code “F12.01:
stop function options of the STOP key” is added. In addition, the STOP key is always valid by
default.
★ It is recommended not to modify this parameter. If necessary, please set it carefully.

code name setting
0: do not lock
1: reference input not locked
F12.02 Parameter locking 0 ●
2: all locked, except for this
function code
In order to avoid unnecessary danger caused by keyboard operation or misoperation of
238
non-workers, the keyboard has a parameter locking function. The current function code is
unlocked by default, and all function codes can be set. After the function code is debugged
according to the working conditions, the parameters can be locked.
 1: reference input not locked
In the lock mode, all function codes cannot be modified, expect this function code and those
with reference input properties. Specific function codes with parameter input properties are
shown in Table 7-19:
Table 7-19 List of Function Codes with Reference Input Properties

Function code Function code name Function code Function code name
F00.07 Digital frequency setting F08.11 Multi-segment speed 12
F08.00 Multi-segment speed 1 F08.12 Multi-segment speed 13
F08.03 Multi-segment speed 4 F13.02 Digital torque setting
F08.04 Multi-segment speed 5 F09.01 Digital PID setting
F08.05 Multi-segment speed 6 F09.32 Multi-segment PID setting 1
F08.08 Multi-segment speed 9 F13.03 Multi-segment torque 1
F08.09 Multi- speed 10 F13.04 Multi-segment torque 2
F08.10 Multi-segment speed 11 F13.05 Multi-segment torque 3
 2: all locked, except for this function code

In the lock mode, all function codes cannot be set except this function code. This mode is
mostly used when it is not necessary to set parameters after debugging. We can only perform
running, stop and parameter monitoring in this mode.
We can press the ESC key to enable the monitoring mode (see 4.4When the
inverter is in the protection status, you can directly press the right shift key to switch the
current protection type and the output frequency, output current, output voltage, running status
and working time during the protection.
Operation Monitoring: press the right shift key to display the parameters in cycles.
The function codes F12.04 to F12.08 are used to select the parameters to be displayed in the
cycle display queue. The selected items basically correspond to the monitoring parameter group
of the F18 group, so you can directly view the current values of all parameters in the F18 group.
239
This function is mainly conducive to parameter display, especially during operation.
By default, several common items are included in the cycle display queue, including the
output frequency (F18.00), set frequency (F18.01), output current (F18.06), output voltage
(F18.08) and DC bus voltage (F18.09). Please set the corresponding bit to 1 to select other
display parameters and 0 to hide the selected parameters.
★ Some bits of the function codes for display parameter selection are reserved. Please
set them carefully.
Default
setting
F12.03 0: No operation
Parameter copying 1: parameter upload to keyboard 0 〇
2: Download parameters to inverter
Where several inverters need to run with the same parameter settings, we can debug one
inverter first, set it to F12.03=1 to upload the set parameters to the keyboard for temporary
storage and finally set the other inverters to F12.03=2 to download the parameters to these
inverters. This function can be applied to quickly set the parameters of several inverters. Even if
some parameter settings are different, this function can be applied to set multiple function codes
before setting by other means.
Function Default
code setting
Load speed display
F12.09 0.01～600.00 30.00 ●
coefficient
The inverter output is mostly displayed in the frequency form. To set the current load speed
(F18.13), you can change the current parameter from frequency output to speed output based on
the actual working conditions, so that F18.14 displays the current load speed correctly.
If F12.09=30.00 (related to the number of motor pole pairs, transmission ratio and the like),
the output frequency (0.00 to 50.00 Hz) corresponds to the load speed (0 to 1500 rpm).
Function Default
code setting
UP/DOWN
0.00: automatic rate
F12.10 acceleration and Hz/s 5.00 〇
0.01 - 500.00
deceleration rate
Options of
F12.11 0: do not clear 0 〇
UP/DOWN offset
240
clearing 1: clear in non-running state
2: clear when UP/DOWN invalid
Options of
0: do not save
UP/DOWN
F12.12 1: save (valid after the offset is 1 〇
power-down saving
modified)
of offset
The UP/DOWN functions are mainly divided into the keyboard UP/DOWN and terminal
UP/DOWN, which are handled separately and can be enabled at the same time.
 Keyboard UP/DOWN: It is valid in the Level 0 monitoring menu. When the current
setting is not the digital potentiometer setting, the UP function can be performed by
forward spinning of the digital potentiometer via the keyboard and the DOWN
function by reverse spinning.
 During the forward or reverse spinning of the digital potentiometer under the monitoring
menu, the offset frequency will increase/decrease at the rate of F12.10, the keyboard
will display “F18.01: set frequency”, and the final frequency will be the set frequency
plus offset frequency. The keyboard will have the normal display 2 s after the key is
released.
 Terminal UP/DOWN: After the digital input port is set to the corresponding function,
terminal control will be enabled.
When the UP/DOWN terminal is valid, the offset frequency will increase/decrease at the
rate of F12.10 and the final frequency is the set frequency plus offset frequency. The
display content of the keyboard remains unchanged during this period.
★ When the keyboard UP and terminal DOWN are valid at the same time, or the
keyboard DOWN and terminal UP are valid at the same time, despite of the same
acceleration and deceleration rates, the offset frequency will fluctuate because of
different valid moments. This is a normal phenomenon.

Power meter 0: do not clear
F12.13 0 ●
resetting 1: clear
The EM730/EM730E series inverter has a watt-hour meter function (see the description of
the function codes F18.18 and F18.19). The user can set the current function code to 1 to clear
the current count.
241
0: No operation
Restoration 1: restoration of factory defaults (excluding
F12.14 of default the motor parameters, inverter parameters, 0 〇
setting manufacturer parameters, running and
power-on time record)
You can set this parameter to 1 to restore the default settings of all parameters, except the
motor parameters (F01 group), inverter parameters, manufacturer parameters, power-on time
(F12.15/16) and operating time (F12.17, 18).
★ This operation is irreversible. Please set it carefully.
Function Default
code setting
F12.15 Cumulative power-on time (h) 0 - 65535 h 0 ×
F12.16 Cumulative power-on time (min) 0 - 59 min 0 ×
F12.15 and F12.16 are used together to check the cumulative power-on time of the inverter
from delivery to the current moment (you only need to power on the inverter). The cumulative
power-on time is accurate to one minute and nearly 65536 hours (about 7.5 years) at most.
If F12.15=50 and F12.16=33, it means that the current inverter has been powered on for 2
days, 2 hours and 33 minutes.
★ This parameter can be viewed only and cannot be changed or cleared.
Function Default
code setting
F12.17 Cumulative running time (h) 0 - 65535 h 0 ×
F12.18 Cumulative running time (min) 0 - 59 min 0 ×
F12.17 and F12.18 are used together to check the cumulative operating time of the inverter
from delivery to the current moment (the inverter should be in the running status). The
cumulative power-on time is accurate to one minute and nearly 65536 hours (about 7.5 years) at
most.
If F12.17=47 and F12.18=39, it means that the current inverter has been running for 1 day,
23 hours and 39 minutes.
★ This parameter can be viewed only and cannot be changed or cleared.
242
Function Default
code setting
Depending
F12.19 Rated power of inverter 0.40 - 650.00 kW on the ×
motor type
Depending
F12.20 Rated voltage of inverter 60 - 690 V on the ×
motor type
Depending
F12.21 Rated current of inverter 0.1 - 1500.0 A on the ×
motor type
It is used to view the rated power, rated voltage and rated current of the current inverter.
★ This parameter is can be viewed only and cannot be changed.

code name setting
Performance
software S/N 1
Performance
software S/N2
Functional
software S/N 1
Functional
software S/N 2
Keyboard software
serial number 1
Keyboard software
serial number 2
It is used to view the software version of the current inverter.
★ This parameter is can be viewed only and cannot be changed.

Running status display parameter
F12.33 1 of Mode 1 (LED stop status 0.00 - 99.99 18.00 ●
display parameter 5)
F12.35 Running status display parameter 0.00 - 99.99 18.06 ●
243
3 of Mode 1 (LED stop status
F12.32=0: monitoring mode 0. The LED switching display and LCD small-line (7-line)
display are dependent on the settings of the function codes F12.04 to F12.08. For the selected
function codes, please refer to their parameter description.
F12.32=1: monitoring mode 1. The LED switching display and LCD small-line (7-line)
display are dependent on the settings of the function codes F12.33 to F12.37. You can select any
function code. F12.33=18.00 means that the function code F18.00 is displayed.
Function Default
code setting
Options of
0: prohibit zero crossing
F12.41 UP/DOWN zero 0 〇
1: allow zero crossing
crossing
The UP/DOWN function is valid. When F12.41=0, the UP/DOWN function can reduce the
output frequency of the inverter to 0 without reversing. When F12.41=1, the UP/DOWN
function can reduce the output frequency of the inverter to 0, followed by reverse running of the
motor.
For the digital potentiometer setting, see the setting of the main frequency source A.
Function Default
code setting
Frequency setting of 0.00 to maximum frequency
F12.42 Hz 0.00 ×
digital potentiometer F00.16
Digital potentiometer 0.00-|Digital torque setting
F12.43 % 0.0 ×
torque setting F13.02|
244
For the digital potentiometer setting, see the setting of the main frequency source A.
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
UP/DOW Multi-
High-speed Analog Digital
N function * * * Communication segment
F12.45 pulse quantity frequency 〇
options of speed 00000
keyboard 0: Invalid
1: valid
Select the up/down function in the corresponding frequency setting mode.
If the default frequency source is the digital frequency:
In case of F12.45 = 00000, the UP/DOWN function is unavailable, and the set frequency
cannot be changed by the digital potentiometer in the monitoring status.
In case of F12.45 = 00010, the UP/DOWN function is available, and the set frequency of
the main channel can be changed by the digital potentiometer in the monitoring status.
7.14 Torque Control Parameter Group of F13 Group

Function Default
code setting
Speed/torque control 0: Speed control
F13.00 0 〇
options 1: Torque control
F13.00=0: speed control
The control mode is speed input, and the input is frequency.
F13.00=1: torque control
The input control mode is torque input, and the input is the percentage of the rated torque
current of the motor. This is valid only in the mode of speed sensorless vector control (SVC), i.e.
F00.01=1.
The final control mode is also related to the function terminals “29: torque control
prohibition” and “28: speed control/torque control switching” as detailed below Table 7-18.
Table 7-20 Details of Final Control Mode of Inverter
29: torque control 28: speed control/torque
F13.00 Final control
prohibition control switching
Valid * * Speed control
0 Torque control
Valid
1 Speed control
Invalid
0 Speed control
Invalid
1 Torque control
245

code name setting
0: digital torque setting F13.02
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
4: retention
Options of
F13.01 torque setting 0 〇
source
(Full range of the items 1-6,
corresponding to F13.02 digital torque
setting)
7: retention
Digital torque -200.0 to 200.0 (100.0 = the rated
F13.02 % 100.0 ●
setting torque of motor)
F13.01=0: digital torque setting F13.02
The torque depends on F13.02.
F13.01=1:AI1
F13.01=2:AI2
The torque is dependent on AI (percentage) * F13.02.
The torque depends on HDI (percentage)*F13.02.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F13.02 (digital torque setting).
slave (F10.06=0), the specific feedback percentage is “700FH (master-slave
For the general communication (F10.05=0), the specific setting percentage is “7003H
(torque communication setting) * F13.02 (digital torque setting)”, and the 7003H data range
is -200.00% to 200.00%, as detailed in Table 12-31.
246
In the torque mode, the torque is directly set by the digital potentiometer. See F12.43 for
the specific value.
Function Default
code setting
F13.03 Multi-segment torque 1 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
For diversified torque applications, the EM730/EM730E series inverter supports the
multi-segment torque function. Specifically, the input terminal functions “17: multi-segment
torque terminal 1” and “18: multi-segment torque terminal 2” need to be set. See the instruction
Table 7-21 for details.
Table 7-21 Combination of Multi-segment Torque Command and Multi-segment Torque
Terminal
18: multi-segment 17: multi-segment Number of Segments Torque setting
torque terminal 2 torque terminal 1
Invalid Invalid Multi-segment torque 1 Depending on the
F13.01 setting
Invalid Valid Multi-segment torque 2 F13.03
Valid Invalid Multi-segment torque 3 F13.04
Valid Valid Multi-segment torque 4 F13.05
Function Default
code setting
Torque control
F13.06 acceleration and 0.00 - 120.00 s 0.05 ●
deceleration time
The motor speed can be changed gently by setting the acceleration and deceleration time of
torque control.
F13.06 represents the time for the torque current to rise from 0 to the rated torque current
or fall from the rated current to 0.
Function Default
code setting
0: set by F13.09
Upper frequency limit 1: AI1
F13.08 0 〇
options of torque control 2: AI2
3: retention
247
4: retention
5: high frequency pulse
input (X5)
6: communication
percentage setting
7: direct communication
setting
Upper frequency limit of 0.50 to maximum
F13.09 Hz 50.00 ●
torque control frequency F00.16
Upper frequency limit 0.00 to maximum
F13.10 Hz 0.00 ●
offset frequency F00.16
Reverse speed limit
F13.18 0 - 100 % 100 ●
options
Speed priority enabling of 0: Disable
F13.19 1 ●
torque control 1: Enable
F13.08=0: depending on F13.09
The upper frequency limit depends on F13.09 during torque control.
F13.08=1:AI1
F13.08=2:AI2
The upper frequency limit in torque control is AI (percentage) * F13.09.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F13.09 (upper frequency limit of torque
control).
The upper frequency limit in torque control is HDI (percentage) * F13.09.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F13.09(upper limit frequency of torque
control).
F13.08=6 or 7: communication setting
slave (F10.06=0), the upper frequency limit is “700FH (master-slave communication
setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient) * F00.18 (upper frequency
limit)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table
12-31.
248
a、 F13.08=6: the upper frequency limit is “700BH (communication percentage setting of

the upper frequency limit of torque control) * F13.09 (upper frequency limit of torque
control)”;
b、 F13.08=7: the upper frequency limit is “7018H (communication setting of the upper
frequency limit of torque control)”.
The 700BH data range is 0.00% to 200.00%, and the 7018H data range is 0.00 to F00.16
(maximum frequency), as detailed in Table 12-31.
The upper frequency limit of torque control is used to set the maximum forward or
reverse running frequency of the inverter in the torque control mode.
In the torque control mode, if the load torque is less than the output torque of the
motor, the motor speed will rise continuously, and the maximum speed of the motor must
be limited during torque control to prevent the mechanical system from galloping and other
accidents; if the load exceeds the output torque of the motor and even the motor is drive to
run reversely, the maximum operating load frequency of the motor is still restricted in the
case of F13.19=1 and not restricted in the case of F13.19=0.
The upper frequency limit of reverse running is dependent on F13.09 * F13.18.
Example: The torque is set to be positive and the upper frequency limit of torque control is
the AI1 analog input. When the AI1 analog input is positive, the upper frequency limit
corresponding to the forward speed limit is AI1 (percentage) * F13.09 and that corresponding to
the reverse speed limit is AI1 (percentage) * F13.09 * F13.18; and when the AI1 analog input is
negative, the upper frequency limit corresponding to the forward speed limit is AI1 (percentage)
* F13.09 * F13.18 and that corresponding to the reverse speed limit is AI1 (percentage) *
F13.09.
Maximum operating frequency in torque control = upper frequency limit of torque control
+ offset of upper frequency limit (valid only when F13.08=1 to 5), but the maximum operating
frequency is limited by the maximum frequency of F00.16.

F13.11 Static friction torque 0.0-100.0 % 0.0 ●
249
compensation
Frequency range of static
F13.12 0.00 - 50.00 Hz 1.00 ●
friction compensation
Dynamic friction torque
F13.13 0.0-100.0 % 0.0 ●
compensation
When the motor drives an object to move, it is necessary to overcome static/dynamic
friction. You can set this group of parameters to enable the motor rotation at the specified torque
while overcoming the inherent static/dynamic friction. The motor is mainly subject to static
friction before rotation and dynamic friction after starting rotating. In short, the output
performance of the motor is related to this group of parameters.
The specific description of this group of parameters is as follows: “when the actual
frequency (estimate frequency in SVC) is less than or equal to the set value of F13.12, the
output torque is the „set torque + F13.11 static friction torque compensation‟; and when the
actual frequency is greater than the set value of F13.12, the output torque is „set torque + F13.13
dynamic friction torque compensation‟”. The larger the compensation value, the stronger the
compensation force will be. The compensation percentage is equal to the torque setting
percentage.
7.15 Parameter Group of Motor 2 of F14 group

The two motors of the EM730/EM730E series inverter can be switched. For the two motors,
the motor nameplate parameters, encoder parameters and VF control or vector control
parameters can be set separately, and the VF control or vector control can be selected
independently. In addition, the parameters of the two motors can be tuned separately.
All motor parameters in the second group are included in the F14 group, and the function
codes are defined the same as those in the first group. The function codes F14.00 to F14.34
correspond to F01.00 to F01.34, which are motor nameplate parameters, motor parameters and
encoder parameters; the function code F14.35 corresponds to F00.01, which is used to select the
motor drive mode; the function codes F14.36 to F14.76 correspond to F06.00 to F06.40, which
are vector control parameters; and the function code F14.77 is used to select the
acceleration/deceleration time of the motor 2. Only the parameters of F14.72 are described
below. For the rest of the parameters, refer to the relevant parameters of the motor 1.
250
Function Default
code setting
Stiffness coefficient of
F14.52 0~20 12 ●
speed loop of motor 2
In case of any
change in
F14.52, the
default
settings of
F14.36-F14.39
will change
accordingly.
The regulation
intensity of the
PI regulator
for the speed
of the motor 2
can be
adjusted. Default
There are 21 setting
groups of
parameters in
total. The
larger the set
value of
F14.52, the
smaller the
integral time
is, and the
more intense
the speed PID
regulation is.
The smaller
the set value
251
of F14.52, the
weaker the
speed PID
regulation is.
Function code
0: the same as motor 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
Acceleration/deceler 2: acceleration and
F14.77 ation time options of deceleration time 2 0 〇
motor 2 3: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
4: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
F14.77=0: the acceleration/deceleration time of the motor 2 is the same as that of the motor
1. For details, see the description of the function codes F15.03 to F15.09;
F14.77=1/2/3/4: the acceleration/deceleration time of the motor 2 is fixed as the
acceleration/deceleration time 1/2/3/4, corresponding to the function codes F00.14,
F00.15/F15.03, F15.04/F15.05, F15.06/F15.07 and F15.08, respectively.
Function Default
code setting
F14.78 Maximum frequency of motor 2 20.00~600.00 Hz 50 〇
Lower limit frequency
Upper frequency limit of motor
F14.79 F00.19 to maximum Hz 50 ●
2
frequency F14.78
See F00.16 and F00.18
Function Default
code setting
1: multi-point broken line
V/F
2: 1.3-power V/F
3: 1.7-power V/F
V/F curve setting of
F14.80 4: square V/F 0 〇
motor 2
5: VF complete separation
mode (Ud = 0, Uq = K * t
= voltage of separation
voltage source)
6: VF semi-separation
252
mode (Ud = 0, Uq = K * t
= F/Fe * 2 * voltage of
Multi-point VF
F14.81 frequency F1 of motor 0.00 - F14.83 Hz 0.50 ●
2
Multi-point VF voltage 0.0～100.0 (100.0 = Rated
F14.82 % 1.0 ●
V1 of motor 2 voltage)
Multi-point VF
F14.83 frequency F2 of motor F14.81 - F14.85 Hz 2.00 ●
2
Multi-point VF voltage
F14.84 0.0-100.0 % 4.0 ●
V2 of motor 2
Multi-point VF F14.83 to rated frequency
F14.85 frequency F3 of motor of motor (reference Hz 5.00 ●
2 frequency)
Multi-point VF voltage
F14.86 0.0-100.0 % 10.0 ●
V3 of motor 2
See F05.00 to F05.06
Function Default
code setting
0: Slow down to stop
F14.87 Stop mode of motor 2 0 〇
1: Free stop
See F04.19
7.16 Auxiliary Function Parameter Group of F15 Group

code name setting
F15.00 Jog frequency Hz 5.00 ●
F00.16
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
Jog acceleration
F15.01 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 5.00 ●
time
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
Jog deceleration
F15.02 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 5.00 ●
time
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
As shown in Fig. 7-32, when the jog running command (FJOG/RJOG) is valid, the inverter
will start running at the set frequency of F15.00; and when the jog running command is invalid,
the inverter will be stopped according to the stop mode.
253
F15.01 and F15.02 are set as the acceleration and deceleration time during operation. Their
values (e.g. 500) depend on the acceleration and deceleration time unit (F15.13), and have
different meanings and ranges. For example, F15.13=0 means that the acceleration and
deceleration time is 5.00s, and F15.13=1 means that the acceleration and deceleration time is
50.0s.
Output frequency
Fundamental
frequency of
acceleration and
deceleration time
F15.09 Invalid jog running
Jog frequency
F15.00
Valid jog running
0 Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time

Time t
Jog acceleration Jog deceleration

time F15.01 time F15.02
Fig. 7-32 Schematic Diagram of Jog Running

★：The separate set frequency and acceleration/deceleration time are applied in jog running,
and not shared in normal running, but with the same physical meanings.
The triggering conditions of the jog running command vary depending on the control mode
and valid conditions, as detailed in Table 7-22.
Table 7-22 Details of Jog Running Command
Command Source
Jog running command
Option (F00.02)
Select the digital input terminal function “4: forward jog (FJOG)”
or “5: reverse jog (RJOG)”. By default, if the function terminal is
1: Terminal control
valid, the jog running command will be valid; and if the function
terminal is invalid, the jog running command will be invalid.
If the host writes “0003H: JOG forward” or “0004: JOG reverse”
2: Communication to the register 7000H through the MODBUS protocol, the jog
control running command will be valid; if it writes “0007H: free stop”, the
jog running command will be invalid.
254
Function Default
code setting
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
Fundamental
0: maximum frequency F00.16
frequency of
F15.09 1: 50.00Hz 0 〇
acceleration and
2: set frequency
deceleration time
The system has four groups (F00.14 and F00.15 in the first group) of acceleration and
deceleration time options to meet different needs for normal operation. After completing the
setting, the user can switch them via the combination of digital input functions “19: acceleration
and deceleration time terminal 1” and “20: acceleration and deceleration time terminal 2”. For
details, please see: Table 7-6 Function List of Multi-function Digital Input Terminals.
Output frequency
Fundamental
frequency of
acceleration and
deceleration time
F15.09
Set frequency
0 Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time Time t
Set acceleration
time Set deceleration time
Fig. 7-33 Schematic Diagram of Acceleration and Deceleration Time
255
As shown in Fig. 7-33, the acceleration time is defined as the time of acceleration from
0.00 Hz to the reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration time; and the deceleration time
is defined as the time of deceleration from the reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration
time to 0.00 Hz. The actual acceleration/deceleration time varies according to the ratio between
the set frequency and reference frequency.
The reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration time is set by function code F15.09
that represents the reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration time. If F15.09=0, the
reference frequency depends on the function code F00.16 (maximum frequency). Assuming
F00.16=100.00Hz, the acceleration (deceleration) time is expressed as the time for the output
frequency to increase (decrease) from 0.00Hz (100.00Hz) to 100.00Hz (0.00Hz). If F15.09=2,
the reference frequency depends on the function code F18.01 (set frequency). Assuming
F18.01=100.00Hz, the acceleration (deceleration) time is expressed as the time for the output
frequency to increase (decrease) from 0.00Hz (100.00Hz) to 100.00Hz (0.00Hz).
Automatic switching of
0: Invalid
F15.10 acceleration and deceleration 0 〇
1: valid
time
Switching frequency of 0.00 to maximum
F15.11 Hz 0.00 ●
acceleration time 1 and 2 frequency F00.16
Switching frequency of 0.00 to maximum
F15.12 Hz 0.00 ●
deceleration time 1 and 2 frequency F00.16
If the motor 1 is running at the normal (e.g. non-PLC/PID) speed (e.g. non-torque) and the
acceleration/deceleration time terminals (19: acceleration and deceleration time terminal 1; 20:
acceleration and deceleration time terminal 2) are invalid, the acceleration/deceleration time 1
and acceleration/deceleration time 2 can be switched by setting F15.10 to 1, as detailed in Fig.
7-34.
256
Fig. 7-34 Schematic Diagram of Automatic Switching of Acceleration and Deceleration Time
During acceleration, if the output frequency is less than the switching frequency of the
acceleration time 1 and 2 (F15.11), the acceleration time 1 will be the current valid acceleration
time; otherwise, the acceleration time 2 will be the current valid acceleration time.
During deceleration, if the output frequency is less than the switching frequency of the
deceleration time 1 and 2 (F15.12), the deceleration time 1 will be the current valid deceleration
time; otherwise, the deceleration time 2 will be the current valid deceleration time.

0:0.01s
F15.13 Acceleration and deceleration time unit 1:0.1s 0 〇
2:1s
Under different working conditions, the acceleration and deceleration time requirements
may vary greatly. The system provides three acceleration and deceleration time units, depending
on the function code F15.13. F15.13=1 means that the acceleration/deceleration time unit is
“0.1s”. Except for that in torque control (F13.06), all the acceleration and deceleration time will
change. For example, the value of F00.14 will change from 15.00s to 150.0s by default.
Function Default
code setting
F15.14 Frequency hopping point 1 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
0.00-20.00, 0.00 is
F15.15 Hopping range 1 Hz 0.00 ●
invalid
0.00-20.00, 0.00 is
invalid
257
0.00-20.00, 0.00 is
invalid
The frequency hopping function (FH function for short) can prevent the output frequency
of the inverter from the mechanical resonance frequency point of the mechanical load. If the
inverter is prohibited from running at a constant speed within the frequency hopping range,
hopping will not occur during acceleration. Instead, the inverter will run smoothly.
Set frequency
Frequency Hopping range 3

hopping point 3
Hopping range 2
Frequency
hopping point 2
Frequency Hopping range 1

hopping point 1
Time
Fig. 7-35 Schematic Diagram of Frequency Hopping

As shown in Fig. 7-35, the frequency hopping function is set in the form of “frequency
hopping point + hopping range”. The specific frequency hopping range is (frequency hopping
point - hopping range, frequency hopping point + hopping range). At most three frequency
hopping areas can be set. When the respective hopping range is 0, the corresponding frequency
hopping function will be invalid.
When the frequency hopping function is valid and the set frequency rises within the
regulation range, the final set frequency is “frequency hopping point - hopping range”; and
when the frequency hopping function drops, the final set frequency is “frequency hopping point
+ hopping range”.
Multiple frequency hopping areas can be superimposed, as shown in the frequency hopping
areas 1 and 2 in Fig. 7-35. The final frequency hopping range is (frequency hopping point 1 -
hopping range 1, frequency hopping point 2 + hopping range 2).
Detection width of output
F15.20 0.00 - 50.00 Hz 2.50 〇
frequency arrival (FAR)
258
Output frequency
Set frequency +
width
Set frequency
Set frequency -
width
0
Time
Output terminal
Valid
Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid
0 Time
Fig. 7-36 Schematic Diagram of FAR Detection

As shown in Fig. 7-36, when the multi-function output terminal or relay output is set to “2:
up to output frequency (FAR)”, and the absolute value of the difference between the |output
frequency| and |given frequency| is less than or equal to the set value of FAR detection width
(F15.20) during inverter operation, the corresponding function terminal will output the active
level. Otherwise, this terminal will output the inactive level.
Function Default
code setting
Output frequency 0.00 to maximum
F15.21 Hz 30.00 〇
detection FDT1 frequency F00.16
F15.22 FDT1 hysteresis -(Fmax-F15.21)～F15.21 Hz 2.00 〇
Output frequency 0.00 to maximum
F15.23 Hz 20.00 〇
detection FDT2 frequency F00.16
F15.24 FDT2 hysteresis -(Fmax-F15.23)～F15.23 Hz 2.00 〇
259
Output
frequency (Hz)
Output frequency
detection 1
Hysteresis 1
Hysteresis 2
(negative)
Output frequency
detection 2
Output terminal 1
Invalid
Valid
Output terminal 2
Invalid Valid
Fig. 7-37 Schematic Diagram of FDT Detection
As shown in Fig. 7-37, when the multi-function output terminal or relay output is set to “3:
output frequency detection FDT1” or “4: output frequency detection FDT2” and the inverter is
running:
1. If the hysteresis is positive and the |output frequency| is greater than the result of “output
frequency detection FDT1/2” (F15.21/F15.23), the corresponding function terminal will output
the active level; if the |output frequency| drops to less than the result of “output frequency
detection FDT1/2 (F15.21/F15.23) - FDT1/2 hysteresis (F15.22/F15.24)”, the corresponding
function terminal will output the inactive level; and if the |output frequency| is within the range
of (output frequency detection - hysteresis, output frequency detection), the output level of the
corresponding function terminal will remain unchanged.
2. If the hysteresis is negative and the |output frequency| is greater than the result of “output
frequency detection FDT1/2” (F15.21/F15.23), the corresponding function terminal will output
the active level; if the |output frequency| drops to less than the result of “output frequency
detection FDT1/2 (F15.21/F15.23) - FDT1/2 hysteresis (F15.22/F15.24)”, the corresponding
function terminal will output the inactive level; and if the |output frequency| is within the range
260
of (output frequency detection, output frequency detection - hysteresis,), the output level of the
corresponding function terminal will remain unchanged.
Function Default
code setting
Options of analog level 0:AI1
F15.25 0 ○
detection ADT 1：AI2
Analog level detection
F15.26 0.00-100.00 % 20.00 ●
ADT1
0.00 to F15.26 (valid
F15.27 ADT1 hysteresis % 5.00 ●
down in one direction)
Analog level detection
F15.28 0.00-100.00 % 50.00 ●
ADT2
0.00 to F15.28 (valid
F15.29 ADT2 hysteresis % 5.00 ●
down in one direction)
The analog level detection function is used to detect and monitor the analog input of the
current selected F15.25 channel, and also perform internal operation and external alarm
monitoring. Two detection conditions can be set, but only one analog input channel can be
detected.
Analog AI
%
Detection
level Hysteresis
0
Time (s)
Output
terminal
Invalid Valid Invalid
0 Time (s)
Fig. 7-38 Schematic Diagram of ADT Detection

As shown in Fig. 7-38, a valid starting point has been set for the detection level. When the
percentage of analog input is above the detection level after offset processing, the ADT function
will be valid. The conditions for invalid ADT function are dependent on the one-way downward
hysteresis. When the conversion result of analog input decreases to less than the result of
261
“detection level - hysteresis”, the ADT function will be invalid.

Parameter description Unit Default setting Attribute
code name
Options of energy
0: Invalid
F15.30 consumption 0 〇
1: valid
braking function
Energy
110.0-140.0 (380V, 100.0 =
F15.31 consumption % 125.0(671V) 〇
537V)
braking voltage
20-100 (100 means that
F15.32 Braking rate % 100 ●
duty ratio is 1)
Energy consumption braking is a braking method for quick deceleration by converting the
energy generated in deceleration into the thermal energy of the braking resistor. It is suitable for
braking under large-inertia loads or stop by rapid braking. In this case, it is necessary to select
the appropriate braking resistor and braking unit, as detailed in 10.1Braking Resistor and
10.2Braking unit.
Bus voltage
Energy consumption
braking voltage F15.30
0
Time t
Energy consumption
braking
No braking Braking No braking
0
Time t
Fig. 7-39 Schematic Diagram of Energy Consumption Braking

In the case of valid energy consumption braking (F15.30=1), as shown in Fig. 7-39, when
the bus voltage is greater than the energy consumption braking voltage (F15.31), energy
consumption braking will be started; and when the bus voltage decreases to less than the
aforesaid value, energy consumption braking will be disabled.
The IGBT in the braking unit is engaged during energy consumption braking. Energy can
be quickly released by the braking resistor. The braking utilization rate (F15.32) is the duty
cycle of IGBT running. The greater the duty cycle, the larger the degree of braking is.
262
Function Default
code setting
Operating mode with set 0: running at the lower
F15.33 frequency less than lower frequency limit 0 〇
frequency limit 1: Shutdown
When the set frequency of the inverter is lower than the lower frequency limit (F00.19), the
running status depends on the function code F15.33.

code name setting
0: running after power-on
1: running at startup
F15.34 Fan control 1 〇
2: intelligent operation, subject
to temperature control
In order to use the fan reasonably, the fan system has three running modes, depending on
the fan control function code (F15.34). The specific running mode of the fan is shown in Table
7-23.
Table 7-23 Details of Fan Operation
Fan control Fan operation
0: running after
When the inverter is powered on, the fan will start running.
power-on
When the inverter starts running, the fan will start running. When
1: running at startup
this parameter is set to 1 min, the fan will stop running.
When the temperature of the inverter is greater than 45 °C, the fan
2: intelligent will start running; when the temperature of the inverter is less than
operation, subject to 40 °C, the fan will stop running; and when the temperature of the
temperature control inverter is in between the two values, the fan will remain
unchanged.
★ When “2: intelligent operation, subject to temperature control” is selected, make sure
that the temperature detection module of the inverter works properly.
Function Default
code setting
F15.35 Overmodulation intensity 1.00 - 1.10 1.05 ●
When the input voltage of the inverter is lower than the output voltage, you can increase
the overmodulation intensity to improve the bus voltage utilization and thus increase the upper
limit of output voltage. When F15.35=1.10, the upper limit of output voltage can be increased
by 10%, thus reducing the output current under heavy loads, but the current harmonics will
263
increase.
Function Default
code setting
0: invalid (7-segment
Switching options of PWM PWM modulation)
F15.36 0 〇
modulation mode 1: valid (5-segment
PWM modulation)
Switching frequency of PWM 0.00 to maximum
F15.37 Hz 15.00 ●
modulation mode frequency F00.16
When the PWM modulation mode is invalid (F15.36=0), the 7-segment PWM modulation
will be enabled. When the WM modulation mode is valid (F15.36=1), the 7-segment PWM
modulation will be enabled at the output frequency lower than the switching frequency (F15.37)
and the 5-segment PWM modulation will be enabled at the output frequency higher than the
switching frequency. The 7-segment PWM modulation has a smaller current ripple than
5-segment PWM modulation, but involves larger switching loss, more heat from the inverter,
and larger temperature rise.
Default
setting
0: no compensation
Options of dead zone
F15.38 1: compensation mode 1 1 〇
compensation mode
2: compensation mode 2
This parameter does not need to change under normal circumstances in the dead zone
compensation mode. Users need to select a different compensation mode only in case of special
requirements for the quality of the output voltage waveform or other abnormalities (e.g. motor
oscillation).
The compensation mode 1 is often selected. If the motor is prone to oscillation at high power
and under VF control, the compensation mode 2 may be selected.
Function Default
code setting
0: Invalid
F15.39 Terminal jog priority 0 〇
1: valid
In the terminal control mode (F00.02=1), this function code is used to set the highest
priority of the jog command. If the terminal jog priority is valid (F15.39=1), the running status
can be switched to jog running in the presence of a valid jog terminal; and if the terminal jog
priority is invalid (F15.39=0), the running status cannot be directly switched to jog running.
264
Function Default
code setting
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
Deceleration time
F15.40 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 1.00 ●
for quick stop
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
Set the acceleration and deceleration time during rapid stop.
Function Default
code setting
Overcurrent 0.1-300.0 (0.0: no detection;

F15.66 % 200.0 ●
detection level 100.0%: corresponding to the
rated current of motor)
Overcurrent
F15.67 0.00-600.00 s 0.00 ●
detection delay time
When the current exceeds the overcurrent detection level (F15.66) and the duration reaches
F15.67, the function “73: output overcurrent” of the output terminal will be valid.
Function Default
code setting
F15.68 Market price 0.00-100.00 1.00 〇
Set the current electricity price in the market and calculate the electricity savings. The
electricity savings can be viewed by the function codes F18.69 and F18.70.
Function Default
code setting
Power-frequency
F15.69 30.0-200.0 % 90.0 〇
load factor
Set the coefficient of the power frequency load.
7.17 F16 customized function parameter group

code name setting
0: Universal model
1: Water supply application
2: Air compressor application
Industry
F16.00 3: Winding application 0 〇
application
4: fan application
5: Spindle application of
machine tool
265
6: Extruder application
7: High-speed motor
application
F16.00=0: general model
Since the inverter is a general-purpose product, relevant functions for each application
should not be enabled.
F16.00=1: water supply application
Since the inverter is a PID-regulated constant-pressure water supply control product, a
clock option can be provided for clock pressure setting.
F16.00=2: Air compressor application
Since the inverter is a dedicated PID-regulated control product for air compressors, an air
compressor interface option can be provided for PT100 automatic temperature calculation and
the like.
F16.00=3: Winding application
The inverter is a dedicated PID-regulated control product for winding and unwinding.
F16.00=4: Fan application
The inverter can be used to configure the parameters of the corresponding function code for
the fan application macro.
F16.00=5: Machine tool spindle application
the application micro of machine tool spindle.
F16.00=6: Extruder application
the extruder application macro.
F16.00=7: High-speed motor application
the high-speed motor application macro.
After the corresponding application macro is selected by changing the
function code, F12.14 will be executed automatically to restore the default settings,
and the parameters will be restored the macro-specific parameters.
266
Default
setting
1 - 65535 (F16.13=0)
0.1 - 6553.5 (F16.13=1)
F16.01 Set length m 1,000 ●
0.01 - 655.35 (F16.13=2)
0.001 - 65.535 (F16.13=3)
F16.02 Pulses per meter 0.1 - 6553.5 100.0 ●
0:1m
1:0.1m
F16.13 Set length resolution 0 〇
2:0.01 m
3:0.001m
EM730/EM730E series inverters have a fixed-length counting function, as shown in Fig.
7-40. The length counting function is performed by entering the length information from the
digital input terminal in the pulse form and then setting the related function code. The final
length count information can be outputted by the digital output terminal for other purposes (e.g.
DI/VX input as the stop command). Users can also view the real-time length count via F18.34.
The length resolution can be set by F16.13. In case of any change in the length resolution,
F16.01 will change accordingly. For example, if F16.13 is set to 0:1m, the setting range of
F16.01 is 1-65535m.
Pulses per meter α F18.34

(0.1~6553.5) p/m
DI “length count” input 37#

function “Length
Length Length pulse Pulse count Length 11 DO “length reached”
≥
information information CntIn Lgth output 16# function reached” signal
HDI “high-speed length count”
Sensor input 38# function Divider Comparator Reset
Clear to 0
Set length 1
(1-65535)m
Length clear DI “length clear” input

signal 38# function
Fig. 7-40 Block Diagram of Fixed-length Counting

Principle of fixed-length counting: The length detection sensor converts the length
information into pulse information. The DI terminal collects the number N of input pulses.
N
l1 
The length  is calculated based on the set function code “Pulses per meter”  and
267
l1  l
then compared with the “Set length” l . If , it means that the length does not reach the
set value; otherwise, the fixed-length count is completed. The “39: Clear length” input can be
applied to clear the count and reset the output signal.
When the pulse frequency is greater than 250Hz (=1/(2 (default filtering times)*2*1ms -1)),
make sure of the input from the high-speed pulse input terminal (X5) and set F02.06 to “38:
high-speed length count input”. 250Hz is only a theoretical value. The actual effect will prevail.
In order to avoid errors, use the high-speed pulse input terminal wherever possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Pulse input
Count value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 0
Clear input Invalid Valid

Reach the length
Fig. 7-15 Example of Fixed-length Counting
Fig. 7-15 shows an example, where F16.01=2 and F16.02=4.0. When the length count is 8
(=2×4), the “16: length reached” output will be valid. When the “39: clear length” input is valid,
the count will be cleared, and the “16: length reached” output will be invalid.
Default
setting
F16.03 Set count value F16.04 - 65535 1,000 ●
F16.04 Specified count value 1 - F16.03 1,000 ●
EM730/EM730E series inverters support counting, as shown in Fig. 7-42. Pulse

information is inputted from the digital input terminal. When the count reaches the specific
value, the there will be the corresponding valid signal output. The user can use this signal for
programming (e.g. DI/VX input as the stop command) or view the real-time count by F18.33.
268
“Specified
F18.33 count
DO “specified count reached” reached”
output 15# function signal
DI “count input” 34# function “Set count
Pulse Pulse count n DO “set count reached” output
≥ ≥ reached”
information HDI “high-speed count input” CntIn 14# function
signal
35# function Comparator 1 Comparator 2
Clear to 0
Reset
Specified count Set count value
0≤ value n1 ≤ n2
1~65535 1~65535
Count clear DI “counter reset” input
signal 36# function
Fig. 7-42 Block Diagram of Counting Function

Counting principle: Specific information is entered in the pulse form. The number n of
pulses is collected by the DI terminal and then is compared with the “specified count” 1 . If
n
n  n1 , it means that the value does not reach the “specified count”. Otherwise, it means that
the value reaches the “specified count”, the result is outputted by the DO terminal, counting is
continued, and the value is compared with the “set count” 2 . If

n n  n2 , it means that the
value does not reach the “set count”. Otherwise, it means that the value reaches the “set count”,
the result will be outputted by the DO terminal and counting will be stopped. The “36: clear
counter” input can be used to clear the count and reset the output signal.
When the pulse frequency exceeds 250Hz (=1/(2 (default filtering times)*2*1ms -1)), make
sure of the input through the high-speed pulse input terminal (X5), and set F02.06 to “35:
high-speed count input”. 250Hz is only a theoretical value. The actual effect will prevail. In
order to avoid errors, use the high-speed pulse input terminal wherever possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Pulse input
Count value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 0
Clear input Valid
Invalid
Specified Valid Invalid
output

Set output
Fig. 7-16 Counting ExampleFig. 7-16 shows an example, where F16.03=8 and F16.04=5.
When the count reaches the specified value 5, the output of “15: reach the specified value” will
269
be valid. When the count reaches the set value 8, the output of “14: reach the set value” will be
valid. When the input of “36: clear length” is valid, the count will be cleared to 0, and the
outputs of “15: reach the specified value” and “14: reach the set value” will be invalid.
Limit65535 ≥ set count ≥ specified count≥0. If the set count and specified count are 0,
the counter function will be invalid. This function is allowed for one terminal only at a
time.
Default
setting
F16.05 Set time of regular running 0.0-6500.0, 0.0 is invalid min 0.0 ●
Regular running function: The regular running function can be enabled by setting this
function code other than 0. When the running time reaches the set time, the inverter will be shut
down, and the terminal output of the option “26: reach the set time” will be valid, and there will
be a prompt indicating that the inverter has been run for the set time.
Users can view the remaining time of regular running by F18.35, or clear the current
running time by the input function “27: clear regular running time” (i.e. resetting F18.35). This
represents the set time in the non-running status and remaining time in the running status. That
is, one regular running process lasts from start to stop, and the accumulated time in the
non-running status will be cleared.
Default
setting
F16.06 Agent password 0 - 65535 0 〇
Agent password.
★ After this password is set, the inverter may fail to work normally. Be careful to set this
password.
Function Default
code setting
0-65535; 0: disable the
Setting of cumulative
F16.07 protection when the h 0 〇
power-on arrival time
power-on time is up
Set the total cumulative power-on time. If the cumulative power-on time (F12.15) reaches
or exceeds the total cumulative power-on time (F16.07), please contact the agent for
maintenance.
★ After this parameter is set, the inverter may fail to work normally. Be careful to set
this parameter.
270
Function Default
code setting
0-65535; 0: disable the
Setting of cumulative
F16.08 protection when the running h 0 〇
running arrival time
time is up
Set the total cumulative running time. If the cumulative running time (F12.17) reaches or
exceeds the total cumulative running time (F16.08), please contact the agent for maintenance.
★ After this parameter is set, the inverter may fail to work normally. Be careful to set
this parameter.
Default
setting
F16.09 Factory password 0 - 65535 XXXXX ●
Factory password.
★ After this password is set, the inverter may fail to work normally. Be careful to set this
password.
code name setting
Analog output
percentage
F16.10 0.00-100.00 % 0.00 〇
corresponding to
the count value 0
Analog output
percentage
F16.11 0.00-100.00 % 100.00 〇
corresponding to
the set count value
The analog output is set as the offset of count and length output.
Analog output
F16.11
F16.10
0 F16.01/F16.03 Count/length
Fig. 7-17 Schematic Diagram of Analog Output of Count and Length
7.18 Virtual I/O Function Parameter Group of F17 Group

The standard EM730/EM730E series inverter is equipped with eight virtual multi-function
271
input terminals (VX1 to VX8), of which the functions and usages are basically the same as those
of the actual input terminals. Differences are described below. For their similarities, refer to the
parameter description of Function Parameter Group of Input Terminal of F02 Group.
Function Default
code setting
VX1 virtual input
F17.00 0 〇
function options
VX2 virtual input
F17.01 0 〇
function options
VX3 virtual input
F17.02 0 〇
function options
The same as the digital input
VX4 virtual input
F17.03 terminal function options of the 0 〇
function options
F02 group. See the function list of
VX5 virtual input
F17.04 the digital multi-function input 0 〇
function options
terminal in Table 7-2.
VX6 virtual input
F17.05 0 〇
function options
VX7 virtual input
F17.06 0 〇
function options
VX8 virtual input
F17.07 0 〇
function options
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX VX VX VX VX VX VX VX
7 6 6 5 4 3 2 1
Virtual input 0: positive logic, valid in the 000
F17.08 〇
positive/negative logic closed state/invalid in the open 00000
state
1: Negative logic, invalid in the
closed state/valid in the open state
F17.11 VX1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
VX1 invalid delay
F17.12 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VX2 invalid delay
F17.14 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VX3 invalid delay
F17.16 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VX4 invalid delay
F17.18 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
272
The terminals VX1 to VX8 essentially have the same function, but there are no
corresponding physical terminals actually. They all have the positive and negative logic
functions. The terminals VX1 to VX4 have the delay function, and their statuses can be
confirmed in the same way. They can be set separately. The terminal VX1 is taken as an
example below.
code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX1-VX8 VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1
000
F17.09 status setting 0: the VXn status is the same as VYn output 〇
00000
options status
1: status set by F17.10
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX1-VX8 VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1 000
F17.10 ●
status setting 0: Invalid 00000
1: valid
 When F17.09=xxxxxxx0, the VX1 status is the same as the VY1 output status.
As stated literally, the status of the virtual input terminal is the same as that of the
virtual output terminal, so this should be used in conjunction with the virtual output
terminal.
If F17.19=16 (reach the length) and F17.28=xxxx xxx1 (the VY1 status depends on
the output function status) under the default conditions, and “16: reach the length” is valid,
the VY1 output and VX1 synchronization will be valid. The corresponding operations
(length count clearing and VY1 output status resetting) can be performed according to the
VX1 setting (assuming “39: length clearing”). Then the fixed length count function can be
enabled again to meet the requirements for repeated processing. If there are certain
intervals between repeated processing procedures, you can also complete the aforesaid
operations by setting the VX1 delay.
 When F17.09=xxxxxxx1, the VX1 status depends on the bit 0 of the function code
F17.10.
The status of the virtual input terminal is directly dependent on the function code.
This is mainly used for remote control by the host. The remote control terminal can be
used to enable and disable the input terminal status directly with the function code 0x41
by changing the value of F17.10 through communication.
273
The standard EM730/EM730E series inverter is equipped with eight virtual multi-function
output terminals (VY1 to VY8), and their functions and usages are essentially the same as those
of the actual output terminals. Differences are described below. For their similarities, refer to the
parameter description of Function Parameter Group of Output Terminal of F03 Group.
Function Default
code setting
VY1 virtual output
F17.19 0 〇
function options
VY2 virtual output
F17.20 0 〇
function options
VY3 virtual output
F17.21 0 〇
function options
The same as the digital output
VY4 virtual output
F17.22 terminal function options of the F03 0 〇
function options
group, as detailed in Table 7-8
VY5 virtual output
F17.23 Function List of Multi-function 0 〇
function options
Digital Output Terminals
VY6 virtual output
F17.24 0 〇
function options
VY7 virtual output
F17.25 0 〇
function options
VY8 virtual output
F17.26 0 〇
function options
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Virtual output
0: positive logic, valid in the closed 000
F17.27 positive/negative 〇
state/invalid in the open state 00000
logic
1: Negative logic, invalid in the
closed state/valid in the open state
VY1 valid delay
F17.29 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY1 invalid delay
F17.30 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY2 valid delay
F17.31 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY2 invalid delay
F17.32 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY3 valid delay
F17.33 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY3 invalid delay
F17.34 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
274
VY4 valid delay
F17.35 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY4 invalid delay
F17.36 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
The terminals VY1 to VY8 essentially have the same function, but there are no
corresponding physical terminals actually. They all have the positive and negative logic
functions. The terminals VY1 to VY4 have the delay function, and their statuses can be
confirmed in the same way. They can be set separately. The terminal VY1 is taken as an
example below.

code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Control options of
0: Depending on the status of terminal 111
F17.28 virtual output 〇
X1-X5 (without VY6-8) 11111
terminal
1: depending on the output function
status
 F17.28=xxxxxxx0: the VY1 status is the same as the actual input status of X1.
The status of the virtual output terminal VY1 is synchronized with that of the actual input
terminal X1. This can be applied in programming of multiple functions such as status
confirmation or enabling of one switch.
 F17.28=xxxxxxx1: the VY1 status depends on the selected function status of the
function code F17.19.
The status of the virtual output terminal depends on the set function status, and its main
output is for software programming. The PID can be controlled via “reaching the upper
limit of PID feedback” as follows: outputting the signal “19: reach the upper limit of PID
feedback” through the virtual output terminal VY1 (F17.19=19), collecting it through the
virtual input terminal VX1 and then setting the VX1 function to “41: process PID pause”
(F17.00=41).
Note: The D7 bit of the VY8 option must be set to 1. That is, the VY8 function is always
dependent on the output function status.
code name setting
Virtual input VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1 000
F17.37 ×
terminal status 0: Invalid 00000
275
1: valid
Virtual output 000
F17.38 0: Invalid ×
terminal status 00000
1: valid
The real-time status of the current virtual terminal is displayed.
7.19 Monitoring Parameter Group of F18 Group

This group of parameters is used only to view the current status of the inverter and cannot
be changed.
Parameter description Unit
code name
Display the current output frequency of the inverter.
Scope: 0.00 to upper frequency limit.
F18.00 Output frequency Hz
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the speed
control mode.
Display the current set frequency of the inverter. Scope:
0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16.
F18.01 Set frequency Hz
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the speed
control mode.
F18.02 Reserved
Display the estimated feedback frequency in the SVC
Estimate
control mode. Scope: 0.00 to upper frequency limit.
F18.03 feedback Hz
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the SVC
frequency
control mode.
Display the current output torque of the inverter. Scope:
F18.04 Output torque %
-200.0 - 200.0.
Display the current set torque of the inverter. Scope:
-200.0 - 200.0.
F18.05 Torque setting %
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the torque
control mode.
Display the current output current of the inverter.
Depending on the rated power level of the motor, the
F18.06 Output current range is as follows: A
Display the current output current as a percentage
Output current
F18.07 (relative to the rated current of the inverter). Range: 0.0 %
percentage
to 300.0.
Display the current output voltage of the inverter. Scope:
F18.08 Output voltage V
0.0 - 690.0.
F18.09 DC bus voltage Display the current bus voltage. Scope: 0 - 1200. V
276
When the auxiliary frequency source B is involved in
setting (F00.06 ≠ 0), the setting mode is “11: simple
PLC” (F00.05=11) and the simple PLC runs in the mode
Simple PLC of limited cycles (F08.15=1/2), the real-time number of
F18.10
running times cycles will be displayed. “0” indicates that the first
operation is being performed, and “1” indicates that the
first operation has been completed and the second
operation is being carried out. Scope: 0 - F08.16.
setting (F00.06 ≠ 0), and the setting mode is “11: simple
Simple PLC PLC” (F00.05=11), the real-time PLC running status will
F18.11
operation stage be displayed. Scope: 1-15, corresponding to the
multi-segment speed 1 (F08.00) to multi-segment speed
15 (F08.14).
setting (F00.06 ≠ 0) and the setting mode is “11: simple
PLC running time s
PLC” (F00.05=11), the PLC running time at the current
F18.12 at the current /
stage will be displayed in a real-time manner. Scope: 0.0
stage min
to the set time of the corresponding segment (example:
the time of the first segment is dependent on F08.20).
F18.13 Reserved
Display the current load speed. For the correct display,
F18.14 Load rate please set the load speed display factor (F12.09). Scope: rpm
0 - 65535.
UP/DOWN offset Display the UP/DOWN offset frequency. See the
F18.15 HHz
frequency UP/DOWN function description of F12.10 to F12.12.
Display the current PID setting, except for the current
F18.16 PID setting
setting percentage (F09.03).
Display the current PID feedback, except for the current
F18.17 PID feedback
feedback percentage (F09.03).
Display the cumulative input (output + fan) power
Power meter: consumption in MWh (thousand KWh). The current
F18.18 MWh
MWh power consumption can be obtained in conjunction with
F18.19.
Display the cumulative input (output + fan) power
Watt-hour meter:
F18.19 consumption in kWh (kilowatt-hour). The current power kWh
kWh
consumption can be obtained in conjunction with F18.18.
Display the current output power of the inverter. Scope:
F18.20 Output power kW
-650.00~650.00.
Output power Display the current output power factor of the inverter.
F18.21
factor Scope: -1.00 - 1.00.
Digital input Display the current valid status of the input terminals X1
F18.22
terminal status 1 to X5. The five-bit digit tubes from left to right are:
277
X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
The actual display effect is: 00000.
★ : “0” means that the current terminal function is
invalid; and “1” means that the current terminal function
is valid.
Display the current valid status of the input terminals AI1
and AI2. The five-bit digit tubes from left to right are:
* AI2 AI1 * *
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Digital input The actual display effect is: 0000.
F18.23
terminal status 2 ★： The analog input terminals AI1 and AI2 of the
EM730/EM730E series inverter can be used for digital
input only.
“0” means that the current terminal function is invalid;
and “1” means that the current terminal function is valid.
Display the current valid status of the output terminals

R1/Y1. The five-bit digital tubes from left to right are:
* * R1 * Y1
Output terminal
F18.25 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
state
The actual display effect is: 000.
“0” means that the current function terminal is invalid;
and “1” means that the current function terminal is valid.
Display the per-unit value of the current analog input
F18.26 AI1 %
channel 1 (AI1) relative to 100.0%. Scope: -100.0 - 100.0
Display the per-unit value of the current analog input
F18.27 AI2 %
channel 2 (AI2) relative to 100.0%. Scope: 0.0 - 100.0.
F18.30 Reserved
High-frequency
F18.31 pulse input 0.00-100.00 kHz
frequency: kHz
High-frequency
F18.32 pulse input 0~65535 Hz
frequency: Hz
F18.33 Count value 0~65535
F18.34 Actual length 0~65535 m
Display the remaining time of regular running. For
Remaining time
F18.35 specific function. see the description of the F16.05 min
of regular running
regular running function. Scope: 0.0 - F16.05.
Rotor position of
F18.36 0.0~359.9°
synchronous
278
motor
F18.37
~ Reserved
F18.38
VF separation Display the VF separation target voltage in a real-time
F18.39 V
target voltage manner. Scope: 0.0 to rated voltage of the motor
Display the actual output voltage of VF separation in a
VF separation
F18.40 real-time manner. Scope: 0.0 to rated voltage of the V
output voltage
motor
F18.41
~ Reserved
F18.50
F18.51 PID output -100.0 - 100.0 %
Inverter
F18.60 temperature -40 to 200 ℃
Cumulative
F18.67 energy saving 0 - 65535 MWh
MWH
Cumulative
F18.68 energy saving 0.0 - 999.9 kWh
KWH
High cumulative
F18.69 cost saving 0 - 65535
(*1000)
Low cumulative
F18.70 cost saving 0.0 - 999.9
Power-frequency
F18.71 power 0 - 65535 MWh
consumption
MWH
Power-frequency
F18.72 power 0.0 - 999.9 kWh
consumption
KWH
7.20 F19 protection record parameter group

These parameters are used only to view the types of recent three protections of the inverter
and the inverter status in protection. They cannot be changed.
 The function codes related to the last protection are as follows:

code name setting
Category of last Display the type of the last
F19.00 0 ×
protection protection, as detailed in Table
279
7-24 List of Protection Types.
Output frequency Display the output frequency of
F19.01 Hz 0.00 ×
in protection the last protection.
Output current in Display the output current of the
F19.02 A 0.00/0.0 ×
protection last protection.
Bus voltage in Display the bus voltage of the last
F19.03 V 0 ×
protection protection.
Display the running status of the
Operating status in last protection, as detailed in
F19.04 0 ×
protection Table 7-25 List of Running
Statuses during Protection.
Working time in Display the working time of the
F19.05 h 0 ×
protection last protection.
 The function codes related to the previous protection are as follows:

code name setting
Category of Display the type of the previous
F19.06 previous protection, as detailed in Table 0 ×
protection 7-24 List of Protection Types.
F19.07 Hz 0.00 ×
in protection the previous protection.
F19.08 A 0.00/0.0 ×
protection previous protection.
Bus voltage in Display the bus voltage of the
F19.09 V 0 ×
Operating status in previous protection, as detailed in
F19.10 0 ×
protection Table 7-25 List of Running
Statuses during Protection.
F19.11 h 0 ×
 The function codes related to the previous two protections are as follows:
code name setting
Display the type of the previous
Category of two
two protections, as detailed in
F19.12 previous 0 ×
Table 7-24 List of Protection
protections
Types.
F19.13 Hz 0.00 ×
in protection the previous two protections.
280
F19.14 A 0.00 /0.0 ×
protection previous two protections.
Bus voltage in Display the bus voltage of the
F19.15 V 0 ×
previous two protections, as
Operating status
F19.16 detailed in Table 7-25 List of 0 ×
in protection
Running Statuses during
Protection.
F19.17 h 0 ×
Different types of protection of EM730/EM730E series inverters are explained in Table 7-24.
Table 7-24 List of Protection Types

Protection Type Keyboard Protection Type Keyboard
display display
0: No protection 0 E01: output short circuit protection E01
E02: instantaneous E02 E03
E03: reserved
overcurrent
E04: steady-state overcurrent E04 E05: steady-state overvoltage E05
E06: Steady-state E06 E07
E07: input phase loss
undervoltage
E08: output phase loss E08 E09: inverter overload E09
E10: inverter overheat E10 E11
E11: parameter setting conflict
protection
E12：retention E12 E13: motor overload E13
E14: External protection E14 E15: Inverter memory protection E15
E16: communication E16 E17: Temperature sensor E17
abnormality abnormality
E18: disengaged soft start E18 E19: current detection circuit E19
relay abnormality
E20: Stall protection E20 E21: PID feedback disconnection E21
E20: retention E22 E23: Keyboard memory protection E23
E24: parameter E24 E25
E25: retention
identification abnormality
E26 E27: up to the cumulative power-on E27
E26: off-load protection
time
E28: up to the cumulative E28 E29: Internal communication E29
running time protection
E44: Cable protection E44 E43: Material cutoff protection E43
281
E57: Overpressure in E57 E58: Under-pressure in pipeline E58
pipeline network network
E68: SVC start failure E68 E76
E76: Short circuit to ground
(synchronous motor)
The running status of EM730/EM730E series inverters during protection is explained in
Table 7-25:
Table 7-25 List of Running Statuses during Protection
Keyboard Detailed Explanation of
display Running Status of
Inverter
0 Not running
1 Forward acceleration
2 Reverse acceleration
3 Forward deceleration
4 Reverse deceleration
5 Forward constant speed
6 Reverse constant speed
7.21 F27 winding and unwinding application macro parameter group

code name setting
0: Winding mode
1: Unwinding mode
Application
F27.00 2: Wire drawing mode 0 〇
macro
3: Straight wire drawing machine
mode
F27.00=0 Winding mode:
This mode can be used for winding. After the default settings are restored, the parameters
will be restored for winding applications.
F27.00=1 Unwinding mode:
This mode can be used for unwinding. After the default settings are restored, the
parameters will be restored for unwinding applications.
F27.00=2 Wire drawing mode:
This mode can be used for wire drawing. After the default settings are restored, the
parameters will be restored for wire drawing applications.
F27.00=3 Straight wire drawing machine mode:
This mode can be used for the straight wire drawing machine. After the default settings are
restored, the parameters will be restored for the straight wire drawing machine.
Function Note 0: Winding 1: Unwinding 2: Wire 3: Straight wire
282
code mode mode drawing drawing machine

mode mode
Set F16.00=3, select the operation mode and restore the default settings. The application
parameters are automatically set to the following default values.
Basic parameters (the motor parameters need to be set manually and subject to static
self-learning)
Command 1: Terminal 1: Terminal 1:Terminal 1: Terminal

F00.02
source control control control control
Terminal 0: terminal 0: terminal

F00.03 0: terminal RUN 0: terminal RUN
control mode RUN RUN
Main
F00.04 1: AI1 setting 0: Digital setting 1: AI1 1: AI1 setting
frequency A
Auxiliary 10: process

F00.05 10: process PID 10: process PID
frequency B PID
6: Auxiliary
6: Auxiliary 6: Auxiliary
frequency B
Frequency frequency B + frequency B +
F00.06 +
source feedforward feedforward
feedforward
calculation calculation
calculation
Main
F00.07 frequency A 75.00Hz
setting
Acceleration 1.00s 1.00s 70.00s 1.00s

F00.14
time
Deceleration 1.00s 1.00s 70.00s 1.00s

F00.15
time
283
Maximum 75.00Hz 75.00Hz 75.00Hz 50.00Hz

F00.16
frequency
Upper 75.00Hz 75.00Hz 75.00Hz 50.00Hz

F00.18 frequency
limit
0: Allow 0: Allow
Reverse 1: Prohibit 1: Prohibit
F00.20 forward/reverse forward/reverse
control reversing reversing
running running
F02.00 X1 terminal 1: RUN 1: RUN 1: RUN 1: RUN
19:
acceleratio
89: Reset 89: Reset n and
F02.01 X2 terminal 2: FR reverse
feedforward feedforward deceleratio
n time
terminal 1
121: External 121: External

10: Reset 10: Reset
F02.02 X3 terminal material material cutoff
protection protection
cutoff signal signal
10: Reset 10: Reset 26: Frequency

F02.03 X4 terminal 4: FJOG
protection protection source switching
121: External
F02.04 X5 terminal 9: free stop 9: free stop 9: free stop material cutoff
signal
F02.57 AI1 filtering 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
F02.58 AI2 filtering 0.00s 0.00s 0.00s 0.00s
68: Material cutoff

F03.00 Y1 Output 3:FDT1 3:FDT1 3:FDT1
detection
284
7: Inverter 7: Inverter 7: Inverter 7: Inverter

F03.02 R1 output
protection protection protection protection
0b01100:
Jog output FDT jog
F03.08
control without
output
0: slow
F04.19 Stop mode 1: free stop 1: free stop down to 1: free stop
stop
Starting
frequency of
F04.20 2.50Hz
DC braking
in stop
DC braking
F04.22 3.00s 3.00s 3.00s
time in stop
Demagnetizat
ion time for
F04.23 0.00s 0.00s 0.00s
DC braking
in stop
Slip
F05.11 compensation 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%
gain
VF curve
F05.00 1
selection
VF voltage
F05.02 3.0%
point V1
F05.04 VF voltage 6.0%
285
point V2
VF voltage
F05.06 15.0%
point V3
F07.11 Current limit 0: Invalid
Jog
F15.01 acceleration 8.00s
time
Jog
F15.02 deceleration 8.00s
time
Acceleration
F15.03 70.00s
time 2
Deceleration
F15.04 5.00s
time 2
F15.21 FDT1 setting 1.00Hz 1.00Hz 2.00Hz 1.00Hz
FDT1
F15.22 -1.50Hz -1.50Hz -1.00Hz -1.50Hz
hysteresis
F15.23 FDT2 1.00Hz 1.00Hz 2.00Hz 1.00Hz
FDT2
F15.24 -1.50Hz -1.50Hz -1.00Hz -1.50Hz
hysteresis
Energy
F15.30 consumption 1: valid 1: valid 1: valid 1: valid
braking
PID parameters
F09.01 PID setting 5.0 5.0 5.0
286
Feedback
F09.02 2: AI2 2: AI2 2: AI2
channel
F09.03 PID range 10.0 10.0 10.0
F09.05 Proportion 1 0.06 0.30 0.03
F09.06 Integral 1 0.000s 0.000s 4.000s
F09.07 Differential 1 30.000ms 30.000ms 30.000ms
F09.08 Proportion 2 0.10 0.40 0.07
F09.09 Integral 2 0.000s 0.000s 4.000s
F09.10 Differential 2 30.000ms 30.000ms 50.000ms
2:
2: automatic
Parameter automatic 3: Automatic
switching
F09.11 switching switching switching by
according to
mode according frequency
deviation
to deviation
F09.12 Deviation 1 5.00% 0.00% 5.00%
F09.13 Deviation 2 45.00% 100.00% 45.00%
Upper limit
F09.16 40.0%
of PID output
Lower limit
F09.17 -50.0% -50.0% -40.0%
of PID output
Differential
F09.19 1.00% 1.00% 0.50%
limit
PID setting
F09.21 2.000s 2.000s 0.500s
change time
F09.35 Upper limit 9.50V 9.50V 9.50V

287
of feedback
voltage
Lower limit
F09.36 of feedback 0.50V 0.50V 0.50V
voltage
Options of
integral 2: Start when the
F09.37 action of PID error is less than
change F09.38
setting
Feedforward parameters and other settings
1:
Feedforward 2: Feedforward 1: Feedforward *
F27.01 Feedforwar
channel *10V main A
d * main A
Feedforward 1:0.00 to 2: -upper limit to 0: No change in

F27.02
range upper limit upper limit feedforward gain
Upper limit
F27.04 of 500.00% 100.00% 500.00%
feedforward
Initial
F27.05 50.00% 0.00% 100.00%
feedforward
Soft start
F27.13 0.60%/s 0.70%/s
increment
Feedforward
F27.14 0.11%/s 0.18%/s
increment 1
Feedforward
F27.15 0.30%/s 0.50%/s
increment 2
288
Feedforward
F27.16 0.75%/s 1.30%/s
increment 3
Feedforward
F27.17 1.55%/s 2.75%/s
increment 4
Feedforward
F27.18 4.00%/s 7.40%/s
increment 5
Feedforward
F27.19 11.00%/s 20.50%/s
increment 6
Material 1201 101 1201 201

F27.20
cutoff control
Wiring diagram of double-frequency wire drawing machine:
289
Note:
1. The output terminal function is not set to 67 by default (brake control function). For brake
control of the inverter, set the related terminal function, and check whether F27.25 to F27.26 are
appropriate.
290
2. The unwinding function is similar to the straight wire drawing machine. Refer to the wiring
diagram of winding and list of parameter macros for wiring.
Electrical connection diagram:
291
code name setting
0: feedforward gain * set source B
Feedforward gain
F27.01 1: Feedforward gain * set source A 1 〇
action channel
2: Feedforward gain * 10V
F27.01=0 Feedforward gain * set source B:

The feedforward gain acts on the set source B.
F27.01=1 Feedforward gain * set source A A:
The feedforward gain acts on the set source A.
F27.01=2 Feedforward gain *10V:
The feedforward gain is directly multiplied by Fmax and then superimposed on the output.
code name setting
0: No change in feedforward gain
1: 0.00 to upper limit of
Feedforward gain
F27.02 feedforward gain 1 〇
input mode
2: - upper limit of feedforward gain
to + upper limit of feedforward gain
F27.02=0 Unchanged feedforward gain:
The feedforward gain is always the set value of F27.05.
F27.02=1 0.00 to upper limit of feedforward gain:
The feedforward gain will be automatically adjusted between 0.00 and F27.04 settings.
F27.02=2 - Upper limit of feedforward gain to + upper limit of feedforward gain:
The feedforward gain will be automatically adjusted between -F27.04 and + F27.04 settings.
The unmarked settings are the same as those of F27.00=0 by default.

code name setting
Ones place: Feedforward reset
option
0: automatic resetting
Feedforward
F27.03 1: terminal resetting 10 〇
control
Tens place: Feedforward power-off
stop option
0: save after power-off
292
1: do not save after power-off
Hundreds place: Continuous
feedforward calculation
0: Not calculate
1: Continuous calculation
Set the ones place of F27.03 to 0: automatic reset

Automatic reset: The feedforward gain is reset automatically after shutdown.
Set the ones place of F27.03 to 1: terminal reset
Terminal reset: The feedforward gain is reset by the terminal.
Set the tens place of F27.03 to 0: save after power failure
Save after power failure: When the feedforward gain is powered off and then powered on,
the value before power failure will be restored.
Set the tens place of F27.03 to 1: not save after power failure
Not save after power failure: When the feedforward gain is powered off and then powered
on, the initial feedforward gain will be restored.
Set the hundreds place of F27.03 to 0: not calculate (only for the straight wire
drawing machine)
No calculation: When the DI input function “26: frequency source switching” of the
external terminal is enabled, the feedforward calculation will not be continued.
Set the hundreds place of F27.03 to 1: calculate (only for the straight wire drawing
machine)
No calculation: When the DI input function “26: frequency source switching” of the
external terminal is enabled, the feedforward calculation will be continued.
code name setting
Upper limit of
F27.04 0.00~500.00 % 500.00 〇
feedforward gain
Upper limit of feedforward gain setting or change
code name setting
Initial
F27.05 0.00~500.00 % 50.00 ●
feedforward gain
Initial value of feedforward gain
code name setting
Feedforward
F27.06 0~1000 ms 0 ●
gain filter time
293
Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to set the filtering of feedforward gain.
Function Default
code setting
F27.07 Feedforward range 0 0.00 to feedforward range 1 % 4.00 ●
Feedforward range 0 to
F27.08 Feedforward range 1 % 12.00 ●
feedforward range 2
feedforward range 3
feedforward range 4
feedforward range 5
100.00
F27.13 Soft start increment 0.00 - 50.00 %/s 0.60 ●
Feedforward
F27.14 0.00 - 50.00 %/s 0.11 ●
increment 1
Feedforward
F27.15 0.00 - 50.00 %/s 0.30 ●
increment 2
Feedforward
F27.16 0.00 - 50.00 %/s 0.75 ●
increment 3
Feedforward
F27.17 0.00 - 50.00 %/s 1.55 ●
increment 4
Feedforward
F27.18 0.00 - 50.00 %/s 4.00 ●
increment 5
Feedforward
F27.19 0.00 - 50.00 %/s 11.00 ●
increment 6
F27.13 Soft start increment:
Feedforward change rate within the first period of F09.21.
F27.07 Feedforward increment 1:
Feedforward change rate corresponding to the deviation of F27.07-F27.08.
F27.12 Feedforward increment 6:
Feedforward change rate corresponding to the deviation of F27.12-100.00%..
code name setting
Ones place: Disconnection
Material cutoff
F27.20 detection mode 11211 〇
control mode
0: Automatic detection
294
1: External signal
Tens place: Material cutoff
detection control
0: Detect when the output is greater
than the lower limit of material
cutoff detection
1: no detection
Hundreds place: Material cutoff
handling mode
0: Protection of terminal action only
1: Delayed stop and protection
report
2: Material cutoff protection
3: Automatic reset of material
cutoff protection
4: Material cutoff detection terminal
output only
5: Automatic reset of material cutoff
detection terminal
Thousands place: Brake mode
0: mode 0
1: mode 1
Myriabit: Reverse unwinding
mode
0: No speed limit
1: Reverse speed limit by F27.24
Ones place of F27.20 = 0: automatic detection
Wire disconnection is detected automatically by the inverter. In this mode, F09.35 and
F09.36 must be set accurately.
Ones place of F27.20 = 1: external signal
Wire disconnection is detected by the external proximity switch.
Tens place of F27.20 = 0: Detection with the output greater than the lower limit of
material cutoff detection
When the stop command is received, and the output frequency is less than the set value of
F27.22, wire disconnection will not be detected.
Tens place of F27.20 = 1: no detection
Wire disconnection will not be detected.
Hundreds place of F27.20 = 0: Protection terminal action only
In case of wire disconnection, the inverter will continue to run at the set frequency of
F27.24, and only the 68# function terminal and protection output terminal will act.
295
Hundreds place of F27.20 = 1: Delayed stop and trip protection
In case of wire disconnection, the 68# function terminal and protection output terminal
will act, the inverter will stop after running at the frequency of F27.24 for the time of F27.23
and then the protection will be enabled.
Hundreds place of F27.20 = 2: Material cutoff protection
In case of wire disconnection, the inverter will be in the protection status.
Hundreds place of F27.20 = 3: Automatic reset of material cutoff protection
In case of wire disconnection, the inverter will be in the protection status and reset
automatically after the set delay time of F27.26.
Hundreds place of F27.20 = 4: Only output of material cutoff detection terminal (for
the straight wire drawing machine only)
In case of wire disconnection, the inverter will not be subject to trip protection, and only
the output terminal for material cutoff detection output will be valid.
Hundreds place of F27.20 =5: Automatic resetting of material cutoff detection
terminal (for the straight wire drawing machine only)
This is the same as the option 4. The terminal of material cutoff detection output is invalid
only when the swing rod returns to the normal range.
Thousands place of F27.20 = 0: Mode 0
Mode 0: When the output frequency is within the brake signal output frequency (F27.25)
from top to bottom, the brake will not work.
Thousands place of F27.20 = 1: Mode 1
Mode 1: When the output frequency is within the brake signal output frequency (F27.25)
from top to bottom, the brake will work.
Ten hundreds places of F27.20 = 0: no speed limit
There is no reverse speed limit.
Ten hundreds places of F27.20 = 1: reverse speed limit by F27.24
There is no reverse speed limit by F27.24.
code name setting
Material cutoff
F27.21 0.0~10.0 s 6.0 ●
detection delay
When the inverter receives the running command, wire disconnection detection will be
performed after the set time.
code name setting
Lower limit of
material cutoff
F27.22 0.00 - 60.00 Hz 5.00 ●
detection after
parking
If the tens place of F27.20 is set to 0 and the inverter decelerates to this frequency, wire
296
disconnection will not be detected.
(This function will not be enabled until the output frequency of the inverter must exceed
this frequency after the soft start time and be lower than this frequency after deceleration.)
code name setting
Time of
continuous
F27.23 0.0 - 60.0 s 10.0 ●
running after
material cutoff
Frequency of
continuous
F27.24 0.00~Fmax Hz 5.00 ●
running after
material cutoff
The set time of F27.23 is calculated when the wire disconnection is identified. According
to the setting of F27.24, the operating frequency in this period is reverse during unwinding and
positive during winding.
code name setting
Brake signal
F27.25 0.00~Fup Hz 2.50 ●
output frequency
Braking signal
F27.26 0.0-100.0 s 5.0 ●
duration
F27.25 and F27.26 are not valid until one output terminal is defined as “brake control”
(67# function).
When the output frequency of the inverter drops to the set value of F27.25, the brake control
terminal will be valid and maintained (the brake mode 1 is enabled).
It will be invalid after the set time of F27.26. When the brake control terminal is valid, the
inverter will stop freely.
There is no response to the running command when the brake control terminal is valid.
If F27.26 is set to 0.0, the brake control terminal will remain valid and can be reset by the
brake reset terminal or protection reset terminal.
code name setting
Minimum
F27.27 frequency of 0.00~20.00 Hz 10.00 ●
wiring detection
Judgment time
F27.28 for invalid cable 0.1 - 20.0 s 10.0 ●
signal
297
Judgment time
F27.29 for valid cable 0.1 - 20.0 s 2.0 ●
signal
When the input terminal is set to “122: wiring detection signal”, F27.27-F27.29 will be
valid.
When the output frequency of the inverter reaches the set value of F27.27, wiring
detection will be started.
If the wiring detection terminal is valid within the set time of F27.28, the wiring switch
will be considered invalid.
If the wiring detection terminal is always valid within the set time of F27.29, the wiring
pole will stop moving.
If the wiring pole protection is detected, the inverter will report E44 protection and stop
freely.
code name setting
Filtering time for
F27.30 material cutoff 1 - 100 ms 5 ●
detection
The set time of this function is the filtering time of material cutoff detection. It is valid
simultaneously for automatic material cutoff detection and external material cutoff detection.
code name setting
Current value of
F27.36 -500.0~500.0 % ×
feedforward gain
This function code is used to view the current feedforward gain.
Chapter 8 Motor Parameter Self-identification
8.1 Motor Parameter Self-identification

When the vector control mode is selected, the motor parameters must be self-identified. For
non-vector control, it is recommended to perform parameter self-identification during the first
run in order to improve the control accuracy.
The motor parameters required for calculation in vector control are usually not available to
users. The EM730/EM730E series inverter has the function of motor parameter
self-identification. When the self-identification is enabled, the inverter will automatically test
298
the relevant parameters of the connected motor and store them into the internal memory. Fig.
8-18 shows the specific meanings of the parameters of the three-phase asynchronous motor.
R1 L1-Lm R2 L2-Lm
I1
I2
U1 (1-s)/s*R2
I0 Lm
Fig. 8-18 Equivalent Circuit of Three-phase Asynchronous Motor

R1, R2, L1, L2, Lm, and I0 in the figure represent: stator resistance, rotor resistance, stator
self-inductance, rotor self-inductance, mutual inductance, and no-load excitation current. The
leakage inductance is Ls=L-Lm.
8.2 Precautions before Self-identification

 Motor parameter self-identification is a process of automatically measuring motor
parameters. The EM730/EM730E series inverter can perform the static and rotary
self-identification of motor parameters.
 The static self-identification is applicable when the motor load cannot be removed but
the motor parameters are available.
 The rotary self-identification is suitable when the motor load can be removed. The
motor shaft needs to be disconnected from the load before operation. The rotary
self-identification must not be performed when the motor is under load.
 Prior to self-identification, make sure that the motor is stopped; otherwise,
self-identification cannot be performed properly.
 Self-identification is valid only in the keyboard control mode (i.e. F00.02=0).
 In order to ensure the normal self-identification of motor parameters, the nameplate
parameters (F01.00: motor type; F01.01: rated power of the motor; F01.02: rated voltage of
the motor; F01.03: rated current of the motor; F01.04: rated frequency of the motor; F01.05:
rated speed of the motor; F01.06: winding connection of the motor; F01.07: rated power
factor of the motor) of the controlled motor should be set correctly. When the Y series
motor is used based on the specified power of the inverter, its default settings can meet
299
most requirements.
 In order to ensure the control performance, the power of the motor should match with that
of the inverter, or the former should be one level lower than the latter under normal
circumstances.
 After the normal self-identification of motor parameters, the set values of F01.09 to
F01.13 and F01.19 to F01.22 will be updated and automatically saved.
 When F12.14=1 is restored to the default setting, the values of the function codes F01.00 to
F01.13 and F01.19 to F01.22 remain unchanged.
8.3 Self-identification Steps

 Set F00.02=0 in the parameter setting status and disconnect the motor from the load.
 According to the motor nameplate parameters, set F01.00 (motor type), F01.01 (rated
power of the motor), F01.02 (rated voltage of the motor), F01.03 (rated current of the
motor), F01.04 (rated frequency of the motor), F01.05 (rated speed of the motor), F01.06
(winding connection of the motor) and F01.07 (rated power factor of the motor),
respectively.
 For the asynchronous motor:
Set F01.34=1 and press . The inverter will start the static self-identification of the
motor. Or, set F01.34=2 and press . The inverter will start the rotary
 For the synchronous motor:
Set F01.34=11 and press . The inverter will start the static self-identification of the
motor. Or, set F01.34=12 and press . The inverter will start the rotary
 It takes about two minutes to complete the self-identification of the motor. Then the system
will return to the initial power-on status.
 During the self-identification, if you press the STOP/RESET key , “E24” (parameter
identification abnormality) will be displayed; and if you press the STOP/RESET key
, the system will return to the parameter setting status.
If the self-identification fails, “E24” (parameter identification abnormality) will be
displayed. If the STOP/RESET key is pressed , the system will return to the parameter
setting status.
300
Chapter 9 Protection/Warning Solutions
9.1 Protection content

When the inverter is in the abnormal status, the digital tube display will show the
corresponding protection code and its parameters, the protection relay and protection output
terminal will work, and the inverter will stop the output. In case of protection, the motor will
stop rotating normally or slow down until it is stopped. The protection contents and solutions of
the EM730/EM730E series inverter are shown in Table Table 9-26.
Table 9-26 Protection Contents and Solutions of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter
Protection
Protection Type Protection Cause Protection Solution
code
1. Short circuit to the ground.
2. Inter-phase short circuit
1. Check the wiring for short circuits.
3. Short circuit of the external
2. Properly increase the acceleration
braking resistor.
and deceleration time.
Short circuit 4. The acceleration and
E01 protection deceleration time is too short.
3. Investigate the cause and reset the
controller after implementing the
5. The inverter module is
corresponding solutions.
damaged.
4. Seek technical support.
6. There is excessive on-site
interference.
1. The acceleration and
deceleration time is too short.
2. In the V/F drive mode, the V/F
curve setting is unreasonable. 1. Increase the acceleration and
3. The motor is running during deceleration time.
startup. 2. Reasonably set the V/F curve.
4. The motor used is beyond the 3. Enable speed tracking or start DC
Instantaneous capacity of the inverter or the braking.
E02 overcurrent load is too heavy. 4. Use the appropriate motor or
5. Motor parameters are not inverter.
suitable and need to be 5. Identify the motor parameters.
identified. 6. Check the wiring for short circuits.
6. The phases on the output side 7. Seek technical support.
of the inverter are
short-circuited.
7. The inverter is damaged.
301
Steady-state
E04 overcurrent
The same as E02 The same as E02
1. Increase the deceleration time.

1. The deceleration time is too
2. Check the wiring of the braking
short, and the motor has too
unit and braking resistor.
much regenerated energy.
3. Use a suitable braking unit/braking
2. The braking unit or braking
resistor.
resistor forms an open circuit.
E05 Overvoltage
3. The braking unit or braking
4. Reduce the power voltage to the
specified range.
resistor does not match.
5. For the model of the built-in
4. The power voltage is too high.
braking unit, set F15.30 to 1, and
5. The energy consumption
enable the energy consumption
braking function is not enabled
braking.
1. The input power supply is
subject to phase loss. 1. Check the input power supply and
2. The terminals of the input wiring.
power supply are loose. 2. Tighten the screws of input
E06 Undervoltage
3. The voltage of the input power terminals.
supply drops too much. 3. Check the air circuit breaker and
4. The switch contacts of the contactor.
input power supply are aging.
1. Check the input power supply.
2. Check the wiring of the input
1. The input power supply is
power supply.
subject to phase loss.
E07 Input phase loss
2. The input power supply
3. Check whether the terminal is
loose
fluctuates greatly.
4. Use a voltage regulator on the
input side.
1. Check the connection between the
inverter and motor.
1. The output terminals U, V and 2. Check whether the output terminal
E08 Output phase loss
W have phase losses. is loose.
3. Check whether the motor winding
is disconnected.
1. Increase the acceleration and
deceleration time.
2. In the V/F drive mode, the V/F
2. Reasonably set the V/F curve.
curve setting is unreasonable.
3. Use the inverter that matches the
E09 Inverter overload 3. The load is too heavy.
load.
4. The braking time is too long,
4. Reduce the braking time and
the braking intensity is too
braking intensity. Do not enable
high, or DC braking is enabled
DC braking repeatedly.
repeatedly.
302
1. The operating environment of the
1. The ambient temperature is too inverter should meet the
high. specifications.
E10 Inverter overheat 2. The inverter is subject to poor 2. Improve the ventilation
ventilation. environment and check whether
3. The cooling fan fails. the air duct is blocked.
3. Replace the cooling fan.
Parameter setting 1. There is a logic conflict in 1. Check whether parameters set is
E11 conflict parameter settings. illogical before the protection.
1. Increase the acceleration and
deceleration time.
E13 Motor overload 2. In the V/F drive mode, the V/F
2. Reasonably set the V/F curve.
curve setting is unreasonable.
3. Use a motor matching the load.
3. The load is too heavy.
External 1. The protection terminal of the
E14 protection external device acts.
1. Check the external device.
1. Interference results in memory

1. Press the STOP/RESET key to
reading and writing errors.
reset the controller and try again.
Inverter memory 2. The internal memory of the
E15 protection controller is read and written
2. For the parameters (e.g. frequency
setting) to be modified frequently,
repeatedly, causing damage to
set F10.56 to 11 after debugging.
the memory.
1. F10.03 is set to 0.0 in the
1. Communication timeout is discontinuous communication
enabled in the discontinuous system.
Communication
E16 error
communication system. 2. Adjust the F10.03 communication
2. Communication is timeout.
disconnected. 3. Check whether the communication
cable is disconnected.
Abnormality of 1. Check whether the inverter
inverter The inverter temperature sensor is temperature sensor is connected
E17 temperature disconnected or short-circuited. properly.
sensor 2. Seek technical support.
1. The power supply fails during
operation. 1. Stop the inverter before power-off,
2. The input power supply is or directly reset the protection.
subject to phase loss. 2. Check the input power supply and
The soft start
3. The terminals of the input wiring.
E18 relay is not
power supply are loose. 3. Tighten the screws of input
engaged.
4. The voltage of the input power terminals.
supply drops too much. 4. Check the air circuit breaker and
5. The switch contacts of the contactor.
input power supply are aging.
303
Error of current The detection circuit of the drive
E19 detection circuit board or control board is damaged.
1. The deceleration time is too 1. Increase the deceleration time.

short. 2. Check the dynamic brake.
E20 Stall protection 2. Error of dynamic brake for 3. Check whether the motor cannot
deceleration. be stopped as it is driven by
3. The load is too heavy. another load.
1. Check whether the feedback line
1. The PID feedback is greater falls off.
than the upper limit (F09.24) or 2. Check whether the sensor is
PID feedback
E21 disconnection
less than the lower limit working abnormally.
(F09.25), depending on the 3. Adjust the detection value of
type of the feedback sensor. feedback disconnection to a
reasonable level.
1. Press the STOP/RESET key
during parameter 1. Press the STOP/RESET key to
identification. reset.
2. The external terminal stops 2. The external terminal should not
working (FRS = ON) properly be operated during parameter
Self-identificatio during parameter identification.
E24 n error identification. 3. Check the connection between the
3. The motor is not connected. inverter and motor.
4. The rotary self-learning motor 4. Disconnect the rotary self-learning
is not disconnected from the motor from the load.
load. 5. Check the motor.
5. The motor fails.
1. The motor is not connected or 1、 Check the wiring and use the
does not match the load. appropriate motor
Load loss 2. Load loss occurs. 2、 Check the equipment.
E26 protection 3. The parameters of load loss 3、 Change the off-load detection
protection are not set level F07.22 and detection time
reasonably. F07.23.
Up to cumulative 1. The inverter maintenance time 1. Please contact the dealer for
E27 power-on time is up. technical support.
Up to cumulative 1. The inverter maintenance time 1. Please contact the dealer for
E28 running time is up. technical support.
1. Check whether the sensor can work
1. The valid time of the wiring
normally.
detection terminal is too long.
E44 2. The invalid time of the wiring
2. Check whether the terminal is
capable of properly judging the
detection terminal is too long.
Wiring protection closing and opening.
Overpressure in 1. The feedback pressure in the 1. Check whether the sensor is in the
E57 pipeline network water supply application is too abnormal status.
304
high. 2. Check the analog terminal for
normal detection of analog input.
1. Check whether the sensor is in the
Under-pressure 1. The feedback pressure in the abnormal status.
E58 in pipeline water supply application is too 2. Check the analog terminal for
network low. normal detection of analog input.
1. Check whether the output cable is
1. The output is short-circuited to broken or whether the motor shell
ground. is broken down.
Short circuit to
E76 the ground
2. The inverter module is 2. Investigate the cause and reset the
damaged. controller after implementing the
corresponding solutions.
When the inverter is subject to the aforesaid protection, press the STOP/RESET key
to reset/clear protection or use the protection resetting terminal to exit the protection
status. If the protection has been eliminated, the inverter will return to the function setting status;
otherwise, the digital tube will continue to display the current protection information.
The protection number corresponds to the digit behind the letter “E”. For example, the digit
corresponding to “EXX” is “XX”.
For example, E01 corresponds to 1, and E10 corresponds to 10.
Comparison table of digital font display:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
The prompt codes and description of inverter operation are as follows:

Prompt Code Description
P.-ON The inverter is in the power-on status.
P.-OFF The inverter is in the power-off status.
If the soft starter is not engaged, the inverter will show the SOFT.E prompt after startup.
SoFT.E When the voltage is restored and the soft starter is engaged, the inverter will work
normally.
305
9.2 Protection analysis

If the motor does not work as expected due to errors in function setting and external control
terminal connection after the inverter is powered on, refer to the analysis in this section for the
corresponding solutions. If a protection code is displayed, see the solutions in 9.1.
9.2.1 Failure in parameter setting of function codes
 The displayed parameters remain unchanged during the forward or reverse spinning of the
digital potentiometer.
When the inverter is in the running status, some code parameters cannot be modified
without stopping the inverter.
 The displayed parameters can be modified but cannot be stored during the forward or
reverse spinning of the digital potentiometer.
Some function codes are locked and cannot be modified.
When F12.02 is set to 1 or 2, parameter changes are restricted. Please set F12.02 to 0. Or,
this occurs after the user password is set.
9.2.2 Abnormality of motor rotation
 When the RUN key on the keyboard is pressed, the motor does not rotate.
 Terminal control of the start and stop: Check the setting of the function code
F00.02.
 The free stop terminal FRS and COM are closed: Disconnect the free stop terminal
FRS from COM.
 Switching of the running command to terminal is valid. In this case, the running
command is only subject to terminal control. This will be invalid if modified.
 The status combination of the running command channel is terminal control:
Change it to keyboard control.
 The reference input frequency is set to 0: Increase the reference input frequency.
 The input power supply is abnormal or the control circuit fails.
 The control terminals RUN and F/R are ON, and the motor does not rotate.
 Enabling of the stop function by the external terminal is invalid: Check the setting
of function code F00.02.
 Free stop terminal FRS=ON: Change the free stop terminal to FRS=OFF.
 Control switch failure: Check the control switch.
306
 The reference input frequency is set to 0: Increase the reference input frequency.
 The motor can only rotate in one direction.
Reverse running is prohibited: When the reverse running prohibition code F00.21 is set to 1,
the inverter is not allowed for reverse running.
 The motor rotates in the opposite direction.
The output phase sequence of the inverter is inconsistent with the input phase sequence of the
motor: Exchange any two of the motor wires in the power-off status to change the rotation
direction of the motor.
9.2.3 Too long acceleration time of motor
 The current limit level is too low.
When the overcurrent limit setting is valid, and the output current of the inverter reaches
the set current limit, the output frequency will remain unchanged during acceleration, until the
output current is less than the limit. Then the output frequency will continue to rise. This makes
the acceleration time of the motor longer than the set time. Check whether the set current limit
of the inverter is too low.
 The set acceleration time is too long. Please check the acceleration time code.
9.2.4 Too long deceleration time of motor
 When energy consumption braking is valid:
 The resistance of the braking resistor is too high, and the energy consumption
braking power is too low, which extends the deceleration time.
 The set value of braking rate (F15.32) is too small, which extends the deceleration
time. Increase the set value of braking rate.
 The set deceleration time is too long. Check the deceleration time code.
 When the stall protection is valid:
 When the overvoltage stall protection is enabled, and the DC bus voltage exceeds
the voltage of overvoltage stall (F07.07), the output frequency will remains unchanged;
and when the DC bus voltage is lower than F07.07, the output frequency will continue
to drop, which extends the deceleration time.
 The set deceleration time is too long. Check the deceleration time code.
9.2.5 Electromagnetic interference and RF interference
 Since the inverter works in the high-frequency switching status, electromagnetic
307
interference and RF interference will be generate to the control device. The following measures
can be taken.
 Reduce the carrier frequency (F00.23) of the inverter.
 Install a noise filter on the input side of the inverter.
 Install a noise filter on the output side of the inverter.
 Install a metal tube outside the cables. Install the inverter in a metal casing.
 Make the inverter and motor grounded reliably.
 Connect the main circuit and control circuit separately. Use the shielded cables in
the control circuit, and connect them according to the wiring method in Chapter 3.
9.2.6 Action of leakage circuit breaker
 When the inverter is running, the leakage circuit breaker works.
Since the inverter outputs high-frequency PWM signals, a high-frequency leakage current
will be generated. Please use the dedicated leakage circuit breaker with the current sensitivity
above 30 mA. If an ordinary leakage circuit breaker is used, use a leakage circuit breaker with
the current sensitivity above 200 mA and action time of more than 0.1 s.
9.2.7 mechanical vibration
 The inherent frequency of the mechanical system resonates with the carrier frequency of
the inverter.
The motor is not faulty, but the mechanical system produces sharp resonant sounds. This is
caused by the resonation between the inherent frequency of the mechanical system and carrier
frequency of the inverter. Please adjust the carrier frequency (F00.23) to avoid resonation.
 The inherent frequency of the mechanical system resonates with the output frequency of
the inverter.
Resonation between the inherent frequency of the mechanical system and output frequency
of the inverter will lead to mechanical noise. Please use the vibration suppression function
(F05.13), or install the anti-vibration rubber or take other anti-vibration measures on the motor
base.
 PID control oscillation
The adjustment parameters P, Ti and Td of the PID controller are not set correctly. Please
set the PID parameters again.
308
9.2.8 Motor rotation in the absence of inverter output
 Insufficient DC braking for stop
 The DC braking torque for stop is too small. Please increase the set value of the DC
braking current for stop (F04.21).
 The DC braking time for stop is short. Please increase the set value of the DC
braking time for stop (F04.22). Under normal circumstances, please give priority to
increase in the DC braking current for stop.
9.2.9 Inconsistency between output frequency and set frequency
 The set frequency exceeds the upper frequency limit.
When the set frequency exceeds the set value of the upper frequency limit, the output
frequency will be the upper frequency limit. Set the frequency again within the upper frequency
limit range; or check whether F00.16, F00.17 and F00.18 are appropriate.
309
Maintenance
9.3 Daily Maintenance of Inverter
The inverter may be subject to various faults due to changes in its operating environment,
such as the impact of temperature, humidity, smoke, dust and the like, and ageing of internal
components. Thus, daily inspection and regular maintenance should be carried out to the
inverter during storage and operation.
 Check whether the components of the inverter are intact and whether the screws are
tightened after transportation and before operation.
 During the normal operation of the inverter, clean dust on a regular basis and check
whether the screws are tightened.
 If the inverter is not in use for a long time, it is recommended to power it on (preferably
30 min) once every six months during storage, to prevent the failure of electronic
components.
 The inverter should not be used in the humid place or place with metal dust. If necessary,
use the inverter in an electrical cabinet with protective measures or an on-site protective
cabin.
Please check the following items during the normal operation of the inverter:
 Check the motor for abnormal sound and vibration.
 Check the inverter and motor for abnormal heating.
 Check whether the ambient temperature is too high.
 Check whether the output current is normal.
 Check whether the cooling fan of the inverter works properly.
Depending on the usage, the user needs to check the inverter on a regular basis to eliminate
faults and safety hazards. Prior to the inspection, turn off the power supply and wait until the
LED indicator of the keyboard is OFF, and then wait for 10min. The check content is shown in
Table Table 4-27.
310
Table 4-27 Content of Regular Inspection

Check Item Check Content Solution
Screws of main
circuit terminals Check whether the screws are Tighten the screws with a
and control circuit loose. screwdriver.
terminals
Cooling fins
Check whether there is dust or Purge them with dry compressed
PCB (printed circuit
foreign objects. air (pressure: 4-6 kg/cm2).
board)
Check it for abnormal noise and
vibration. Check whether the
Cooling fan Replace the cooling fan
cumulative running time is up to
20,000 hours.
Purge them with dry compressed
Power components Check whether there is dust.
air (pressure: 4-6 kg/cm2).
Electrolytic Check it for color changes, odor
Replace the electrolytic capacitor.
capacitor and bubbles.
In order to make the inverter work properly in a long time, regular maintenance and
replacement must be performed regularly based on the service life of its internal components.
The service life of the components of the inverter varies depending on the operating
environment and conditions. The replacement period of the inverter in Table 4-28 is for
reference only.
Table 4-28 Replacement Intervals of Inverter Components
Name of Part Standard Replacement Interval (Year)
Cooling fan 2-3 years
Electrolytic capacitor 4-5 years
Printed circuit board 5-8 years
The operating conditions for replacement of the inverter components listed in the above
table are as follows:
Ambient temperature: Annual average 30℃.
Load factor: Less than 80%.
Operating time: less than 12 hours per day.
9.4 Instructions for Inverter Warranty

Our company will provide warranty services for the inverter in the following cases.
311
The warranty applies to the inverter body only. Our company is responsible for the
warranty of the inverter that fails or is damaged within 12 months during normal operation, and
will charge reasonable maintenance fees after 12 months.
Certain maintenance fees will also be charged within one year in the following cases:
 The inverter is damaged due to noncompliance with the instructions in this manual
during operation;
 The inverter is damaged due to flood, fire, abnormal voltage, etc.;
 The inverter is damaged as a result of incorrect wiring;
 The inverter is damaged due to unauthorized modification.
Relevant service fees will be calculated based on the actual costs.
If any, the additional agreement shall prevail.
312
Chapter 10 Select accessories
10.1 Braking Resistor

If the speed of the controlled motor drops too fast or the motor load shakes too fast during
the inverter operation, its electromotive force will charge the internal capacitor reversely via the
inverter, resulting in the voltage boost at two ends of the power module. This is likely to cause
damage to the inverter. The internal control of the inverter will suppress this based on the load.
If the braking performance does not meet the customer requirements, an external braking
resistor is needed to release energy in a timely manner. Due to the external braking resistor of
energy consumption braking type, the energy will be completely dissipated to the power braking
resistor. Hence, the power and resistance of the braking resistor must be selected reasonably and
effectively.
The power of the braking resistor can be calculated by the following formula:
Resistor power Pb = inverter power P × braking frequency D
D - Braking frequency. This is an estimated value, depending on the load conditions. Under
normal circumstances, D is as follows:
D=10% under ordinary loads
D=5% for occasional braking loads
D = 10% to 15% for elevators
D = 5% to 20% for centrifuges
D = 10% to 20% for oilfield kowtow machines
D = 50% to 60% for unwinding and winding. It should be calculated based on the system
design indicators.
313
D = 50% to 60% for lifting equipment with a lowering height over 100m
The recommended power and resistance for the braking resistor of the EM730/EM730E
series inverter are given in the table below. The recommended resistor power is calculated based
on the braking rate (10% to 20%). It is for reference only. If the inverter is used in the case of
frequent acceleration/deceleration or continuous braking, the power of the braking resistor needs
to be increased. The user can change the value according to the load conditions, but within the
specified range.
Wire (mm2)
Motor Resistance Resistor Power
Inverter Model Connected to
(kW) (Ω) (W)
Resistor
EM730/EM730E-0R4-2B 0.4 ≧360 ≧200 1
EM730/EM730E-0R7-2B 0.75 ≧180 ≧400 1.5
EM730/EM730E-1R5-2B 1.5 ≧180 ≧400 1.5
EM730/EM730E-2R2-2B 2.2 ≧90 ≧800 2.5
EM730/EM730E-0R7-3B 0.75 ≧360 ≧200 1
EM730/EM730E-1R5-3B 1.5 ≧180 ≧400 1.5
EM730/EM730E-2R2-3B 2.2 ≧180 ≧400 1.5
EM730/EM730E-4R0-3B 4 ≧90 ≧800 2.5
EM730/EM730E-5R5-3B 5.5 ≧60 ≧1000 4
EM730/EM730E-7R5-3B 7.5 ≧60 ≧1000 4
EM730/EM730E-011-3B 11 ≧30 ≧2000 6
EM730/EM730E-015-3B 15 ≧30 ≧2000 6
EM730/EM730E-018-3B 18.5 ≧30 ≧2000 6
EM730/EM730E-022-3B 22 ≧15 ≧4000 6
EM730/EM730E-030-3B 30 ≧10 ≧4000 6
EM730/EM730E-037-3B 37 ≧10 ≧6000 6
★ The wires listed above refer to the outgoing wires of a single resistor. If resistors are
connected in parallel, the bus should be enlarged accordingly. The withstand voltage
of the wires should be AC300V or above for the single-phase model and AC450V or
above for the three-phase model. Cables should be resistant to 105℃.
10.2 Braking unit

For the EM730/EM730E series inverters (EM730/EM730E-045-3 and above), use our
BR100 series braking units (power range: 18.5-160kW). The models of our braking units are as
follows.
314
Minimum Applicable
Model and Average Braking Peak Current
Application Resistance Inverter Power
specification Current Iav(A) Imax(A)
(Ω) (kW)
BR100-045 Energy 10 45 75 18.5 - 45
consumption
braking
BR100-160 Energy 6 75 150 55 - 160
consumption
braking
★ When BR100-160 works with the minimum resistance, the braking unit can work
continuously at the braking frequency D=33%.
In the case of D>33%, intermittent operation will be performed; otherwise, the
over-temperature protection will be enabled.
10.2.1 Selection of Connecting Wires

Since all braking units and braking resistors work at high voltage (>400VDC) and in the
discontinuous status, please select appropriate wires. See Table 4-29 for the wiring
specifications of the main circuit. Use the cables with the conforming insulation levels and
cross-sections.
Table 4-29 Wire Specifications of Braking Units and Braking Resistors
Specification Average Braking Peak Braking Current Cross-section (mm2) of
and model Current Iav(A) Imax(A) Copper-core Cable
BR100-045 45 75 10
BR100-160 75 150 16
BR100-315 120 300 25
Flexible cables have higher flexibility. Because cables may be in contact with
high-temperature devices, it is recommended to use copper-core and heat-resistant flexible
cables or flame-retardant cables. The braking unit should be close to the inverter as much as
possible and no more than 2m far away from the inverter. Otherwise, the DC-side cables should
be twisted and used with magnetic rings to reduce radiation and inductance.
The lengths of connecting wires of the braking unit, braking resistor and inverter are shown
in Fig. 4-19.
315
< 2m > 2m
Braking Braking
Inverter
unit resistor
Fig. 4-19 Wire Length
10.3 Wi-Fi module

Applicable Wi-Fi module and model for EM730/EM730E series inverters: EM730-WIFI. The
inverter can be controlled by the mobile phone APP, PC background software and the like for
quick parameter setting, parameter copying and status monitoring of the inverter.
Installation of the Wi-Fi module: First unplug the keyboard from the inverter and then
install the Wi-Fi module to the original keyboard position.
The external schematic diagram of the Wi-Fi module is as follows.
316
Chapter 11 MODBUS Communication Protocol
11.1 Applicable scope

1、 Applicable series: EM730/EM730E series
2、 Applicable network: Support the “single-master multi-slave” communication network
with MODBUS-RTU protocol and RS-485 bus.
Host
A- A+
A-
A+
A- A+ A- A+ A- A+
Inverter 1# Inverter 2# Inverter n#
11.2 Interface mode

RS-485 asynchronous half-duplex communication mode, with the least significant bit sent
first;
RS-485 network address: 1-247; 0 is the broadcast address;
Default data format of RS-485 terminal: 1-8-N-1[2] (options: 1-8-E-1, 1-8-O-1, 1-8-N-2,
1-8-E-2 and 1-8-O-2);
Default baud rate of RS-485 terminal: 9600bps (options: 4800bps, 19200bps, 38400bps,
57600bps and 115200bps)
It is recommended to use twisted-pair shielded cable as the communication cable to reduce
the impact of external interference on communication.
[2]: 1-8-N-1, meaning 1 start bit - 8 characters per byte of data - no parity - 1 stop bit. E:
even parity. O: odd parity.
11.3 Protocol Format

11.3.1 Message format
As shown in Fig. 12-20, a standard MODBUS message includes a start tag, RTU (Remote
Terminal Unit) message, and end tag.
317
RTU message
PDU
Function
Start Address Data CRC check End
code
≥3.5 characters 8 digits 8 digits N*8 bits 2*8 bit ≥3.5 characters
Address Number
of of Register content
regis ter regis ters
2*8 bit 2*8 bit 2 * number of registers * 8 bits
Fig. 12-20 Schematic Diagram of Message Frame in RTU Mode

The RTU message includes the address code, PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and CRC[3] check.
The PDU includes the function code and data part (mainly including the register address,
number of registers, register content and the like; the detailed definitions of function codes are
different, as shown in 11.3.3Function code).
[3]: the low byte of CRC check is in front of the high byte.
11.3.2 Address code
Address Range Purpose
1 - 247 Slave
0 Broadcast
11.3.3 Function code
The classification of MODBUS function codes is shown in Fig. 12-21.
127（0x7F） Common function

code
110（0x6E） User-defined
100（0x64） function code
Common function
code
72（0x48） User-defined
65（0x41）
function code
Common function
code
1（0x1）
Fig. 12-21 Classification of MODBUS Function Codes
318
As shown in Table 12-30, EM730/EM730E series products mainly involve common

function codes. For example, 0x03: function code used to read multiple registers or status
words, 0x06: function code used to write a single register or command, 0x10: function code
used to write multiple registers or commands, and 0x08: function code for diagnosis.
In addition, for some specific functions, such as register writing (RAM) without EEPROM
storage, the user-defined function codes include 0x41: function code used to write a single
register or command (without saving), and 0x42: function code used to write multiple registers
or commands (without saving).
When the abnormal valid data is received from a device, a related abnormality message
will be returned (see 11.3.7Exception response). The abnormality function code is defined to
distinguish the abnormal data from normal communication data. Corresponding to the normal
request function code, the abnormality function code = request function code + 0x80.
Table 12-30 Function Code Definitions of EM730/EM730E series Product
Function Abnormality Function
code function code
03 83 This function code is used to read multiple registers or status
words.
41 C1 This function code is used to write a single register or
command without saving.
42 C2 This function code is used to write multiple registers or
commands without saving.
08 88 This function code is used for diagnosis.
06 86 This function code is used to write a single register or
command.
10 90 This function code is used to write multiple registers or
commands.
PDU parts are detailed in the following sections, depending on various functions.
1.1.1.1 0x03: function code used to read multiple registers or status words
In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to read the content in the continuous
block of the holding register. The request PDU describes the starting register address and the
number of registers.
319
The register data in the response message is divided into two bytes in each register. The
first byte of each register includes high-order bits and the second byte includes low-order bits.
 Request PDU
Function code 1 byte 0x03
Starting Address 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Number of registers 2 bytes 1 - 16
 Response PDU
Number of bytes 1 byte 2×N*
Register value N*×2 bytes
N* = number of registers
 Error PDU
Error code 1 byte 0x83
Exception code 1 byte 01, 02, 03 or 04
Below is an example of a request to read the registers F19.00 to F19.05 (relevant

information about the last protection):
Request Respond
Domain name (0x) Domain name (normal) (0x) Domain name (0x)
(abnormal)
Function code 03 Function code 03 Function 83
Starting address 13 Number of bytes 0C 03
Hi (example,
Exception code
Starting address 00 Register value Hi 00 the same
Lo (F19.00) below)
Number (Hi) of 00 Register value Lo 11
registers (F19.00)
Number (Lo) of 06 Register value Hi 00
registers (F19.01)
Register value Lo 00
(F19.01)
Register value Hi 00
(F19.02)
(F19.02)
320
(F19.03)
Register value Lo 2C
(F19.03)
(F19.04)
(F19.04)
(F19.05)
(F19.05)
According to the returned data, the “17 (0011H): temperature sensor abnormality
protection” of the inverter is enabled, in which the output frequency is 0.00Hz, the output
current is 0.00A, the bus voltage is 300V (012CH), the acceleration and deceleration status is
“standby”, and the working time is 0 hour.
★： At present, the function code 0x03 of MODBUS protocol supports the reading of
multiple function codes across groups. However, it is recommended not to read them
across groups in the case of no special requirements, so the customer’s software does not
need to be upgraded after our products are upgraded.
1.1.1.2 0x41: function code used to write a single register or command (without saving)
In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write a single non-holding register.
The request PDU describes the address to be written to the register.
The normal response is the response made to the request, which is returned after the
register content is written.
 Request PDU
Address of register 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Register value 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
 Response PDU
Address of 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
register
321
 Error PDU
Error code 1 byte 0xC1
Exception code 1 byte SeeTable 4-33
Below is an example of a request to change the main frequency source A (7001H) to

“-50.00%”:
Request Respond
Domain name (0x) Domain name (0x) Domain name (0x)
(normal) (abnormal)
Function 41 Function 41 Function C1
Register address Hi 70 Register address 70
Hi Exception
03
Register address Lo 01 Register address 01 code
Lo
Register value Hi EC Register value Hi EC
Register value Lo 78 Register value Lo 78
★ This function code cannot be used to change the parameters of the attribute “○” (it
cannot be changed during operation). That is, only the parameters of the attribute “●”
(it can be changed during operation) can be changed. Otherwise, the error code 1 will
be returned.
1.1.1.3 0x42: function code used to write multiple registers or commands (without
saving)
In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write consecutive non-holding
register blocks (1 to 16 registers).
The value requested to be written is described in the request data field. The data of each
register is divided into two bytes.
In the normal response, the function code, starting address and number of registers written
will be returned.
 Request PDU
322
 Response PDU
Number of 2 bytes 1 - 16
registers
 Error PDU
Error code 1 byte 0xC2
Exception code 1 byte See Table 4-33
Below is an example of a request to set the acceleration time 1 (F00.14) to 5.00 and
deceleration time 1 (F00.15) to 6.00:
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Function 42 Function 42 Function C2
Starting address Hi 00 Starting address 00
Hi Exception
03
Starting address Lo 0E Starting address 0E code
Lo
Number (Hi) of registers 00 Number (Hi) of 00
registers
Number (Lo) of registers 02 Number (Lo) of 02
registers
Number of bytes 04
(F00.14)
Register value Lo F4
(F00.14)
(F00.15)
(F00.15)
★ This function code cannot be used to change the parameters of the attribute “○” (it
cannot be changed during operation). That is, only the parameters of the attribute “●”
(it can be changed during operation) can be changed. Otherwise, the error code 1 will
be returned.
323
1.1.1.4 0x08: function code for diagnosis
The Modbus function code 08 involves a series of tests to check the communication system
between the client (master station) and server (slave station), or internal error statuses of the
server.
The test to be executed is defined by the sub-function code fields of two bytes in the
request. The server makes responses properly.
Copy the function codes and sub-function codes. Some diagnoses will enable the remote
terminal unit to return the corresponding data through the data field in normal response.
Under normal circumstances, when the diagnosis function is sent to the remote terminal
unit, the user program in this remote terminal unit will not be affected. The user logic cannot be
accessed by diagnosis, such as: discrete magnitude and register. The error counter in the remote
terminal unit can be remotely reset by applying some functions.
The main diagnosis function used by our company is line diagnosis (0000), which is
used to test the normal communication between the host and slave. The normal response to
a request to return query data is to return the same data. At the same time, the function codes and
sub-function codes are also copied.
 Request PDU
Sub-function code 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Data 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
 Response PDU
Sub-function code 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Data 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
 Error PDU
Exception code 1 byte See Table 4-33
 Sub-function code
324
Sub-fun Meaning Data field Data field
ction (request) (response)
0000 Return query Any Copy request
data data
…
0000: return the data transferred in the request data field in the response. All messages
should be consistent with the request message.
The following table is an example of requesting the remote terminal unit to return query
data. The sub-function code 0000 is used. The returned data is sent in the two-byte data field
(0xA537).
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Function 08 Function 08 Function 88
Sub-function code Hi 00 Sub-function 00
code Hi Exception
03
Sub-function code Lo 00 Sub-function 00 code
code Lo
Data Hi A5 Data Hi A5
Data Lo 37 Data Lo 37
1.1.1.5 0x06: function code used to write a single register or command

In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write a single holding register.
The request PDU describes the address to be written to the register.
The normal response is the response made to the request, which is returned after the
register content is written.
 Request PDU
Address of register 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
 Response PDU
Address of 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
register
325
 Error PDU
Below is an example of a request to change the drive control mode of the motor 1 (F00.01)
to “1: SVC”.
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Register address Hi 00 Register address 00
Hi Exception
03
Register address Lo 01 Register address 01 code
Lo
Register value Hi 00 Register value Hi 00
★ The function code 0x06 cannot be used if modified frequently, in order to avoid
damage to the inverter.
The user-defined function code 0x41 “change without saving” corresponds to the standard
common function code 0x06. Its definition is the same as that of the corresponding standard
function code (the same request, response and error PDU). The difference is that when the slave
responds to this user-defined function code, the corresponding value of RAM is changed only
and not stored in EEPROM (holding register).
For the function codes (e.g. F00.07) that are often modified, it is recommended to use the
function code 0x41 (you can change the main frequency source A by directly setting 7001H, as
detailed in 1.1.1.2 and 11.3.4), to avoid damage to the inverter. The specific operation is as
follows.
Request Respond
Domain name (0x) Domain name (0x)
(normal)
Function 41 Function 41
Register address Hi 00 Register address Hi 00
Register address Lo 07 Register address Lo 07
Register value Hi 13 Register value Hi 13
326
Once the set frequency (F00.07) is set to 50.00Hz, the above data will be valid but not be
stored in EEPROM. That is, the inverter will run at 50.00Hz after change but at the frequency
before change if powered on again.
1.1.1.6 0x10: function code used to write multiple registers or commands

In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write consecutive register blocks
(1 to 16 registers).
The value requested to be written is described in the request data field. The data of each
register is divided into two bytes.
In the normal response, the function code, starting address and number of registers written
will be returned.
 Request PDU
 Response PDU
Number of 2 bytes 1 - 16
registers
 Error PDU
Below is an example of a request to write 00 1 and 00 3 into two registers starting from
F03.00 (i.e. setting the Y1 and Y2 output terminal function):
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Starting address Hi 03 Starting address 03 Exception
03
Hi code
327
Starting address Lo 00 Starting address 00
Lo
Number (Hi) of registers 00 Number (Hi) of 00
registers
Number (Lo) of registers 02 Number (Lo) of 02
registers
Number of bytes 04
(F03.00)
(F03.00)
(F03.01)
(F03.01)
★ The function code 0x10 cannot be used if modified frequently, in order to avoid
damage to the inverter, as detailed in 1.1.1.5.
11.3.4 Register address distribution
Table 12-31 Detailed Definition of Register Address of MODBUS Protocol
Address Space Note
For the function code FXX.YY, the high order is hexadecimal of
Function code
XX and the low order is hexadecimal of YY. For example, the
0000H - 6F63H
address of F00.14 is 000EH (00D=00H, 14D=0EH).
When the parameters are set with the function code 0x06 or
Function code (not saved 0x10, the function that “the settings are valid immediately and
after power-down) not saved after power-down” can be realized in the form of
8000H-EF63H “original address +8000H”. For example, the corresponding
address of F00.14 is 800EH (=000EH+8000H).
0000H Invalid command
0001H Forward running
Control 0002H Reverse running
comman 0003H JOG forward
d (write 0004H JOG reverse
7000H control
only) 0005H Deceleration to stop
word
7000H 0006H Stop the controller quickly
~ 0007H Free stop
71FFH 0008H Reset protection
0009H +/- input switching
000BH JOG stop
328
Others to 00FFH Reserved
Communication
percentage setting -100.00% to 100.00% (100% = maximum
7001H
of main channel frequency)
frequency A
Communication
percentage setting
-100.00% to 100.00% (100% = maximum
7002H of auxiliary
frequency)
channel frequency
B
Torque
-200.00% to 200.00% (100% = digital
7003H communication
torque setting)
setting
Communication
7004H setting of process -100.00% - 100.00%
PID setting
Communication
7005H setting of process -100.00% - 100.00%
PID feedback
Voltage setting of
7006H VF separation 0.00% to 100.00% (digital setting reference)
mode
7007H to
Reserved
7009H
Communication
percentage setting
700AH 0.00% to 200.00% (digital setting reference)
of upper frequency
limit
Communication
percentage setting
700BH of upper frequency 0.00% to 200.00% (digital setting reference)
limit of torque
control
Linear speed input for
700CH inertia compensation 0.00% to 100.00% (digital setting reference)
700DH to
Reserved
700EH
Master-slave
communication -100.00%to 100.00% (maximum reference)
700FH setting
7010H to
Reserved
7013H
7014H External Protection input of external device
329
protection (including option card)
Communication
setting of main
7015H 0.00 to maximum frequency
channel frequency
A
Communication
setting of auxiliary
channel frequency
B
Communication
7017H setting of upper 0.00 to maximum frequency
frequency limit
Communication
setting of upper
frequency limit of
torque control
Communication
setting of upper 0.0 to 250.0% (based on 100.0% or direct
7019H
torque limit of sending)
speed control
Communication Communication setting by M1 terminal,
701AH
setting 1 communication address option 701AH
701CH~71FF
Reserved
H
00H Parameter setting
01H Slave running
02H JOG running
03H Self-learning running
Bit7 to 0 running
04H Slave stop
status
05H JOG stop
7200H status
Working word 1 06H Protection status
status 07H Factory self-inspection
7200H 08H - 0FFH Reserved
~ 00H Normal running of inverter
73FFH Bit15-8 protection Inverter protection status,
information xxH where “xx” is the protection
code
Bit0 setting 1 - setting is valid
7201H status direction 0 + setting is valid
word 2 Bit1 running 1 Reverse frequency output
direction 0 Forward frequency output
330
00 Speed control mode
Bit3 to 2 running 01 Torque control mode
mode 10 Reserved
11 Reserved
Bit4 parameter 1 Valid parameter protection
protection 0 Invalid parameter protection
Bit6 - 5 Reserved
00 Keyboard control
Bit8 to 7 setting 01 Terminal control
mode 10 Communication control
11 Reserved
Bit9 Reserved
0 No warning
Bit10 warning Warning status (see 7230H
1
for details)
Bit15 - 10 Reserved
Bit0 Output frequency
Bit1 Input frequency
7202H
Bit2 Synchronization frequency
monitoring
Bit3 Reserved
frequency +/-
Bit4 Estimate feedback frequency
status word 1
Bit5 Estimated slip frequency
(1: -; 0: +)
Bit6 Load rate
Bit15 to 7 Reserved
7203H Output frequency
7204H Output voltage
7205H Output power
7206H Running speed
7207H Bus voltage
7208H Output torque
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital input * * * * * * * *
7209H
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital input VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1
720AH
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * * * * AI2 AI1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital output * * * * * * * *
720BH
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * * * Y1 * R1
331
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital output VY8 VY7 VY6 VY5 VY4 VY3 VY2 VY1
720CH
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * * * * * *
720DH Previous two protections
720EH Previous three protections
720FH Last protection
7210H Output frequency of the last protection
7211H Output current of the last protection
7212H Bus voltage of the last protection
7213H Running status of the last protection
7214H Working time of the last protection
7215H Set acceleration time
7216H Set deceleration time
7217H Cumulative length
7218H Reserved
7219H UP/DOWN offset frequency symbol (0/1: +/-)
7224H Output current
7225H Set frequency
7228H Cumulative power-on time
Warning
7230H 0: no warning; others: current warning sign
number
Other - 73FFH Reserved
Performance software S/N Corresponding to the function code
7500H
1 F12.22
Performance software Corresponding to the function code
7501H
S/N2 F12.23
Corresponding to the function code
7502H Functional software S/N 1
F12.24
Product 7503H Functional software S/N 2
F12.25
informati
Keyboard software serial Corresponding to the function code
on 7504H
number 1 F12.26
7500H
Keyboard software serial Corresponding to the function code
~ 7505H
number 2 F12.27
75FFH
7506H Serial No. 1
F12.28
7507H Serial No. 2
F12.29
7508H Serial No. 3
F12.30
7509H～ Reserved
332
75FFH
Others Reserved
11.3.5 Definition of frame data length
The PDU part of the RTU frame of the MODBUS message is able to read/write 1-16
registers. For different function codes, the actual length of the RTU frame varies, as detailed in
Table 12-32.
Table 12-32 Correspondence between RTU Frame Length and Function Code
RTU frame length (bytes)
Function code Maximum length
Request Normal response Exception
(0x) (Byte)
response
]
03 8 5+2Nr[4 5 37
41（06） 8 8 5 8
08 8 8 5 8
42（10） 9+2Nw[5] 8 5 41
[4]: Nr≤16, indicating the number of requests to read registers;
[5]: Nw≤16, indicating the number of requests to write registers.
[6]: Nw+Nr≤16;
11.3.6 CRC check
The low byte of CRC check is in front of the high byte.
The transmitter first calculates the CRC value, which is included in the sent message. Upon
receiving the message, the receiver will recalculate the CRC value and compare the calculated
value with the received CRC value. If the two values are not equal, it means that there is an error
in the sending process.
Calculation process of CRC check:
(1) Define a CRC register and assign an initial value, FFFFH.
(2) Perform the XOR calculation with the first byte of the transmitted message and the value of
the CRC register, and store the result in the CRC register. Starting from the address code, the
start bit and stop bit are not involved in calculation.
(3) Extract and check the LSB (the least significant bit of the CRC register).
(4) If the LSB is 1, each bit of the CRC register is shifted to the right by one bit, and the most
significant bit is supplemented by 0. Perform the XOR calculation of the value of the CRC
register and A001H, and store the result in the CRC register.
333
(5) If the LSB is 0, each bit of the CRC register is shifted to the right by one bit, and the most
significant bit is supplemented by 0.
(6) Repeat the steps 3, 4, and 5 until 8 shifts are completed.
(7) Repeat the steps 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 to process next byte of the transmitted message, until all
bytes of the transmitted message are processed.
(8) After the calculation, the content of the CRC register is the value of CRC check.
(9) In a system with limited time resources, it is recommended to perform CRC check by the
table lookup method.
The simple function of CRC is as follows (programmed in C language):
unsigned int CRC_Cal_Value(unsigned char *Data, unsigned char Length)
{
unsigned int crc_value = 0xFFFF;
int i = 0;
while(Length--)
{
crc_value ^= *Data++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_value & 0x0001)
{
crc_value = (crc_value>>1)^ 0xa001;
}
else
{
crc_value = crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
return(crc_value);
}
This only describes the theory of CRC check and requires a long execution time. Especially
334
when the check data is long, the calculation time will be too long. Thus, the following two table
lookup methods are applied for 16-bit and 8-bit controllers, respectively.
 CRC16 lookup table for the 8-bit processor: (The high byte in the final result of this program
is in front. Please reverse it during sending.)
const Uint8 crc_l_tab[256] = {
0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40,
0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40
};
constUint8 crc_h_tab[256] = {
0x00,0xC0,0xC1,0x01,0xC3,0x03,0x02,0xC2,0xC6,0x06,0x07,0xC7,0x05,0xC5,0xC4,0x04,
0xCC,0x0C,0x0D,0xCD,0x0F,0xCF,0xCE,0x0E,0x0A,0xCA,0xCB,0x0B,0xC9,0x09,0x08,0xC8,
0xD8,0x18,0x19,0xD9,0x1B,0xDB,0xDA,0x1A,0x1E,0xDE,0xDF,0x1F,0xDD,0x1D,0x1C,0xDC,
0x14,0xD4,0xD5,0x15,0xD7,0x17,0x16,0xD6,0xD2,0x12,0x13,0xD3,0x11,0xD1,0xD0,0x10,
0xF0,0x30,0x31,0xF1,0x33,0xF3,0xF2,0x32,0x36,0xF6,0xF7,0x37,0xF5,0x35,0x34,0xF4,
0x3C,0xFC,0xFD,0x3D,0xFF,0x3F,0x3E,0xFE,0xFA,0x3A,0x3B,0xFB,0x39,0xF9,0xF8,0x38,
0x28,0xE8,0xE9,0x29,0xEB,0x2B,0x2A,0xEA,0xEE,0x2E,0x2F,0xEF,0x2D,0xED,0xEC,0x2C,
0xE4,0x24,0x25,0xE5,0x27,0xE7,0xE6,0x26,0x22,0xE2,0xE3,0x23,0xE1,0x21,0x20,0xE0,
335
0xA0,0x60,0x61,0xA1,0x63,0xA3,0xA2,0x62,0x66,0xA6,0xA7,0x67,0xA5,0x65,0x64,0xA4,
0x6C,0xAC,0xAD,0x6D,0xAF,0x6F,0x6E,0xAE,0xAA,0x6A,0x6B,0xAB,0x69,0xA9,0xA8,0x68,
0x78,0xB8,0xB9,0x79,0xBB,0x7B,0x7A,0xBA,0xBE,0x7E,0x7F,0xBF,0x7D,0xBD,0xBC,0x7C,
0xB4,0x74,0x75,0xB5,0x77,0xB7,0xB6,0x76,0x72,0xB2,0xB3,0x73,0xB1,0x71,0x70,0xB0,
0x50,0x90,0x91,0x51,0x93,0x53,0x52,0x92,0x96,0x56,0x57,0x97,0x55,0x95,0x94,0x54,
0x9C,0x5C,0x5D,0x9D,0x5F,0x9F,0x9E,0x5E,0x5A,0x9A,0x9B,0x5B,0x99,0x59,0x58,0x98,
0x88,0x48,0x49,0x89,0x4B,0x8B,0x8A,0x4A,0x4E,0x8E,0x8F,0x4F,0x8D,0x4D,0x4C,0x8C,
0x44,0x84,0x85,0x45,0x87,0x47,0x46,0x86,0x82,0x42,0x43,0x83,0x41,0x81,0x80,0x40
};
Uint16CRC(Uint8 * buffer, Uint8 crc_len)
{
Uint8 crc_i,crc_lsb,crc_msb;
Uint16 crc;
crc_msb = 0xFF;
crc_lsb = 0xFF;
while(crc_len--)
{
crc_i = crc_lsb ^ *buffer;
buffer ++;
crc_lsb = crc_msb ^ crc_l_tab[crc_i];
crc_msb = crc_h_tab[crc_i];
}
crc = crc_msb;
crc = (crc << 8) + crc_lsb;
return crc;
}
 CRC16 lookup table for the 16-bit processor: (The high byte in the final result of this program
is in front. Please reverse it during sending.)
const Uint16 crc_table[256] = {
0x0000,0xC1C0,0x81C1,0x4001,0x01C3,0xC003,0x8002,0x41C2,0x01C6,0xC006
,0x8007,0x41C7,0x0005,0xC1C5,0x81C4,0x4004,0x01CC,0xC00C,0x800D,0x41CD
,0x000F,0xC1CF,0x81CE,0x400E,0x000A,0xC1CA,0x81CB,0x400B,0x01C9,0xC009
336
,0x8008,0x41C8,0x01D8,0xC018,0x8019,0x41D9,0x001B,0xC1DB,0x81DA,0x401A
,0x001E,0xC1DE,0x81DF,0x401F,0x01DD,0xC01D,0x801C,0x41DC,0x0014,0xC1D4
,0x81D5,0x4015,0x01D7,0xC017,0x8016,0x41D6,0x01D2,0xC012,0x8013,0x41D3
,0x0011,0xC1D1,0x81D0,0x4010,0x01F0,0xC030,0x8031,0x41F1,0x0033,0xC1F3
,0x81F2,0x4032,0x0036,0xC1F6,0x81F7,0x4037,0x01F5,0xC035,0x8034,0x41F4
,0x003C,0xC1FC,0x81FD,0x403D,0x01FF,0xC03F,0x803E,0x41FE,0x01FA,0xC03A
,0x803B,0x41FB,0x0039,0xC1F9,0x81F8,0x4038,0x0028,0xC1E8,0x81E9,0x4029
,0x01EB,0xC02B,0x802A,0x41EA,0x01EE,0xC02E,0x802F,0x41EF,0x002D,0xC1ED
,0x81EC,0x402C,0x01E4,0xC024,0x8025,0x41E5,0x0027,0xC1E7,0x81E6,0x4026
,0x0022,0xC1E2,0x81E3,0x4023,0x01E1,0xC021,0x8020,0x41E0,0x01A0,0xC060
,0x8061,0x41A1,0x0063,0xC1A3,0x81A2,0x4062,0x0066,0xC1A6,0x81A7,0x4067
,0x01A5,0xC065,0x8064,0x41A4,0x006C,0xC1AC,0x81AD,0x406D,0x01AF,0xC06F
,0x806E,0x41AE,0x01AA,0xC06A,0x806B,0x41AB,0x0069,0xC1A9,0x81A8,0x4068
,0x0078,0xC1B8,0x81B9,0x4079,0x01BB,0xC07B,0x807A,0x41BA,0x01BE,0xC07E
,0x807F,0x41BF,0x007D,0xC1BD,0x81BC,0x407C,0x01B4,0xC074,0x8075,0x41B5
,0x0077,0xC1B7,0x81B6,0x4076,0x0072,0xC1B2,0x81B3,0x4073,0x01B1,0xC071
,0x8070,0x41B0,0x0050,0xC190,0x8191,0x4051,0x0193,0xC053,0x8052,0x4192
,0x0196,0xC056,0x8057,0x4197,0x0055,0xC195,0x8194,0x4054,0x019C,0xC05C
,0x805D,0x419D,0x005F,0xC19F,0x819E,0x405E,0x005A,0xC19A,0x819B,0x405B
,0x0199,0xC059,0x8058,0x4198,0x0188,0xC048,0x8049,0x4189,0x004B,0xC18B
,0x818A,0x404A,0x004E,0xC18E,0x818F,0x404F,0x018D,0xC04D,0x804C,0x418C
,0x0044,0xC184,0x8185,0x4045,0x0187,0xC047,0x8046,0x4186,0x0182,0xC042
,0x8043,0x4183,0x0041,0xC181,0x8180,0x4040};
Uint16 CRC16(Uint16 *msg , Uint16 len){
Uint16 crcL = 0xFF , crcH = 0xFF;
Uint16 index;
while(len--){
index = crcL ^ *msg++;
crcL = ((crc_table[index] & 0xFF00) >> 8) ^ (crcH);
crcH = crc_table[index] & 0xFF;
}
337
return (crcH<<8) | (crcL);

}
11.3.7 Exception response
When the master station sends a request to the slave station, the master station expects a
normal response. Query of the master station may result in one of the following four events:
 If a request without communication error is received from the slave station and can be
processed properly, a normal response will be returned by the slave station.
 If the slave station does not receive a request due to communication errors, no
message will be returned. This will be regarded as a timeout by the slave station.
 If the slave station receives a request but detects a communication error (parity,
address, frame error, etc.), no response will be returned. This will be regarded as a
timeout by the slave station.
 If the slave station receives a request without communication error but cannot process
the request (e.g. a request to read the non-existent register), the slave station will
return an exception response and the master station will be informed of the actual
error.
The exception response message has two fields different from those of the normal
response:
 Function code field: In the normal response, the slave station copies the function code
of the original request in the corresponding function code field. The MSB values of
all function codes are 0. In the exception response, the MSB of the function code is
set to 1 by the slave station. That is, the exception response function code =
normal response function code + 0x80.
 Data field: The slave station can return the data from the data field in the normal
response and exception code in the exception response. For the defined exception
codes, Table 4-33 Definitions of Exception CodesTable 4-33.
Table 4-33 Definitions of Exception Codes
Exception Item Meaning
code
The function code received by the slave station (inverter) is
01H Illegal function
beyond the configured range (see 11.3.3Function code).
02H Illegal data The data address received by the slave station (inverter) is not
338
address allowed. In particular, the combination of the start address of
the register and the transmission length is invalid (see
11.3.4Register address distribution).
Illegal data The slave station (inverter) has detected the incorrect query
03H
frame data frame length or CRC check.
When the slave station (inverter) tries to execute a requested
04H Slave protection operation, an unrecoverable error occurs. This may be caused
by the logic error, failure to write to the EEPROM, etc.
The data received by the slave station (inverter) is not
05H Data over-range between the minimum and maximum values of the
corresponding register.
Parameter The current register is read-only and cannot be written.
06H
read-only
Unchangeable When the inverter is in the running status, the current register
07H parameter in cannot be written. If necessary, please shut down the inverter.
running
Parameter The current register is protected by a password.
08H protection by
password
11.4 Protocol Description

11.4.1 Definition of inter-frame and intra-frame time interval
A complete MODBUS message contains not only the necessary data units, but also the
starting and ending tags. Thus, as shown in Fig. 12-20 or Fig. 4-22, the idle level with a
transmission time of 3.5 characters or more is defined as the starting and ending tag. If there is
an idle level with a transmission time of more than 1.5 characters during message transmission,
the transmission will be deemed exceptional.
Specific starting/ending and exception intervals are related to the baud rate, as detailed in
Table 4-34. If the baud rate is 9600bps and the sampling period is 1ms, the starting and ending
time interval is the idle level of 4ms or more (3.5×10/9600=3.64≈4), and the exceptional data
interval is the idle level in which the interval of data bits of one frame is greater than or equal to
2ms (1.5×10/9600=1.56≈2) and less than 4m (the idle level of normal data bits is less than or
equal to 1ms).
339
Table 4-34 Correspondence between Time Interval and Baud Rate (tadjust=1ms)
Correspondence
Starting and
between Time Exception
ending time
Interval and interval Texception Remarks
interval
Baud Rate (tadjust)
Tinterval (tadjust)
(tadjust=1ms)
The idle level of 3ms or less is allowed
for a normal frame. When the idle level
4800 8 4
is 8ms or greater, it indicates the end of
a frame of data.
The idle level of 1ms or less is allowed
for a normal frame. When the idle level
9600 4 2
is 4ms or greater, it indicates the end of
a frame of data.
The idle level of less than 1ms is
allowed for a normal frame. When the
19200 2 1
idle level is 2ms or greater, it indicates
the end of a frame of data.
When an idle level of 1ms appears, it
Higher 1 1
indicates the end of a frame.
Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3
Except
ional Normal
frame
t0
< 1.5 characters 3.5 characters

At least 3.5 At least 3.5 ＞ 1.5 characters
characters characters 4.5 characters
Fig. 4-22 Schematic Diagram of Normal and Exceptional Data Frames

11.4.2 Data frame processing
Upon receiving a frame data, the system will first perform preprocessing to determine
whether it is a legal frame sent to this machine and check whether the data is correct, followed
by final processing. If the received frame is not legal, the data will not be sent back. If the
received frame is legal but incorrect, the corresponding exceptional message frame will be sent
back.
Legal frame: Meet the address (local or broadcast) and length (not less than 3)
requirements.
Correct frame: It is a legal frame with a correct memory address. The memory content is
within the defined range and can be processed at present.
340
11.4.3 Response delay
The response delay (depending on the function code F10.04) is defined as the time interval
from the reception of valid data frame[7] (data in the RS-485 network, different from the
command sent by the keyboard) to data parsing and return. Since the starting and ending
characters are defined in the standard protocol, it is impossible to avoid response delay, at least
“3.5-character time interval + 1 ms (chip stabilization time of 485 protocol, twait2)”. The specific
minimum time interval is related to the baud rate. If the baud rate is 9600bps, the minimum
response delay is 5ms (3.5×10/9600+1=4.64≈5).
If the communication data involves EEPROM operation, the time interval will be
longer.
[7]: Valid data frame: Sent by the external master station (not keyboard) to this machine.
The function code, length and CRC of the data are correct.Fig. 4-23 shows the data sending
segment (tsend), sending end segment (twait1), 75176-to-sending wait segment (twait2), data return
segment (treturn), and 75176-to-receiving wait segment (twait3).
t twait 3
twait 2
tsend twait 1 treturn
Fig. 4-23 Timing Parse Diagram of Complete Data Frame

11.4.4 Communication timeout
The communication time interval △t is defined as the period from the previous reception of
valid data frames by the slave station (inverter) to next reception of valid data frames. If △t is
greater than the set time (depending on the function code F10.03; this function is invalid if set to
0), it will be regarded communication timeout.
341
Fig. 4-24 485 Schematic Diagram of Network Link Data
11.5 Examples
1) Forward running of inverter
Send: 01 41 70 0000 01 E6 C5
Return: 01 41 70 0000 01 E6 C5 (normal)
Return: 01 C1 04 70 53 (exception, assuming a slave protection)
Send the invoice to Normal Return Exception Return
* Frame header ≥3.5 characters (idle)
1 Address 01 Address 01 Address 01
2 Function code 41 Function code 41 Function code C1
3 Register address Hi 70 Register address Hi 70 Exception code 04 (assumption)
4 Register address Lo 00 Register address Lo 00 CRC check Lo 70
5 Register value Hi 00 Register value Hi 00 CRC check Hi 53
6 Register value Lo 01 Register value Lo 01
7 CRC check Lo E6 CRC check Lo E6
8 CRC check Hi C5 CRC check Hi C5
* Tail ≥3.5 characters (idle)
2) Free stop of inverter

Send: 01 41 70 0000 07 66 C7
Return: 01 41 70 0000 07 66 C7 (normal)
342
7 CRC check Lo 66 CRC check Lo 66
8 CRC check Hi C7 CRC check Hi C7
3) Command word for change of set frequency (e.g. 50.00Hz/1388H) (F00.04=7)

Send: 01 41 70 15 13 88 3B 97
Return: 01 41 70 15 13 88 3B 97 (normal)
7 CRC check Lo 3B CRC check Lo 3B
8 CRC check Hi 97 CRC check Hi 97
1) Read the information of last protection (read the function codes F19.00-F19.05)
Send: 01 03 13 00 00 06 C1 4C
Return: 01 03 0C 00 11 00 00 00 00 01 2C 00 00 00 0053 5B (normal)
Return: 01 83 04 40 F3 (exception, assuming a slave protection)
2 Function code 03 Function code 03 Function code 83
3 Starting address Hi 13 Number of bytes 0C Exception code 04 (assumption)
4 Starting address Lo 00 Register value Hi (F19.00) 00 CRC check Lo 40
5 Number (Hi) of 00 Register value Lo (F19.00) 11 CRC check Hi F3
registers
6 Number (Lo) of 06 Register value Hi (F19.01) 00
registers
7 CRC check Lo C Register value Lo (F19.01) 00
1
8 CRC check Hi 4 Register value Hi (F19.02) 00
C
9 Register value Lo (F19.02) 00
343
10 Register value Hi (F19.03) 01
11 Register value Lo (F19.03) 2C
16 CRC check Lo 53
17 CRC check Hi 5B
2) Check whether the line is connected.

Send: 01 08 00 00 AA 55 5E 94
Return: 01 08 00 00 AA 55 5E 94 (normal)
Return: 01 88 04 47 C3 (exception, assuming a slave protection)
2 Function 08 Function 08 Function code 88
3 Sub-function code Hi 00 Sub-function code Hi 00 Exception code 04 (assumption)
4 Sub-function code Lo 00 Sub-function code Lo 00 CRC check Lo 47
5 Data Hi AA Data Hi AA CRC check Hi C3
6 Data Lo 55 Data Lo 55
7 CRC check Lo 5E CRC check Lo 5E
8 CRC check Hi 94 CRC check Hi 94
3) Change the carrier frequency (F00.23) to 4.0kHz. (use the function code 0x06 as such
function codes are expected to be stored in EEPROM after change)
Send: 01 06 00 17 00 28 39 D0
Return: 01 06 00 17 00 28 39 D0 (normal)
Return: 01 86 04 43 A3 (exception, assuming a slave protection)
2 Function code 06 Function code 06 Function code 86
5 Register value Hi 00 Register value Hi 00 CRC check Hi A3
7 CRC check Lo 39 CRC check Lo 39
344
8 CRC check Hi D0 CRC check Hi D0
345

EM730UserManual (V100)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EM730UserManual (V100)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EM730UserManual (V100)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter

Document No.: 31010183

The EM730/EM730E series inverter is a high-reliable and small-sized universal inverter

Features of the EM730/EM730E series inverter:

and even deaths.

Warning: The danger caused by nonconforming operations, including moderate or

minor injuries and equipment damage.

1. Handle the controller with care; otherwise, it may be damaged!

Thermal protection of motor

About motor heat and noise

Presence of voltage-dependent device or capacitor increasing the power factor on output

Use beyond rated voltage

Lightning impulse protection

Altitude and derating

Precautions for scrapping of inverter

Chapter 1 Overview ...................................................................................... 10

Chapter 2 Installation ................................................................................... 19

Chapter 3 Wiring ........................................................................................... 26

Chapter 4 KEYBOARD OPERATIONS ..................................................... 48

Chapter 5 Trial run ....................................................................................... 57

5.1 Inverter Commissioning Process .............................................................................. 57

Chapter 6 Function Code Table ................................................................... 64

Chapter 7 Function Code Details ............................................................... 129

7.20 F19 protection record parameter group ................................................................ 279

Chapter 8 Motor Parameter Self-identification ........................................ 298

Chapter 9 Protection/Warning Solutions .................................................. 301

Chapter 10 Select accessories ..................................................................... 313

Chapter 11 MODBUS Communication Protocol ...................................... 317

1.1 Model and Specification of EM730/EM730E Series Inverter

Multi-function output of one open collector and one relay

1.2 Detailed Introduction to Running Status of EM730/EM730E series

Setting of auxiliary 0: synthetic frequency of main

1 Setting of main and

1-1Schematic Diagram of Speed Input Mode

nth segment: F08.00- 1: digital frequency setting F00.07 UP/DOWN setting

Fig. 1-2 Schematic diagram of Setting of Main Frequency Source A

10: process PID

11: simple PLC

Fig. 1-3 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Auxiliary Frequency Source B

3: min (main A, auxiliary B)

Fig. 1-4 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Main and Auxiliary Operations

Torque of the n th segment

Fig. 1-5 Schematic Diagram of Torque Input Mode

setting mode, regardless of the current setting mode.

1.2.4 Operation method of inverter

input mode as an example).

RUN RUN Run button

Forward Xi Stop button

Xi Stop button 1 Forward

Fig. 1-6 Control Logic Diagram of Terminal Operation

2.1 Product check

 Never install the inverter damaged or with some parts missing.

 Description of inverter model

2.2 Outline dimensions and installation dimensions

(a) Appearance of EM730/EM730E-0R7-3B to EM730/EM730E-022-3B inverters

(b) Appearance of EM730/EM730E-030-3B to EM730/EM730E-075-3 inverters

Appearance of EM730/EM730E-090-3 to EM730/EM730E-160-3 inverters

(d) EM730 keyboard appearance